Location

Blaser Mills Law joins Charlton Athletic as official legal partner

We are excited to announce a new partnership with Charlton Athletic,  a professional association football club based in Charlton, south-east London.

As we advance into the 2024/25 season, we join as the club’s official legal partner, marking the beginning of a collaboration based on shared values and our sports sector expertise.

Blaser Mills Law will be providing vital commercial support to the club, with the potential to extend services to players for personal legal needs as they arise. Additionally, we will take on the role of match ball sponsors for several home games throughout the season, further strengthening our presence within the club and community.

Hiren Gandhi, partner at Blaser Mills Law, shared his excitement about the new partnership: “We are delighted to work with Charlton Athletic this season and contribute to the success of the club both on and off the pitch. Charlton’s recognition as Community Club of the Year for 2024 aligns perfectly with our mission to operate as a responsible business and make a positive impact on the local community.”

Barry Higson, Head of Commercial at Charlton Athletic, expressed his enthusiasm for the partnership, stating: “We are incredibly pleased to welcome Blaser Mills Law to the Charlton family. Their expertise in sports law and their commitment to supporting both the club and the community make them a perfect fit for us. This partnership is not just about legal support; it’s about aligning with an organisation that shares our values and vision for the future.

Read the full press release from Charlton Athletic here: Club announce Blaser Mills Law partnership | Charlton Athletic Football Club (charltonafc.com).

For all sports enquiries please contact us on enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Blaser Mills Law joins the BritishAmerican Business

We are delighted to have joined BAB (BritishAmerican Business) – the leading transatlantic trade association incorporating the British-American Chamber of Commerce in the US and the American Chamber of Commerce in the UK. 

BAB are committed to strengthening the economic corridor between the United States and the United Kingdom by supporting policies and actions that protect and enhance the environment for transatlantic trade and investment.

Blaser Mills Law has a strong international capability and we frequently advise US and other international clients on a broad range of cross-border legal issues.

Oksana Howard, Partner in our international M&A team comments:

“This membership will compliment and strengthen our already very strong US relationships, given that we regularly work with many US professionals and clients on various cross-border transactions and matters involving US/UK element.”

Blaser Mills Law ranks in the Chambers High Net Worth Guide 2024

The Chambers High Net Worth (HNW) Guide has announced the results of its latest rankings for 2024. The guide ranks solicitors in specialist areas of law within the High Net Worth category.

Recognised as the most commonly used directory in the legal sector, the Chambers HNW Guide has moved up our Wills, Trust and Probate team to Band 1, having ranked previously for eight consecutive years, and sees the team as a ‘Leading Firm’ in Private Wealth Law , with feedback highlighting various strengths of the department:

“Their level of expertise has given me every confidence that I am in a winning position and am in no doubt that I have the best people behind me.”
“I have always found Blaser Mills quick to marshall the client for instructions, become available for conferences, and in facilitating counsel to make difficult deadlines under pressure.”
“Blaser Mills are always very responsive, supportive and knowledgeable.”

Jonathan Gallop, Partner and Head of Wills, Trusts and Probate, has ranked for three consecutive years as a Band 3 Individual in Private Wealth Law. In the guide Jonathan’s private wealth law clients left him great feedback: “Jonathan is very approachable, he listens and seems genuinely kind and appreciates your situation if lots of bereavements.”

Senior Associate, Sara Rendell, has been ranked as an ‘Associate to Watch’ in Private Wealth Law, four years running. The guide describes Sara as a “… efficient, clear, responsive, knowledgeable and cheerful.”

We are also delighted to announce that our Partner, Karen Woodison, has ranked for the first time in Band 3. A client said: “It’s a good working relationship and I’m always pleased to speak with Karen, who is always helpful.”

Partner and Head of department, Jonathan, commented: “I am delighted that our team has been recognised as leaders in its field by Chambers, assuring our clients that we provide an excellent level of service and specialist legal advice to High Net Worth individuals. It is great to see the team rank in Band 1, moving up two positions over the last few years is a great testament to the hard work that goes on behind the scenes”.

For any enquiries related to our Wills, Trusts and Probate team contact us on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

The importance of postnuptial agreements

In today’s evolving legal landscape, postnuptial agreements are becoming increasingly relevant. These agreements, drafted and signed after a couple is already married, serve as a vital tool in managing marital assets and clarifying financial responsibilities. Their significance lies in the protection they offer, not just in the event of a divorce, but throughout the marriage itself.

A postnuptial agreement, much like its counterpart, the prenuptial agreement, outlines the distribution of assets, financial duties, and other pertinent financial issues between spouses. However, the distinction is that a postnuptial agreement is created after the marriage has taken place. This timing allows couples to base their agreement on the realities of their marriage rather than pre-marital assumptions.

Lucinda Holliday, Partner and Head of the Family and Divorce team, outlines the key benefits.

Financial clarity and security
One of the primary benefits of a postnuptial agreement is its ability to provide financial clarity and security. Marriages often face unexpected changes, whether due to career shifts, inheritance, or other life events. A postnuptial agreement can address these changes by updating the financial terms and responsibilities agreed upon by both parties. This not only helps in managing expectations but also reduces the potential disputes, ensuring that both partners are on the same page regarding their assets and liabilities.

Safeguarding individual interests
Postnuptial agreements can be particularly advantageous in safeguarding individual interests. For instance, if one spouse starts a business after marriage, a postnuptial agreement can delineate the ownership and financial rights related to the business. This can prevent future conflicts and protect the business from being subject to division in the event of a divorce. Similarly, if one partner receives a significant inheritance or gift, a postnuptial agreement can ensure that these assets are preserved and remain separate from the marital property.

Protecting children’s interests
The importance of postnuptial agreements also extends to protecting children, whether from a previous relationship or the current marriage. By clearly defining the financial provisions for children, such as inheritance rights and educational expenses, postnuptial agreements can provide a sense of security and stability. This is particularly crucial in blended families, where the financial dynamics can be more complex.

Fostering marital improvement
Postnuptial agreements can serve as a tool for marital improvement. The process of creating a postnuptial agreement requires open and honest communication about finances, which can help to build trust and transparency between partners.

Legal enforceability and fairness
Legally, the enforceability of postnuptial agreements has seen a positive shift. Courts are increasingly recognising these agreements, provided they are entered into freely by both parties, with full disclosure of assets, and without any form of coercion. Ensuring that the agreement is fair and reasonable at the time of its creation and at the time it is intended to be enforced is crucial for its validity.

As the legal landscape continues to evolve, the importance of these agreements is likely to grow, making them a prudent consideration for married couples.

To speak to the Family and Divorce team regarding pre or post nuptial agreements call 01494 478603 or email Lucinda Holliday on lucinda.holliday@blasermills.co.uk.

Understanding unregistered land titles

Unregistered title, although not as common as it used to be, is common in many parts of the UK and makes up approximately 15% of land in England and Wales. Compulsory registration was gradually phased in by virtue of the Land Registration Act 1925 and became compulsory for any transfer of land or property by 1990.

This means for those who purchased their property before compulsory registration, their title deeds may still be unregistered. The safe keeping of title deeds is always one of concern as if they become lost or mislaid it can be incredibly difficult, time consuming and costly to try to reconstitute the title.

The purpose of registration follows three basic principles:

  1. The insurance principle refers to the guarantee secured by the State that any loss incurred by a registered land resulting from reliance on the conclusiveness of the Land Registry by a land purchaser will be compensated through a statutory indemnity system.
  2. The curtain principle, on the other hand, is the concept that land registration may allow certain equitable interests attached to the land hidden from a purchaser’s view. This ‘curtain,’ however, does not affect the validity of any transaction on the registered land so long as the details of the registration reflects the validity of the title.
  3. The mirror principle. The mirror principle refers to the idea that the due registration of a land title must reflect all the important and significant details that a purchaser must know before buying the land. These details refer to the identity of the owner, the nature of his ownership, any limitations on his ownership and any rights enjoyed by other persons over the land that are adverse to the owner.

The electronic register keeps a record of owners of property and land together with the interest of any mortgage lenders and which can be downloaded at the ‘touch of a button’. This means subject to completing satisfactory identity checks, a seller can instruct any solicitor who can readily download their title documents from His Majesty’s Land Registry (HMLR) in preparation for a sale/transfer.

Once a property is registered you can sign up to Land Registry alerts so that you are notified if there is significant activity on your property. The alerts can help prevent property fraud.

Unregistered deeds used to be kept in safe storage by the mortgage lender as security for their loan during its lifetime. Once the mortgage was repaid in full, the lender would ordinarily release the deeds to their client.

Keeping unregistered title deeds carries the risk of loss or destruction. Once unregistered deeds are gone, they cannot simply be replaced. Reconstruction results in extensive work being carried out. The identity of the true owner and the history of how the deeds came to be lost needs to be established and evidenced to HMLR in order for them to consider an application to reconstitute the title and which may or may not be successful.

The decision whether to voluntarily register your title deeds is something to be carefully considered. HMLR offer a reduced fee to process a voluntary registration in an effort to encourage people to do so.

If you have unregistered deeds and are contemplating registering them, we would strongly recommend that you do so and would be very happy if you would like to give us a call so that we can assist you.

Speak to Sarah Corsby from our Residential Property team today on 01494 781357 or email sarah.corsby@blasermills.co.uk.

South Asian Heritage Month interview with Co-founder, Jasvir Singh CBE

In conjunction with South Asian Heritage Month this year, one of our trainees Simran Hoonjan reached out to one of the co-founders, Jasvir Singh CBE to find out more about the birth of the initiative and its significance. South Asian Heritage Month will run from 18 July to 17 August 2024, and this will be the 5th anniversary of the project.

A transcript of the interview can be seen below. 

1. Why did you and Binita decide to set up South Asian Heritage Month?

Jasvir Singh CBE and Dr Binita Kane established South Asian Heritage Month in 2020 to celebrate and raise awareness of the diverse cultures, histories, and contributions of South Asian communities in the UK. The initiative, which runs from 18th July to 17th August each year, aims to foster understanding and cohesion, highlight the positive impact of South Asians on British society, and address issues of identity, heritage, and integration. By doing so, they hope to create a more inclusive society that recognizes and appreciates the rich tapestry of South Asian heritage.

2. Tell me a bit more about this year’s theme – ‘Free to Be Me.’

This year, our theme is “Free to Be Me,” and we’re excited to celebrate the beauty of simply being yourself. Every one of us has a unique journey filled with moments that have shaped who we are. We want to hear about the experiences that have taught you valuable lessons and helped you grow. No matter who you are, your story matters. Our stories connect us in profound ways, and there are countless ways to share them. Whether you express yourself through art, writing, music, fashion, or food, your heritage is worth celebrating. Let’s explore the diverse ways we honour our roots and individuality. Intersectionality is given the spotlight in this manner. We also appreciate that not everyone is free to be themselves, and we want to focus on what barriers there are which prevent that from happening


3. Why is diversity and inclusion so important in the workplace?

Diversity and inclusion is so important in the workplace because it allows us to bring our authentic selves along to our professional lives, as well as celebrate who we truly are without having to hide aspects of our identity or diminish who we are as individuals

4. Tell me about your journey into law and what motivated you to pursue family law?

I became interested in family law from a young age. I was 8 years old when a family member was going through a divorce and I remember just how difficult it was for them. I couldn’t understand why it was such a painful and drawn out process, and I wanted to help people going through such painful times as best I could. That desire to help has remained with me throughout my adult life. Family law to me is about solving human issues using the legal system, and about providing a focus on the issues in hand without allowing emotions to get in the way of the best outcome. At the heart of it all are families wanting to get closure and a resolution to their problems so that they can move on with their lives.


5. What would you say is your biggest achievement to date?

My biggest achievement to date has been getting a CBE from the King in the 2023 New Year’s honours list in recognition of my extensive charity work, including the founding of South Asian Heritage Month. Both of my parents worked in factories and neither of them went to university, so to have come from a working class background to gain such an honour means a great deal to me as well as my family.


6. What other efforts do you think law firms can do to boost diversity and inclusion?

Generally speaking, law firms tend to be diverse places of work. However, the structures do sometimes mean that the diversity can’t always be seen at all levels within the law firms. Also, intersectional identities tend to be hidden in the workplace. I’m a proud turban wearing gay Sikh man, and yet I am aware of many LGBTQ+ South Asian lawyers who keep their sexuality a secret because they fear how people may react at their law firms or in Chambers. There is much work yet to do to allow people to be truly free to be themselves. One thing I would suggest would be to create safe environments at work so that individuals can open up about themselves if they feel comfortable to do so. It’s also important to recognise that not everyone wants to be open in the workplace, and that needs to be respected and understood too.

From October 2024 employers must take reasonable steps to prevent workplace sexual harassment

From October 2024 there will be new legal duty on employers to take reasonable steps to prevent sexual harassment in the workplace.

The Worker Protection (Amendment of Equality Act 2010) Act 2023 follows an inquiry in 2018 by the Women and Equalities Committee into the extent of sexual harassment at work. The inquiry recommended existing laws were ‘beefed up’ to force employers to be more proactive about shielding workers from harm.

The legislation amends the provisions in the Equality Act 2010 to better protect employees from workplace harassment and sexual harassment, shifting the focus from ‘redress’ to ‘prevention’. It introduces a duty on employers to take proactive steps to prevent sexual harassment from occurring in the workplace, placing greater responsibility on them to make workplaces safer, and to take a robust approach to complaints of sexual harassment. 

If employers fail to take reasonable steps to prevent sexual harassment, the Equality and Human Rights Commission (EHRC) can take enforcement steps. Also, where an employment tribunal has first upheld a claim for sexual harassment, it will have the discretion to award a ‘compensation uplift’ by increasing any compensation it awards for sexual harassment by up to 25%.

What the new duty means for employers

An employer is vicariously liable for discrimination, harassment (including sexual harassment) or victimisation committed by an employee in the course of employment, unless it can show it took all reasonable steps to prevent its employee from committing a particular discriminatory act. Reasonable steps might include having an equal opportunities policy or an anti-harassment and bullying policy. The employer must also take steps to implement the policies, such as providing sufficient and regular training to staff and managers as well as regular reviews of policies.

All employers should take action to comply with the new positive obligation to prevent sexual harassment. Beyond simply trying to avail themselves of the defence that they took reasonable steps to prevent harassment, many organisations will want to use this opportunity to support their female workforce and others who are particularly vulnerable. 

Steps for employers to consider before October 2024

In order for employers to take the necessary proactive steps to prevent sexual harassment in the workplace, employers should consider implementing the following measures:

  • Ensure there is a reporting register for complaints about all forms of harassment.

This will allow ongoing monitoring to spot themes or particularly risky practices and take action to address these. There are data protection implications of creating and maintaining such a register, for instance, employers will need to identify a lawful basis and ensure any register can only be accessed on a ‘need-to-know’ basis and is appropriately secured.

  • Identify the risk of harassment in each set of roles and circumstances and thinking through specific measures to protect employees in each.
  • Take employee-facing steps such as updating and re-circulating anti-harassment tailored training to help staff members avoid the threat of harassment, and to give those who witness harassment the means to safely intervene and/or report the incident.
  • The EHRC’s guidance on sexual harassment and harassment at work contains steps employers should consider taking in order to prevent and deal with harassment at work. It is intended that the introduction of the new employer duty to take reasonable steps will be supported by the EHRC’s statutory Code of Practice on workplace harassment, which is due to be published in time for the Bill’s implementation.
  • Although the amendments to the Bill in the House of Lords removed the duty to protect workers from third-party harassment, employers may still consider third-party facing steps like installing visible signs in areas where customers interact with staff members explaining that threats, violence and harassment will not be tolerated and providing a means for bystanders to report instances of staff harassment.

If you would like access to advice or need further guidance, please contact the Employment Team at Blaser Mills Law on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Whose T&Cs win? Handling competing business terms

Terms of business (T&Cs) are vital for the smooth operation of supply of goods and services for businesses across all industries. A clearer, functional set of standard T&Cs is a hugely valuable business tool that can govern business relationships without the need for individually-negotiated contracts with each customer or supplier, which would be impractical to achieve for busy commercial parties.

While firms strive for clearly drafted T&Cs setting out their delivery obligations, liability and apportionment of risk against a supplier or customer, this can be undermined if the supplier or customer instead seeks to impose their own T&Cs on the relationship.  It is therefore important to understand whose T&Cs will prevail to any business contract. In legal doctrine, this is known as the “Battle of the Forms”.

In most cases, if two contacting parties each seek to impose their own equally-balanced T&Cs, the courts will apply the rule that the “last shot wins”. This means that the last set of T&Cs that are shared and acknowledged or accepted by the other party will prevail. While this is simple enough to comprehend, it presents difficulty where both parties seek for their T&Cs to be the ‘last shot’ issued in hope that this alone will make their T&Cs the binding document. It also has its limitations that even if the T&Cs are issued last, if they are not validly acknowledged or accepted by the other side, they would still not take legal effect.

To help counteract these complications, there are certain steps that businesses can take to make sure that their T&Cs stand the best chance of being the accepted terms of a contractual relationship.

Drafting of the T&Cs:

  • Include clear wording that the T&Cs prevail over any other terms. This should include rival T&Cs, any other documents like pre-contract emails and even verbal discussions.
  • Clarify the contract formation process – At its core, a contract requires an offer and an acceptance. If a supplier makes an offer by sending a quote, which a customer accepts, then the customer’s action creates the contract – potentially using their T&Cs. This suits a customer looking to win the battle of the forms. If a supplier wants to win the battle though, it should ensure it (not the customer) creates the contract. Supplier T&Cs should clarify that a quote is not a formal offer, but the customer’s reply to or purchase order following that quote forms the offer, which the supplier accepts or rejects. The T&Cs should confirm that the contract comes into existence only upon the supplier’s acceptance and on the basis of the supplier’s T&Cs. If the customer does nothing further to challenge that position, it gives a clear indication that the supplier’s T&Cs should apply to the contract.

Practical steps for suppliers

  • Having set out an order process in the T&Cs, always follow it in practice. Avoid makinginadvertent offers by ensuring that pre-contract documents and correspondence (for example quotes or emails sending out a catalogue) are clearly described as not being offers. That way, the offer and acceptance process is not accidentally triggered at the wrong time and the process in the T&Cs can operate as planned.
  • Refer to the T&Cs in all pre-contract documents. A simple way to do this is to include a hyperlink to the T&Cs in all relevant documents.
  • Make the position even clearer when quoting: Quotations should clearly state that (a) they are not an offer and (b) any order that is placed further to the quote is based on the supplier’s standard T&Cs. For added clarity, the T&Cs could be appended to the quotation itself.
  • Send the T&Cs again with acceptance: Even if the T&Cs were shared at quote stage, attach them again when sending an order acknowledgment and make clear in the Order Acknowledgment email that the order – and the legal contract between supplier and customer – is based solely on the supplier’s T&Cs.
  • Commence work only after order acknowledgement. Staff should not commence work on an order until after the order acknowledgement has been sent. This counters the claim that the customer “created” the contract (and so the customer T&Cs apply) because the supplier started work on the contract following the customer’s action or correspondence.

For further information on how to make your T&Cs work harder for you, please contact Becky Cooper at becky.cooper@blasermills.co.uk or on 01494 932614.

Adjudication – Challenging enforcement

You may think that receiving an Adjudicator’s Decision is the end of the matter. However, there are occasions where the losing party to an Adjudication does not pay up. The winning party can then apply to the Technology and Construction Court (the “TCC”) to enforce the Adjudicator’s Decision.

The TCC’s standard approach is to enforce an Adjudicator’s Decision. The principal reasons for the TCC to decline to enforce is that the Adjudicator lacked jurisdiction on specific grounds or there has been a breach of natural justice. Further, there is now an increasing use of fraud allegations by resisting parties as a defence to enforcement.

Challenges to Enforcing an Adjudicator’s Decision

Lack of Jurisdiction
There are various grounds on which an Adjudicator’s jurisdiction can be challenged. Two of the most common grounds are:

  • The dispute referred to Adjudication had not crystallised at the time the dispute was referred.
  • The dispute referred to Adjudication was the same or substantially the same as a dispute already decided by an Adjudicator.

Where a party wishes to raise a challenge to jurisdiction at the enforcement stage, it is important for that party to reserve its position to do so as early as possible during the initial Adjudication proceedings, which in turn depends on when that party became aware of the circumstances giving rise to such a challenge.

If the resisting party did not reserve its rights, that party may be taken to have waived its right to do so and the TCC is unlikely to entertain a jurisdictional challenge at the enforcement stage.

Importantly, there is a danger in relying on a general reservation of rights. In the case of Bresco Electrical Services Ltd (in Liquidation) v Michael J Lonsdale (Electrical) Ltd [2019] EWCA Civ 27, (in which Blaser Mills represented the successful party) the Court of Appeal concluded that:

  1. A challenge to jurisdiction should be made “appropriately and clearly”.
  2. It is favourable for a party to reserve its position based on a specific objection “otherwise the adjudicator cannot investigate the point and, if appropriate, decide not to proceed, and the referring party cannot decide for itself whether the objection has merit”.

While a general reservation is not necessarily ineffective, a challenge to jurisdiction should be specific where a specific ground is known to the party wishing to challenge jurisdiction.

Breach of Natural Justice
Examples include the Adjudicator’s failure to:

  • Consult with both parties;
  • Give a party sufficient time to respond to a submission;
  • Take into account submissions from one party;
  • Take into account a party’s defence/counter-claim;
  • Give reasons for the Decision.

In practice, the TCC is very reluctant to refuse to enforce an Adjudicator’s Decision on the ground that there has been a breach of natural justice. The recent case of AZ v BY [2023] EWHC 2388 (TCC) offers one rare example in which the TCC was willing to do so. In this case, certain communications between the parties which were marked ‘without prejudice’ were submitted to the Adjudicator by the Referring Party in support of its Referral.

The Judge concluded that the “fair-minded and informed observer would conclude that there was a real possibility that, having seen the without prejudice material, the adjudicator was unconsciously biased”. Consequently, the TCC granted the Responding Party a declaration that the decision was unenforceable.

Importantly in this case, the without prejudice material was placed “front and centre within the adjudication” and the material contained implicit admissions by the Responding Party which were plainly inconsistent with its open position in the Adjudication.

While AZ v BY clarifies the position on the disclosure of without prejudice material in Adjudication, it also serves as a reminder to parties of the difficulties in challenging enforcement on the grounds of a breach of natural justice.

Finally, and almost as a footnote, it has been established law since the 2000 case of Bouygues UK Ltd v Dahl-Jensen UK Ltd [2000] EWCA Civ 507 that the courts will enforce an Adjudicator’s decision even where the Adjudicator was demonstrably wrong, as long as the Adjudicator answered the question posed.

Fraud
The courts will not allow the standard policy of enforcing Adjudicators’ decisions to be undermined simply because the other party makes an allegation of fraud. However, the court is unlikely to grant summary judgment in favour of an enforcing party where there is credible evidence that an Adjudicator’s Decision was founded (innocently or otherwise) on fraudulent conduct by the successful party.

The general principles as to whether a party may successfully allege fraud to avoid an Adjudication enforcement were set out in SG South Limited v Kings Head Cirencester LLP [2009] EWHC 2645 (TCC).

  • Fraud can be raised as a defence in Adjudication provided that it is a real defence to the claim.
  • Where a defence of fraud is raised, it must be supported by “clear and unambiguous evidence and argument”.
  • The TCC drew a distinction between cases in which fraudulent behaviour, acts or omissions which were or could have been raised as a defence during the initial Adjudication proceedings and those in which such behaviour, acts or omissions which emerged after the initial Adjudication proceedings took place. The TCC concluded that, in the former case, if the behaviour, acts or omissions were in effect adjudicated upon, the decision is enforceable and generally only in the latter case may allegations of fraud be raised after the initial proceedings as a defence to enforcement.

The TCC revisited the use of fraud allegations as a defence to Adjudication enforcement in the case of PBS Energo AS v Bester Generacion UK Ltd [2019] EWHC 996 (TCC). In this case, Bester acted as a main contractor to construct a power plant and it engaged PBS as its sub-contractor. The parties fell into dispute and the sub-contract was terminated. PBS referred a dispute to Adjudication, seeking a valuation of the sum due to it upon termination of the sub-contract. The Adjudicator decided that Bester was liable to pay PBS £1.7 million as the total value of the works completed, less previous payments.

Alongside this Adjudication were underlying TCC proceedings between the parties. After the Adjudicator’s Decision was made, Bester became aware of documents that indicated fraudulent behaviour by PBS as part of the disclosure process during the TCC proceedings. Among other issues, these documents revealed that PBS had sold equipment, which it submitted had been manufactured for the sub-contract with Bester and held to Bester’s order in the Adjudication proceedings, and installed such equipment in another power plant.

PBS Energo provides helpful guidance on when a fraud defence may successfully be raised in Adjudication enforcement, particularly in terms of what a court may expect by way of “clear and unambiguous evidence”.

Conclusions
A Responding Party in Adjudication should seek to raise jurisdictional challenges with the Adjudicator as soon as any grounds become apparent to that party. In particular, that party should reserve its position to raise jurisdictional challenges at enforcement stage and the reservation itself should be specific where possible.

If the Responding Party considers the Referring Party has engaged in fraudulent behaviour, acts or omissions in relation to the Adjudication proceedings, the Responding Party should raise these concerns to the Adjudicator during the proceedings. Otherwise, the Responding Party may not be able to later successfully avoid enforcement of an Adjudicator’s Decision on grounds of alleged fraud. If such fraudulent behaviour only becomes known to the Responding Party after the Adjudication proceedings have concluded, that party may raise such allegations of fraud at the enforcement stage so long as such allegations are supported by clear and unambiguous evidence.

Regardless of whether there are any apparent grounds to challenge jurisdiction, the Responding Party should fully engage with the Adjudication process and adhere to the timeline which has been set by the Adjudicator. This is particularly important given how rare it is for an Adjudicator to confirm that they lack jurisdiction and given how reluctant the TCC is to declare an Adjudicator’s Decision unenforceable.

How can Blaser Mills help?
Our Construction & Engineering team routinely refers disputes and responds to disputes referred to Adjudication. We are also experienced in enforcing Adjudication Decisions in the TCC.

Our advice is to ensure that our clients, whether the referring party or the responding party to an Adjudication, are fully prepared. In particular, we consider potential jurisdictional issues from the outset of our instructions and prepare our clients accordingly.

Corporate and Commercial deal round up: 2024 so far

The deal activity for the corporate team at Blaser Mills continues to be strong in 2024, despite the challenging economic conditions. Here are a few deal summaries that the team has worked on earlier this year, to showcase our capabilities on how we have helped businesses.

1. The corporate team, specifically Edward Lee, Richard Gowing and Iona Caseby, acted for a large agritech company specialising in ‘vertical farming’, in the purchase of a group of companies instrumental in achieving our client’s objective of bringing key processing capabilities in-house. We drafted a complex package of guarantees and collaterals to give the Lender security for providing a loan; analysed and advised on the National Security and Investment Act regime; undertook a significant due diligence report for the client which led to a considerable decrease in the proposed purchase price in favour of our client and drafted sophisticated earn out and bonus structures.

2. Blaser Mills acted for the parent company of a national property management services company in its sale to an Irish-based financial services company whose group includes a market-leading national company in the same space.

Besides navigating the international dimension of the transaction, we also negotiated a complex payment scheme (which allowed the seller to obtain payment over a set time frame) and concluded the transaction in a robust position maintained in favour of our clients.

3. Our corporate team acted for a Swedish provider of technology services (and part of a listed group), in the sale of its UK-based subsidiary specialising in engineering and digital services to an overseas based technological services provider.

 We  drafted a “reverse set-off” mechanism into the share purchase agreement, under which the seller would be entitled to obtain payment under the requirement by deducting its ongoing trade debts to the buyer and help resolve certain foreign currency control issues.

Our team achieved the client’s objective to ‘hive-off’ a non-core area of its European operations while allowing the buyer to strengthen its regional and UK presence.

4. Our Corporate team, led by Edward Lee and Richard Gowing, acted for the shareholders of a postal office group, on an investment agreement under which, a private equity firm would acquire a significant percentage of the company. The concept was the funding of a ‘buy and build’ strategy.

In order to achieve this, we reviewed and negotiated the investment agreement and assisted the client with disclosure against the warranties (including the “Horizon” software issues); reviewed an investor-friendly set of company articles and shareholders’ agreement in order to preserve the interests of the original shareholders; reviewed provisions relating to the allocation of ‘sweet equity’.

If you require legal assistance in relation to buying or selling a business, please contact our corporate team on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Football Agents: Navigating dual-representation an update from HMRC

Amid the ongoing overhaul of regulations affecting football agents, HMRC have provided further clarification on its position concerning the payment of football agent fees.

Football agents are remunerated depending on the services that they provide, and to whom, but by and large, there are three standard services that attract a fee (Service Fee):

  1. Player Services – a payment made directly by the football player (Player) to the football agent (Agent) in consideration for services the Agent has provided to the Player;
  2. Club Services – a payment made directly by the football club (Club) to the Agent in consideration for the services that the Agent has provided to the Club; and
  3. Dual-Representation – a payment made by the Club for the services provided by the Agent to the Club and the Club pays the Agent on behalf of the Player (effectively, both 1 and 2, but the Club is paying both).

The Agent is generally working in the interest of Player to place them with (or retain them at) their preferred Club, and, in doing so, secure the Player the best employment terms. In practice, the Club almost always pays the Service Fees on behalf of the Player, even where there are no services performed by the Agent to the Club. This is currently permitted both under the FA rules and by HMRC, provided that the Club recognises this as benefit in kind, formally known as P11D, in favour of the Player. This could soon change subject to the new FIFA Football Agent Regulations, that are currently part suspended, which will require the Player to directly pay the Agent in quarterly instalments. 

HMRC have taken issue with Dual-Representation Agreements whereby the fees paid to the Agent are split as 50% of the total Service Fee being regarded as Player Services, and 50% of the total Service Fee being apportioned to Club Services.

HMRC’s position:

HMRC have a keen interest in how the Service Fee is split in a Dual Representation Agreement. This is because the allocation of the Service Fee between Player and Club Services can have a significant impact on the Player’s liability to income tax, National Insurance contributions, the Club’s VAT liability and entitlement to reclaim VAT.

Effectively, the more weight given to Club Services within the Dual Representation Agreements, the less income tax and National Insurance contributions the Player must make (through P11D) and the higher the VAT the Club is able to reclaim.

Dual Representation Agreements

HMRC guidance states that “the split of payment value of the Agent Fee[s] between Player Services and the Club Services must represent the commercial reality of the services provided”. The default position cannot be a 50/50 split.

Proving which way the Service Fee is apportioned must be considered by an Agent when negotiating future transactions to avoid inviting any unnecessary investigation by HMRC.

Genuine Dual Representation Agreements – how should the services be evidenced?

HMRC have provided the following criteria that could be used to evidence the relationship between Player, Club, and Agent, and therefore show why the Service Fee is split 50/50, or in fact further one side than the other.

They include evidence relating to:

  • the Player-Agent representation agreement;
  • permission given by the Club holding the Player’s registration to the potential buying Club to approach the Player and their Agent, when the potential buying Club wishes to recruit that player
  • the potential buying Club’s initial approach to the Player and the Player’s Agent, including any terms offered to the Player and Agent
  • the Club’s request for:
    • the Agent to provide the Club with services
    • the specific services the Club requires the Agent to provide to the Club
    • the amount the Club would be content to pay to the Agent in return for those services
  • the Agent’s agreement to enter into a dual representation contract, including the types of services to be provided, the initial terms on which any such agreement was negotiated, and the final terms agreed — this information should also make clear the valuation that the Agent itself placed on its services to the Player and Club respectively;
  • the Player’s agreement to enter into a dual representation contract;
  • the dual representation contract between Agent, Player and Club;
  • the Player’s agreement to enter into an employment contract with the Club, including initial terms on which any such agreement was negotiated, as well as the final terms agreed

HMRC have further indicated that where Dual Representation documents are dated on the same date as the Player’s employment contract is entered into, it is likely that the apportionment of the Service Fee between Player Services and Club Services may not reflect the commercial reality.

Players on loan

There can often be significant confusion between the Clubs when a Player is on loan. Neither the parent Club nor the loanee Club will want to incur further costs regarding the Service Fees of the Player. It is often omitted from negotiations as to who is responsible for any employment reporting obligations concerning the benefit received by the Player (due to the Service Fee being paid on behalf of the Player), and, therefore, the applicable P11D requirements.

HMRC states that the ultimate responsibility falls on the parent Club to report this through its normal payroll procedures.

You can access the full guidance published by HMRC here.

Navigating the complexities and scrutiny of any transfer can leave the Agent seeking reassurances from external legal support, let alone the additional burdens now imposed by HMRC. The sports law team at Blaser Mills Law are here to guide you through every step of the transaction, or simply with a view to advising on the HMRC regulations. Contact a member of the team for an initial discussion on your transaction.

This article is not intended to constitute legal advice and you should not take, or refrain from taking, any action based on the information which it contains. Always seek the services of a professional legal adviser.

Get in touch with us today on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Ensuring children’s well-being: A guide to Schedule 1 Children Act 1989

Schedule 1 of the Children Act 1989 is a legal framework designed to ensure the welfare of children by providing financial support and housing arrangements. It is most often used in cases where the parents have not been married and have no right to financial support for themselves under the matrimonial legislation. However, in appropriate circumstances it can also be used by married parents to secure the financial well-being of their children.

Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate in the Family & Divorce team at Blaser Mills, explores its significance and how it works.

Financial support to children
Schedule 1 allows parents to seek financial assistance for their children’s upbringing, education, and general welfare. This can include regular maintenance payments, lump sum payments, or other financial provisions tailored to the child’s needs.

Housing arrangements
In addition to financial support, Schedule 1 enables parents to request housing arrangements for their children. This ensures that children have a safe and stable place to live, promoting their overall well-being and security.

Flexibility in applications
One of the key features of Schedule 1 is its flexibility. Parents can make various applications to the court based on their children’s specific needs. Whether it’s ongoing financial support, a one-time lump sum, or securing suitable housing, Schedule 1 offers options to fit different circumstances.

Consideration of factors
When determining the appropriate financial provision or housing arrangements, the court considers a range of factors. These include the child’s needs, the resources of both parents, and any other relevant circumstances. This ensures that decisions are made in the best interests of the child.

Applicability to married couples
While married couples have their own legal protections, Schedule 1 can still be applied to provide additional support for their children. In cases where matrimonial assets are insufficient or where extra provisions are needed, Schedule 1 can complement existing legal frameworks.

Healthy cooperation
Schedule 1 encourages parents to work together in the best interests of their children. Rather than resorting to confrontational court proceedings, parents are encouraged to negotiate and reach agreements regarding financial support and housing arrangements. This collaborative approach fosters healthier co-parenting relationships and reduces the emotional and financial strain on families.

In conclusion, Schedule 1 Children Act 1989 plays a vital role in ensuring the welfare and future of children. By providing a framework for financial support and housing arrangements, Schedule 1 helps parents fulfil their responsibilities regardless of their marital status.

Its flexibility, consideration of factors, and promotion of cooperation make it a valuable tool for securing the well-being of children and promoting positive co-parenting relationships.

For further information or advice please contact Naim on 01494 781356 or email naq@blasermills.co.uk.


Blaser Mills Law announces new Partner promotion

We are delighted to announce the promotion of Adam Smith to partnership in the firm.

Adam’s journey with Blaser Mills began in the Family & Divorce department as a trainee, where his passion for Childcare work flourished, which led him to undertaking a seat in the Child Care team with Partner and Head, Denise Herman. Since then, Adam has become an exceptional Childcare lawyer, renowned for his expertise and dedication.

Adam handles a caseload of Legal Aid Public Family Law cases, including Special Guardianship and Adoption. He ensures continuity of representation and often undertakes his own advocacy in Family Court.

He is known for his straight-talking yet sensitive legal advice, and the ability to manage emotionally challenging cases.

 A member of the Law Society’s Children Law Accreditation scheme, Adam has litigated up to the Court of Appeal and was shortlisted for Young Family Law Solicitor of the Year in 2022.

Denise Herman commented: ‘Adam is an excellent team-player, always providing support to his colleagues. He has shown himself to be a brilliant Court advocate and enthusiastically embraces innovation and technology. Above all, he genuinely cares about people – he never shies away from a challenge, and always wants to achieve the very best outcomes for his clients.’

Adam Smith added: ‘I am delighted and proud to have become a Partner at Blaser Mills, and grateful for the mentorship and support I have enjoyed here over many years. I look forward to taking care of my clients and continuing the extremely rewarding work I do, as a Partner, for many years to come.’

Congratulations Adam!

Residential Property team shortlisted for ESTAS 2024 awards

Our Residential Property team has been recognised for delivering outstanding customer service to its clients by making the shortlist for The ESTAS – the biggest award scheme in the UK residential property industry.

The ESTAS Awards celebrate the best, agents, conveyancers and mortgage brokers in the UK. The awards are powered by the ESTAS online customer review platform which enables property professionals to demonstrate the customer service standards they deliver for their clients

Our team has achieved the ESTAS ‘Standard of Excellence’ based on the service ratings they achieved via customer reviews submitted to the ESTAS review platform which is exclusively for real estate professionals, the reviews have been completed at the end of the moving experience.

Simon Brown, founder of ESTAS says “At ESTAS we’re creating a community of property professionals who all share a passion for delivering great service to their clients and a belief that excellent service should be the norm not the exception.”

Jane Hannaway, Partner and Head of Residential Property added: “We are delighted to have been shortlisted for the Standard of Excellence award again in 2024. Our continuing commitment to delivering exceptional client services time after time is at the forefront, and we take great pride in upholding our reputation for providing top-quality legal advice.” 

The regional and national winners will be announced in October at the annual ESTAS ceremony held in London. 

The rise of the pre-nup

In today’s world, marriage has evolved vastly to keep up with the modern times. As societal norms shift and individuals prioritise personal and financial independence, the once-taboo topic of pre-nuptial agreements (pre-nups) has gained traction, particularly among millennial couples or those entering a second marriage.

The millennial approach
Traditionally associated with the affluent and older generations, pre-nups are increasingly embraced by millennials as a practical means of safeguarding assets, protecting businesses, and outlining financial expectations before tying the knot. According to recent trends, this demographic is reshaping the landscape of pre-nup season, transforming it into a proactive step towards financial transparency and security.

Equality and open communication
One key factor driving the rise in pre-nups among millennials is their approach to marriage as a partnership of equals. Unlike previous generations, millennials tend to prioritise open communication and equal roles in their relationships. For them, discussing finances, assets, and potential scenarios before marriage is not a sign of distrust but rather a responsible and pragmatic decision.

Navigating second marriages
Moreover, the rise in second-time marriages has contributed to the popularity of pre-nups. With many individuals entering into marriage with existing assets, properties, and even children from previous relationships, pre-nuptial agreements offer a way to address complex financial matters and protect the interests of all parties involved.

Debunking misconceptions
Despite becoming more popular, pre-nuptial agreements still spark debate. Some argue that they undermine the romantic aspect of marriage and perpetuate a transactional view of relationships. However, others argue pre-nups can strengthen by fostering honest communication, trust, and mutual respect.

The rise of pre-nuptial agreements among millennial couples and those entering second marriages reflects a shift towards a more pragmatic and transparent approach to modern relationships. Rather than viewing pre-nups as a sign of distrust or cynicism, many couples see them as a proactive measure to protect their assets, clarify financial expectations, and ensure a smoother path forward in their journey together. As the stigma surrounding pre-nuptial agreements continues to diminish, they are likely to become an increasingly common tool for couples seeking to build secure and sustainable partnerships in the modern-day world.

When working on a pre-nuptial agreement it is essential that you ensure that it is likely to be upheld by the Court in the future, should the relationship come to an end. There is no guarantee that it will be binding and for this reason it is essential that you seek independent legal advice.

How Blaser Mills can help
If you are discussing arrangements with your partner, we advise you to get in touch with a solicitor for independent legal advice as soon as possible before your planned marriage. We will help to prepare the agreement for you, ensuring we tailor it to your needs and incorporate important details like conditions for review, changes to income or children and childcare.

For further information or advice or to speak to our Family & Divorce team email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Pitch perfect: Getting the club purchase over the line

In the previous article, we looked at what it takes to reach a point where sale documents begin to be prepared, provided the due diligence has been successfully conducted to the buyer’s satisfaction.

We will now look at what it takes to get the purchase over the line. How a Share Purchase Agreement (SPA) or Asset Purchase Agreement (APA) is different in a football club sale to a standard corporate transaction, what the applicable football regulations should be considered and how the newly introduced independent football regulator may impact future transactions.

Agreeing the SPA or APA
This step is standard in most conventional corporate transactions. Depending on the type of transaction that has been agreed, will determine the type of agreement that requires drafting.

Up to this point, the buyer will have relied on the seller’s disclosure of information (through due diligence) to determine the purchase price and terms of the agreement. However, the buyer will be able to further protect its investment by inserting adequate protections into the sale documentation such as indemnities, guarantees, and warranties to seek recourse from the seller.  

Warranties are assurances provided by the seller to the buyer and serve to provide contractual liability to the buyer of the accuracy and completeness of the information provided by the seller and their advisors. This can also be used as a remedy if any information is later found to be inaccurate, typically through compensation or indemnification from the seller for the resulting losses. Warranties should encompass various football-specific aspects, including the club’s operations, financial status, contracts, and safeguards against any historical regulatory compliance issues, plus cover any issues unearthed by the due diligence.

Owners and Directors Test
Once the transaction is all but completed, all new owners and directors must be approved by the governing body of the respective league of the club, therefore the agreement should always be subject to this approval. The test differs slightly between the Premier League, English Football League and National League but the process remains largely the same. Any person who owns more than 10% of shares in the club must be listed as part of the application. The club will submit the application to the respective body who will then review the application and decide whether to approve or reject it. There are grounds for rejection where an applicant is subject to any of the Disqualifying Events listed below.

The following criteria constitute a Disqualifying Events:

  • Exerting influence over another league club’s management or holding a stake exceeding 10%.
  • Disqualification from serving as a company director.
  • Holding an unspent criminal conviction resulting in a prison sentence of 12 months or more, or any conviction for dishonesty.
  • Bankruptcy status or involvement with a club during an insolvency event.
  • Listing on the sex offenders’ register.
  • Disqualification or suspension by a sports governing body or professional organisation.
  • Violation of football betting rules.

The Premier League further broadened the scope of Disqualifying Events, now encompassing individuals subject to government sanctions, implicated in human rights abuses, or involved in offences related to violence, corruption, fraud, tax evasion, or hate crimes.

The New Independent Football Regulator
The government’s White Paper proposes an independent football regulator (IFR) to oversee the major governance issues that are currently in place, including reforms for financial fair play, club ownership transparency, fan engagement, and competitive balance. It aims to enhance transparency, ensure financial stability, and promote fairness across football. Some of the key aspects target a reform relating to the purchase of football clubs in the UK. The IFR seeks to include increased scrutiny of potential buyers, stricter financial regulations, and potential shifts in investor profiles towards long-term sustainability.

The IFR will introduce new regulations and processes that clubs in the top 5 leagues in England will have to adhere to, many of which will impact a prospective buyer or could diminish the value of the club as it currently stands, they include the following:

1. A New Owners’ and Directors’ Tests: Prospective and incumbent club owners and directors will undergo fit to serve, source of wealth, and financial planning tests to ensure suitability and protect fans from irresponsible ownership.

2. Financial Regulation: Enhanced regulations are to be introduced with the aim of improving clubs’ financial resilience, with the IFR overseeing financial plans and intervening when necessary.

3. Fan Engagement and Heritage: Clubs will need to regularly engage with fans and comply with heritage protections, including seeking fan and FA approval for significant changes like altering crests, shirt colours, or club names.

4. Stadium Sale or Relocation: Clubs must seek approval for stadium sales or relocations, considering the financial and heritage preservation implications. There are number of previous examples, including most recently Derby County, where the owners  unilaterally sold all or part of the stadium in order to raise capital for the club, a new authorisation process by the IFR will be implemented to prevent this in future without approval.

5. Breakaway League Prevention: English clubs will be prevented from joining unlicensed or breakaway leagues like the European Super League as was attempted by the Premier League’s top 6 teams in April 2021.

6. Broadcast Revenue Distribution: The IFR will have powers to intervene in broadcast revenue distribution to address financial sustainability issues across the pyramid if it cannot be agreed by the top 5 leagues in the first instance. This is part of a further review of the drip-feed funding (that is currently in place) beyond the Football League.

Although implementing the White Paper’s proposals could face challenges such as resistance from stakeholders, legal hurdles, enforcement difficulties, unintended consequences, balancing different interests, and global coordination. Considerations of these new regulations should be taken into account throughout the process of purchasing a football club as it is likely they will shape the future of English Football.

In summary, acquiring a football club in England presents a multifaceted journey, intertwining business acumen with the rich tapestry of fan engagement, regulatory compliance, and certain financial intricacies unique to the football industry.

Each phase of the purchase of a football club, requires careful consideration and expertise. As the landscape of English football continues to evolve through the new Independent Football Regulator, successful club acquisitions require an understanding of the game’s complexities and a steadfast commitment to upholding its heritage, whilst mapping out a course towards sustainable growth and success.

Blaser Mills has extensive experience in dealing with an array of corporate transactions, including those involving football clubs. Please do get in touch if we can assist your business.

Infected blood scandal: Legal support for those affected

The infected blood scandal has tragically impacted thousands of individuals and families in the UK. This medical damage, stemming from contaminated blood transfusions in the 1970s and 1980s, resulted in numerous victims contracting life-altering viruses such as HIV and Hepatitis C. Recent developments indicate that victims could receive over £2 million in compensation, a step towards acknowledging their suffering and loss.

Understanding the scandal
During the 1970s and 1980s, blood products supplied by the NHS were tainted with deadly viruses, infecting thousands of patients. This primarily affected individuals requiring regular blood transfusions, such as those with haemophilia. The government’s failure to adequately screen and ensure the safety of these blood products resulted in a public health disaster.

The term ‘victim(s)’ refers to anyone directly or indirectly impacted by infected blood who is eligible for compensation.

Eligibility
As defined by the Government website [1] you were a victim of infected blood, whether you were infected or affected as follows:

An infected person is someone who has:

  • HIV through the use of NHS supplied blood, blood products and/or tissue;
  • An acute or chronic case of Hepatitis C through the use of NHS supplied blood, blood products and/or tissue
  • A chronic case (more than 6 months) of Hepatitis B through the use of NHS supplied blood, blood products and/or tissue
  • An acute case (less than 6 months) of Hepatitis B through the use of NHS supplied blood, blood products and/or tissue and died as a result of Hepatitis B infection during the acute period

A person who suffered the impact of infected blood through their relationship with a living or deceased infected person is known as an affected person. Affected persons include:

  • Spouses
  • Civil partners
  • Partners cohabiting with an eligible infected person for at least one year following the infection

Partners who separated from the eligible infected person prior to infection will not be eligible for compensation.

People who were registered on current UK IBSS or who were in receipt of support payments from Alliance House Organisation (AHO) will automatically be eligible and registered for the scheme.

Estate application
The infected person who has passed away, the personal representatives of the deceased person’s estate may apply for compensation on behalf of the estate of the infected deceased person.

Compensation
The compensation due will be judged under the five criteria’s below:

  1. Injury and harm caused
  2. Social impact from stigma and isolation
  3. Impact on autonomy and private life, such as not being able to have children
  4. Care costs
  5. Financial loss

Legal implications and compensation
The infected blood scandal has led to numerous inquiries and legal actions over the years. The recent discussions around compensation signify a major development in addressing the grievances of the victims. According to the latest figures, affected individuals could receive more than £2 million, reflecting the severity of their suffering and the profound impact on their lives.

However, securing this compensation is not straightforward. It involves intricate legal procedures and the need for substantial evidence to support claims. This is where the expertise of a specialist solicitor will be crucial.

How we can help
We can assist you at all stages of your claim from the initial registering of your potential claim through to gathering all necessary medical evidence and other supportive documentation so your claim can be assessed and thereafter to an amicable conclusion ensuring you recover the maximum level of damages to which you are entitled.

Support
Beyond legal representation, we offer empathetic support. We understand the emotional toll of such a situation and strive to provide a compassionate approach to help you through this challenging time.

The infected blood scandal represents one of the most significant healthcare disasters in the UK. As victims now have a potential path to significant compensation, it is crucial to have skilled legal representation to navigate the complexities of these claims. With extensive experience in PI and medical negligence cases, I am dedicated to helping victims receive the justice and compensation they deserve.

If you or a loved one have been affected by this scandal, do not hesitate to seek professional legal assistance to explore your options.

For further information or advice please get in touch with Victoria Harvey or Asif Ali:

Victoria Harvey: 07776 859163 – vrh@blasermills.co.uk

Asif Ali: 01494 478607 – axa@blasermills.co.uk


[1] Infected Blood Compensation Scheme Summary – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk)

Key things to consider when buying a retirement property

As retirement approaches, many individuals find themselves contemplating a change in living arrangements. For some, this may involve downsizing to a more manageable property, relocating to a desirable location, or investing in a home that caters to their needs. However, if you are looking at purchasing a retirement property, it requires careful consideration to ensure that it aligns with both current lifestyle preferences and future requirements.

Kirsty Malcolmson, Conveyancing Executive in our New Homes team, outlines key things to consider when purchasing a retirement home.

Location, location, location
The choice of location is vital when purchasing a retirement property. It’s important to consider moving to a convenient location that is close to your healthcare providers, friends, family as well as good links to the local town centre and public transportation routes.

Some people also assess the suitability of the local area in terms of safety and various social opportunities. Whether your preference is a peaceful countryside or a city centre, the location should complement your lifestyle and preferences.

Property types
Retirement properties come in various forms, ranging from traditional houses to apartments, bungalows, or retirement villages. Evaluate the advantages and downsides of each, considering factors such as maintenance requirements, accessibility, and future mobility needs. Additionally, assess the size of the property to ensure it accommodates your living arrangements comfortably, whether you’re downsizing or seeking additional space for hobbies or guests.

Accessibility and adaptability
As mobility may become a concern with age, it’s crucial to prioritise accessibility features within the property. Look out for things such as step-free entrances, wider doorways, handrails, and wheelchair-friendly designs.

Financial considerations
Evaluate the financial implications of purchasing a retirement property, including the upfront costs, ongoing expenses, and potential resale value. Assess your budget carefully and consider factors such as taxes, maintenance fees, insurance, and any additional amenities or services offered by retirement communities. It’s recommended to work with a professional financial advice to ensure that the investment aligns with your long-term financial goals and retirement plans.

Staying social
Many retirees value the sense of community and access to lifestyle amenities offered by retirement properties or villages. Some retirement complexes offer extensive services, such as swimming pools, restaurants, gyms, hairdressers and various social activities. Consider whether the available amenities cater to your interests and preferences, enhancing your overall quality of life during retirement.

How Blaser Mills can help
Buying a home to retire in is a big commitment and it is important to us that you make the right choice of home for this stage of your lives. We want your time at your new home to be relaxing, with well-run and properly maintained amenities. A big part of this is ensuring that the conveyancing process is as stress-free as possible.

Throughout we will aim to take away the pressure and we’ll always be available to talk you through each stage of the transaction and answer any questions you may have.

To speak to one of our expert property solicitors, contact Kirsty on 01494 738062 or email klm@blasermills.co.uk.

Residential Property team awarded best in postcode for customer service

The Blaser Mills Residential Property team has been recognised for delivering outstanding customer service to its clients by winning a Best in Postcode Award from The ESTAS – the biggest award scheme in the UK residential property industry.

The award has been achieved via customer reviews submitted to the ESTAS review platform, which is exclusively for real estate professionals, the reviews have been completed at the end of the moving experience. ESTAS monitors and verifies service ratings over a 12-month period giving a highly accurate overview of the standard of service that’s been delivered to customers.

Simon Brown, founder of ESTAS says “At ESTAS we’re creating a community of property lawyers who all share a passion for delivering great service to their clients and a belief that excellent service should be the norm not the exception.”

Jane Hannaway, Partner and Head of Residential Property commented “We are very pleased to receive the recognition, we take our levels of customer service very seriously because we know clients have a choice”.

To get in touch with our Residential Property team email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Pitch perfect: A guide to purchasing a football club

English football has seen a significant rise in the number of football clubs being purchased over the last 5 years, and, with the recent success of clubs following a takeover, such as Newcastle United there seems to be no slowing down of this trend. The recent White Paper has accelerated reform to club football governance, which has revamped the purchase processes. But what sets acquiring a football club apart from regular corporate transactions?

This article delves into some of the aspects of corporate transactions that needs to be considered throughout various stages of the deal.

Identifying a prospective club
To the average fan this may be considered the easiest step of all; simply select a club in England and contact the shareholders with your offer. Contrary to this belief, there is significant amount of work required to even get to this stage. Despite operating like any other business—clubs face unique scrutiny from fans, media, and governing bodies. Football clubs are more than just businesses; they are embodiments of community identity and heritage. Consequently, any change in ownership can evoke strong sentiments and rightly requires careful management of fan engagement.

To add to the complexities, the position of the club within the English football pyramid determines several factors such as the club’s infrastructure, revenues, liabilities, and the regulations it must adhere to. As a rule the closer the club is to the Premier League, the more revenue, but not necessarily profit it will generate and the higher the regulatory and financial standards that will apply to it. However, with the possibility of promotion and relegation, that position can easily change without the right plan in place.

Furthermore, fan ownership groups and community organisations and who owns the ground can often play a major part and must be given proper consideration when selecting a club. A handful of clubs across the UK are owned by fan-ownership groups, including AFC Wimbledon, Exeter City, and Bury AFC.

The offer
This stage includes the first of many traditional M&A processes. There are two types of purchase: the purchase of shares or the purchase of assets. To achieve either purchase, there are two routes that can be taken:

  1. A conventional sale between a buyer and a seller; or
  2. An auction-style sale where multiple buyers submit their bid.

The auction style sale, most recently used by Manchester United and Chelsea, can often generate a higher sale price through competitive tension provided the market demand is significant. This process can be highly publicised, which can have its advantages and disadvantages, however, this option may not be desirable.

A non-auction sale normally provides for a period of exclusivity between the respective buyer and the seller where the negotiation can take place with added comfort of no competitive bids afforded to the buyer.

Regardless of which option is taken, the sale process can take up to six to twelve months.

The offer will be subject to further due diligence, as mentioned below, and the offer price can fluctuate or become the main obstacle to concluding a deal following the due diligence process.

Due diligence
Part of the process of identifying the chosen football club will arise from some public due diligence analysis considering aspects such as the club’s league position, its supporters, the geographic location, its sporting capabilities, the potential for expansion and development of the ground/stadium before entering the formal due diligence phase. Just like with any other business, the due diligence process will require a deeper dive into the inner workings of the football club together with the football specific enquiries.

These include preliminary assessments which are crucial in forming the basis of the Heads of Terms. The formal due diligence process will require expert advisors to scrutinise various aspects such as financials, tax, employees, commercial contracts, governance structures and football specific matters. Due diligence ensures an informed decision-making process.

Corporate transactions in football demand a nuanced approach, navigating fan sentiments, the regulatory landscapes, and unique revenue models. As the game evolves, so must the strategies driving football club acquisitions, balancing tradition with modernity for sustained success.

Regulatory scrutiny and governance
The football industry operates within a tightly regulated framework governed by a quasi-legal system that is formed through international and national governing bodies, including FIFA, UEFA, the FA, and through individual league organisers such as the Premier League and the English Football League.

Depending on the league of the club, and whether they are involved in European competitions, prospective owners must navigate complex ownership eligibility criteria, financial fair play regulations, and club governance standards from the outset of the proposed transaction and beyond.

Compliance with these regulations is essential for obtaining league approval and ensuring the club’s continued participation in competitions. Additionally, the regulatory scrutiny extends to matters such as player contracts, youth development, and stadium safety, adding layers of complexity to the acquisition process especially when having to consider these throughout the due diligence phase.

Financial considerations and revenue streams
Unlike many traditional businesses, football clubs derive revenue from a diverse array of sources, each intricately linked to on-field performance and fan engagement. These revenue streams include broadcasting rights, match day ticket sales, merchandise, sponsorship deals, and player transfers.

Consequently, the financial viability of a football club is closely tied to its sporting success and ability to attract and retain players and fans. Prospective buyers must conduct extensive due diligence to assess revenue potential, financial sustainability, and the club’s competitive position within the footballing ecosystem before committing the purchase of the club.

Other considerations include:

  • Prospective buyers should investigate the club’s position regarding incoming and outgoing transfer fees, including any significant outstanding instalment payments on historic transfers.
  • Commercial operations must be considered including a review of sponsorship and partnership agreements; is the club committed to any unprofitable or unlimited liability  agreements both with regard to rights and length of term.
  • Match day operations – how does the operation for match day hospitality effect the financial position of the club? Is there a third-party supplier agreement to run the match operation?
  • Ticketing and club shop operations – are these owned and ran by the club?
  • Verifying stadium and training facility ownership is crucial during due diligence, considering factors such as land ownership, terms of use, obstacles for redevelopment, and the potential use of ownership interests for debt financing.
  • Is there an academy in place?
  • Has the club entered any agreements with Agents relating to the services provided that binds the club to future payments?
  • Does the club have adequate insurance policies in place?

There is a considerable amount of work that is required just to get to this stage, many a prospective deal will collapse because of what is discovered in the due diligence phase. The buyer seeking comfort in understanding what exactly it is purchasing, whereas the seller can use this as an opportunity to provide transparency on any issues which many prevent future issues arising once the deal has completed.

Blaser Mills can assist with this process and provide analysis on what is market standard vs any unexpected obstacles that may arise during the Due Diligence phase. Please feel free to reach out to see how we can assist you.

Keep an eye out for part two of this series where we delve into the intricacies of the sale documentation, the owners and directors test, and the impact of the new independent football regulator.

Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act: The latest changes

The Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 (ECCTA) came into law in  October 2023, commencing what is set to be one of the biggest shake-ups of UK company law in recent times.

While the majority of ECCTA is yet to come into force – with the roll out of the most significant changes subject to further legislation and the development of new government systems – some important reforms have already been introduced, most recently on 4 March 2024. We look at the key developments below.

What are the aims of ECCTA?

ECCTA introduces a raft of measures with the combined aims of tackling crime, preventing fraud and boosting enterprise. With regards to UK companies, it seeks to achieve those aims by:

  • Expanding the role and powers of Companies House;
  • Improving the accuracy of information on the Companies House register;
  • Enhancing the transparency of UK corporate entities; and
  • Preventing the abuse of personal information.

What are the key changes from  4 March 2024?

On 4 March 2024, the government published a set of regulations implementing ECCTA, known as “Regulation 2”. The regulations introduce five key changes which companies should be aware of

1. Enhanced powers for Companies House

Reflecting ECCTA’s goal of transforming its role from a “passive administrator” of company information to an “active gatekeeper”, Regulation 2 grants the following new powers to Companies House:

  • To query and or reject company filings (and to request supporting evidence, where appropriate);
  • To amend or remove inaccurate information from the register; and
  • To share data with other government departments and law enforcement agencies.

These reforms are underpinned by changes that strengthen the “false statement offences” under the Companies Act 2006, which are designed to prevent the delivery of misleading, false or deceptive information to Companies House.

The combined effect is that all company officers (i.e. directors and company secretaries) will need to take even greater care when making filings at Companies House.

2. Stronger checks on company names

Broadly, Regulation 2 enables Companies House to perform stricter checks on Company names to ensure that they do not facilitate the commission offences involving dishonesty or deception.

Specifically, names which may now be prohibited include those suggestive of a connection with a foreign government or inter-state organisation (for example, the UN), names that provide a misleading indication of a company’s activities, and names containing computer code.

3. Statements of lawful purpose

From 4 March 2024, all subscribers (i.e. the initial shareholders or members of a limited company) will, at incorporation, need to confirm that they wish to form the company for “lawful purposes”. All companies will also be required to confirm every year, as part of its annual confirmation statement, that its intended future activities will be lawful.

4. New rules for registered office addresses

All registered office addresses appearing on the Companies House register, whether for new or existing companies, must now be “appropriate addresses”. An address will an appropriate one if a document addressed to the company and delivered to the address would be expected to come to the attention of a person acting on behalf of the company and the delivery of documents is capable of being recorded. The practical effect of this change is that PO Box addresses will no longer be valid.

Failure to comply will result in significant consequences. Where the company Registrar believes a registered office address is not appropriate, they now have the power to change it to a “default address” held at Companies House. Unless a compliant address is provided within 28 days, the company will be at risk of being struck off.

5. A new requirement for a registered email address

All companies are also now required to provide a “registered email address” through which they can be contacted by Companies House. The address will not be available for public inspection.

As with the new rules for registered office addresses, the registered email address must be “appropriate”, meaning that an email sent to that address would be expected to come to the attention of a person acting on behalf of the company. From 5 March 2024, all companies will be asked to provide a registered email address when filing their confirmation statement.

Further change ahead

As ECCTA is rolled out over the coming months, we will continue to provide commentary on the key changes and what they mean for you – including coverage of what are likely to be the most thorny reforms surrounding identify verification, statutory registers and corporate directors.

Should you require specific and or tailored advice in order to stay ahead of the curve, please contact enquiries@blasermills.co.uk to speak to one of our lawyers.

This article is not intended to constitute legal advice and you should not take, or refrain from taking, any action based on the information which it contains. Always seek the services of a professional legal adviser.

Navigating construction procurement methods

Procuring a construction project involves several methods and strategies. The key differences usually lay between the use of standard form contracts (often heavily amended) or bespoke contracts.

Clients may choose to retain full control over the professional team and design process, appointing an independent contractor (known as the traditional route), or opt for the design and build approach, wherein the client hands over a design to the contractor for completion and novates the architect and other professional team members.

Additionally, clients can explore construction management, where they directly employ individual subcontractors, or contract management, where they hire a contractor who then manages subcontractors. The choice of procurement method ultimately depends on the unique circumstances of the project, with no one-size-fits-all solution.

If the project is highly technical and very prototypical (e.g. a power station), or the client is a repeat client who wants to contract on the same basis for each project (e.g. a high street restaurant chain) then they may insist upon a bespoke contract and either one which is specifically designed for the project or one which they use on a regular basis.

The alternative is to use a standard form of contract, of which the most popular is the JCT suite of contracts. Alternative contracts include the NEC and specialist contracts such as those produced by the Institute of Civil Engineers (ICE), the Institute of Chemical Engineers (IChemE) and even FIDIC which tend to be used for large scale industrial projects, more often in Europe than in the UK.

The vast majority of commercial construction contracts in the UK are either the traditional route JCT or Design and Build JCT.

The traditional route offers clients greater project control but requires a higher level of design input. In contrast, Design & Build is favoured when the client doesn’t provide a full design, often to expedite project commencement or when certain design aspects are less critical.

The method of procurement and the nature of contract is very much dependent on the individual circumstances of the project. We are able to assist in this respect and guide clients to the most appropriate form of contract. For further information please contact Lewis Cohen on LNC@blasermills.co.uk or call 07956 964466.

Challenging a Will – Caveats

If you are considering challenging the validity of a Will, you may wish to consider issuing a caveat.

Matthew Whipp, Senior Associate in our Private Wealth Disputes team, highlights the various steps to take and pitfalls to avoid.

What is a caveat?

A caveat prevents a grant of probate being issued, until the caveat is removed. If a grant of probate is prevented by a caveat, the estate cannot be administered, nor assets distributed.

When is it appropriate to use a caveat?

A caveat can be used in circumstances where you doubt the validity of the deceased’s Will, or you suspect the person applying for the grant of probate is unsuitable.

It is not usually appropriate to use a caveat where you simply wish to challenge the Estate because you are not happy with what you have been left in a Will. An example would be an application for reasonable financial provision from the Estate pursuant to the Inheritance (Provision for Family and Dependants) Act 1975.

If you use a caveat where you have no reason to doubt the validity of a Will, or the person applying for the grant, you could be accused of abusing the process which may have costly consequences. You should instead use the Standing Search notification feature, whereby you will be alerted when the grant of probate is issued.

How do I issue a caveat?

The procedure for issuing a caveat is straightforward. You can issue a caveat online or by post using form PA8A. At the time of writing, the fee is £3. You will need to be careful to enter the deceased’s name as accurately as possible, without any spelling mistakes, as the protection will be against the estate of the exact name you enter.

How long does my caveat last?

A caveat will initially remain active, preventing the issue of a grant for 6 months. If you do not extend the caveat, it will automatically expire. You can only extend a caveat by writing to the Leeds District Probate Registry in the last month of the caveat’s 6-month period. You can extend a caveat as many times as needed, provided you have not been ‘warned off’.

Can my caveat be removed without my permission?

Usually, the person applying for the grant of probate will only find out that the caveat is in place when they make the application for the grant of probate. The person wanting to obtain probate will need to send you what is known as a “warning”.

The warning will be sent first to the Leeds District Probate Registry where it will be sealed and sent to the caveator. The warning should set out the details of the person applying for the grant and the Will or codicil the person intends to submit for probate.

Warning and entering an appearance

The person that lodged the caveat will have just 14 days from the date they receive the warning to do one of the following:

1) Agree to remove the caveat.

  1. The advantage of this is that you should not be liable for any costs involved with dealing with the caveat;

b. The process is simple and involves emailing the Probate Registry with the original caveat number.

c. The disadvantage is that this will allow someone to apply for probate with the Will that you may allege should not be accepted.

2) Refuse to remove the caveat and enter what is known as “an appearance”.

  1. Entering an appearance involves drafting a document saying why the caveat is in place and why you have the right to have entered it.

b. The advantage of this is that, if the Probate Registry accept, the caveat will remain in place and only an application for a court order can remove it.

c. The disadvantage is that if the person applying for the grant makes an application to remove the caveat and are successful, you may be liable to pay their costs. If done with a solicitor this could be thousands of pounds.

3) Apply to the court for directions and state why you do not want the grant of probate to be granted to a particular person.

Caveats may seem simple at a glance, but there are numerous problems you may encounter, particularly if you receive a warning.

How can Blaser Mills’s Private Wealth Disputes Team help?

At Blaser Mills Law we understand the stress caused by a questionable Will being used to obtain a grant of probate and are here to help. If you would like to discuss instructing us to act for you, please call us on 01494 788 998 and ask to speak to the Private Wealth Disputes Team or get in touch by email at enquiries@blasermills.co.uk

Understanding lease extensions

A high percentage of homeowners own a leasehold property. It is therefore important to understand what a lease extension entails. Extending your lease can seem like a daunting process due to the complexities involved. However, as your lease term decreases, the value of your property in turn decreases, making lease extensions essential if you wish to maintain or enhance the value of your property. If you are considering extending your lease, it is important to discuss your options with a legal advisor. At Blaser Mills, we aim to provide clear and comprehensive advice in plain English to ensure a seamless transaction.

If you are coming up to only having 80 years remaining on your lease, you should consider extending your lease. Once the term of years goes below 80 years, the premium payable for a lease extension will increase considerably. It is also highly likely you will face issues obtaining mortgage finance and selling your property. If you are considering selling your property with a lease term of 80 years, it is advisable to start the process of extending your lease now to avoid delays with your sale.

There are two ways in which your lease can be extended:

Statutory route:

You are legally entitled to extend your lease under the Leasehold Reform Housing and Urban Development Act 1993, so long as you are classed as a “qualifying leaseholder”. To be classed as “qualifying leaseholder”, you must meet the following criteria:

  • You must have owned your property for 2 years or more
  • Your lease was originally granted for more than 21 years
  • Your property is not subject to conditions under freehold ownership by Crown or National Trust.

If you qualify under the Act, this allow your lease to be increased by 90 years and reduce your ground rent to a peppercorn (i.e. no ground rent would be payable).  The freeholder cannot refuse to extend your lease if you have owned your property for at least 2 years.

If you proceed via this route, the first step is to serve the freeholder with a S42 notice. A S42 notice is a formal notice from a leaseholder to a freeholder setting out the proposed terms of the new lease. Once this has been served, this begins the statutory lease extension process. The freeholder will then have 2 months to provide a counter-notice. The freeholder can either accept your offer or set out the terms acceptable to them You will be required to cover the freeholder’s legal fees as well as the valuation fees.

If the lease term drops below 80 years, marriage value also needs to be considered. The marriage value is the increase in the value of the property arising from the new lease. The Act states the marriage value must be shared equally between the leaseholder and freeholder. It is therefore in your best interests to begin the lease extension process before your lease term falls to 80 years to save additional costs.

If you are selling your property, you can begin the process of extending your lease and assign the benefit onto your buyer during the conveyancing process. This can save a lot of delays during the conveyancing process.

Advantages:

  • You are guaranteed an extension of 90 years.
  • You are guaranteed a reduction in ground rent to a peppercorn.
  • The terms are governed by the Act so you can therefore exclude any unreasonable terms.

Disadvantages:

  • The costs tend to be higher than the informal route.
  • Some leaseholders class the statutory time limits as being too generous.

Informal route:

If you have not owned your property for at least 2 years’, you can still extend your lease outside of the statutory process. Even if you have owned your property for at least 2 years’, you may still decide to proceed via the informal route.

You would be required to negotiate with the freeholder as to the terms of the lease extension however, there are no set timescales in place. A valuer should still be instructed to ensure the premium being paid is reasonable. Again, you will be expected to cover the freeholder’ legal fees as well as the valuers fees.

Advantages:

  • Some leaseholders prefer the informal route as they can extend the term past the 90 years permitted by the statutory route
  • The premium and legal fees can be less than proceeding via the statutory route.
  • If you own a share of the freehold, you can extend the term of years to as much as 999 years. In this situation, most leaseholders do not wish to charge each other a premium.

Disadvantages:

  • As the freeholder is not bound by the statutory time limits, they may not be proactive which could lead to delays.
  • Ground rent may not be reduced to a peppercorn. However, the Leasehold Reform (Ground Rent) Act 2022, states that freeholders are no longer permitted to add new ground rent to informal leases extensions (granted after 30th June 2022).

Timescales:

Lease extensions can take anywhere from 3-12 months depending on the complexity of the matter and how prompt the parties involved are. Instructing experienced solicitors and valuers will help reduce the length of time taken to complete.

Changes to rules on lease extensions:

In January 2021, the Government outlined proposals to change the rules in relation to leasehold properties. The proposals would enable leases to be extended by 990 years, abolish marriage value and abolish ground rent for new leasehold properties. As these are only proposals, these rules are not currently in force.

If you would like to discuss your lease extension further, please contact Shannon Terry, Associate in the Residential Property team, who specialises in lease extensions.

Unfair prejudice petitions – Update on limitation

In Thg Plc v Zedra Trust Company (Jersey) Limited [2024] EWCA Civ 158, the Court of Appeal has confirmed that unfair prejudice petitions brought under section 994 of the Companies Act 2006 (the “Companies Act”) are subject to limitation periods.

Facts
Until now it has been readily accepted by Courts and practitioners that unfair prejudice petitions were not subject to a limitation period under the Limitation Act 1980 (the “Limitation Act”) and that the equitable doctrine of laches (an equitable defence that can be asserted where a claimant has delayed asserting their rights and is no longer entitled to bring an equitable claim) did not strictly apply to the statutory remedies under the Companies Act. The Court in Thg Plc acknowledged that it had been “undoubtedly received wisdom that no limitation period applies to” unfair prejudice petitions. However, this had not actually been an issue that has been argued before and determined by the Courts, although it was a point that was assumed to be correct and had been referred to in obiter in various judgments.

Notwithstanding the above, the Court has always maintained a wide discretion under the Companies Act to make “such order as it thinks fit” in respect of unfair prejudice petitions. It had been readily accepted before Thg Plc that an unjustified delay in bringing an action can be evidence that the petitioner has ‘acquiesced’ i.e. accepted the behavior on which the complaint is founded. In those circumstances the Court has always maintained the right not to hear the claim where it would be unfair to do so.

However, the decision in Thg Plc now confirms that the Limitation Act does apply to unfair prejudice petitions. The limitation period is calculated by reference to the remedy sought and is either (i) 6 years under section 9 of the Limitation Act 1980 where the claim is for compensation or monetary relief or (ii) in all other cases 12 years under section 8 of the Limitation Act 1980, calculated from the date on which the cause of action accrued.

It is a common remedy in unfair prejudice petitions for a share buy-out to be ordered. The Judgment clarified that those claims do not amount to claims for monetary relief as there is no entitlement to money until the share transfer is executed. As such, where the relief claimed is a buy-out order, petitioners will have 12 years in which to bring a claim.

Section 32 of the Limitation Act will apply to unfair prejudice claims and will operate to suspend the running of time for the purposes of calculating the limitation period in circumstances of ‘concealment’. This is particularly important in unfair prejudice claims where, quite often, a basis for bringing a claim is exclusion from management and can involve the concealment of information relating to the company and its affairs.

Analysis
There is no doubt that Thg Plc is a groundbreaking, and it would be fair to say, unexpected decision which will cause waves throughout this area of legal practice. Given the significance of the decision, we would not be surprised if the issue was subject to appeal to the Supreme Court.

As the limitation period is remedy dependent it is possible that a single claim could be subject to both limitation periods and careful thought will need to be given to the remedies sought in any petition.

The application of a limitation period to unfair prejudice claims is particularly in important given that many petitions rely on a course of conduct, sometimes over a significant period of time, which cumulatively amounts to unfair prejudice. It is our view that the limitation period could only sensibly begin to run once there had been sufficient cumulative events to demonstrate a case of unfair prejudice. However, this will be an issue to be determined by the Court. Where unfairly prejudicial conduct is continuing this may also give a petitioning party scope to overcome any limitation defence. This is an issue that will undoubtedly be the subject of further judicial scrutiny. 

If you would like to discuss any aspect of this article or require any further information or advice, please contact Jade Salton-Brooks on jkb@blasermills.co.uk.

Material Information – Streamlining the conveyancing process

The earlier information can be provided in the selling process, the more certainty and control buyers and sellers will have making the conveyancing process simpler and quicker.

Guidelines have been issued to standardise Material Information provided in property listings and improve current practices.  This will allow sellers to potentially rectify any potential issues and buyers to make informed choices at the outset streamlining the conveyancing process.

The term Material information refers to any information about a property that could influence a buyer’s decision-making process. This includes information about the property’s condition, history, defects, or any other relevant details that could impact its value or desirability.

Estate agents and sellers are required to disclose Material Information about a property to potential buyers when the property is being marketed.  This helps promote transparency and fairness between buyers and sellers and reduces the risk of disputes or legal issues later in the process.

Current practices around disclosure are not consistent across the industry and standardising this essential information will help agents and sellers comply. 

The new guidelines issued by The National Trading Standards Estate and Letting Agency Team have three categories:

Category A  

Information which is considered essential for all properties (announced February 2022):   

  • Council tax band or rate
  • Property price or rent
  • Tenure information (for sales)
  • Details of deposit payable (lettings)

Category B

Information that must be established for all properties:

  • Physical characteristics of the property – property type and construction
  • Number and types of room – including room measurements
  • Utilities – how they are supplied
  • Parking

Category C

Information that may or may not need to be established.

These details must be included if the property is affected by the issue:

  • Building safety, e.g., unsafe cladding, asbestos, risk of collapse
  • Restrictions, e.g. conservation area, listed building status, tree preservation order
  • Rights and easements, e.g. public rights of way, shared drives
  • Flood risk
  • Coastal erosion risk
  • Planning permission – for the property itself and its immediate locality
  • Accessibility/adaptations, e.g. step-free access, wet room, essential living accommodation on entrance level
  • Coalfield or mining area

The Conveyancer’s role

Working together with sellers, conveyancers can assist in compiling the presale information before the property is marketed.  This will guarantee a seller will have the benefit of appropriate legal advice when compiling the necessary Material Information to be included within property listing.  Conveyancers help protect the interests of the sellers whilst ensuring they meet their obligations.  Otherwise, instructing non-regulated firms specialising in sale packs and not obtaining suitable legal advice could expose sellers to potential liability.

Reviewing property documentation – A conveyancer thoroughly reviews property documentation including deeds and Law Society Property Information Forms helping sellers prepare accurate and complete information about the property.

Advising on disclosure obligations – Conveyancers canadvise sellers on what information must be disclosed under relevant laws and regulations, such as defects, disputes, or encumbrances affecting the property.

Identifying potential issues – Conveyancers can identify potential issues or concerns enabling them to deal with these proactively.  As well as expediting the process when a buyer is found, this will also assist in reduce the number of abortive transactions due issues which can be resolved such as outstanding building regulation approvals or restrictive covenant consents.

By actively engaging in the disclosure process and ensuring that all Material Information is properly addressed, conveyancers help protect the interests of both buyers and sellers and facilitate a smoother transaction.

For further information or advice please contact Samantha Bellia on sxb@blasermills.co.uk.

Celebrating International Women’s Day

We celebrate Blaser Mills Law’s inclusive work culture and the achievements of our colleagues on International Women’s Day.

Celebrating women in the legal industry is an important recognition of their contribution towards the legal sector, as well as their achievements in overcoming historical barriers to the profession.

Only 100 years ago, women were not classified as ‘persons’ under the Solicitors Act 1843. We therefore pay tribute to the women lawyers who paved the way for future generations of women to enter the profession, including Carrie Morrison who was the first female solicitor to enter a fully male dominated sector in 1922. In 1919, the Sex Disqualification (Removal) Act formally opened entry to the profession for women but this was 97 years after the Law Society was first established. However, progress has been made and we are pleased to note from statistics collated by the Solicitors Regulation Authority that the proportion of women in law firms has risen from 48% in 2015 to 53% in 2023.

We are proud that 74% of our employees are women, 50% of the Partners at Blaser Mills Law are women and more specifically within our Residential Conveyancing team, 90% of the team are women.

Our strong team of women lawyers positively contributes towards an equal and thriving working environment, whilst also promoting creativity and enhancing the firm’s ability to serve its client base more effectively in an ever-evolving and diverse society.

One of our women lawyers is Zara Liedl Carroll, a Senior Associate in the Residential Property department. Zara has always been a passionate advocate for women’s rights and equality and is a member of the Blaser Mills Law Inclusion Forum, an employee led group who help to influence the ongoing development of equity, diversity and inclusion at the firm.

Zara is also committed to providing pro-bono work, assisting fellow Solicitor Sabeena Pirooz at The Sky Project ( About Us – The Sky Project ), a small award-winning charity aimed at tackling the issues surrounding forced marriage and honour based abuse. She also makes time for her role of Conveyancing Regional Representative for the group Women in Residential Property (Meet our Regional Reps – Women in Residential Property) . The group seeks to connect, support, collaborate and share insight throughout the residential property industry.

Zara’s drive for these voluntary roles is fueled by a desire to help make a difference and also inspire young lawyers to become actively involved in pro bono work and action groups within our communities.

Zara commented: “Although there are limited hours in the day, I aim to make time for causes and initiatives which I feel strongly about. Blaser Mills Law has always been very supportive and encouraging of my voluntary work, which sends out a strong message about the firm’s values.”

Jane Hannaway, Partner and Head of the Residential Property department, encourages an inclusive work environment and actively supports the career progression of the women in Blaser Mills Law and the legal profession overall.

Jane commented: “Zara is a shining example of an advocate for inclusivity and empowering women within the workplace, the legal profession and the wider community every single day”.

Key differences between retirement and care homes

Choosing the right living arrangement for yourself or a loved one in later years can be a significant decision, often marked by careful consideration of various options available. Among these options, retirement homes and care homes stand out as popular choices, each catering to different needs and preferences. Understanding the differences between the two is crucial for making an informed decision that aligns with individual circumstances and requirements.

Our Partner, Shabina Hussain, outlines the key differences.

Retirement homes
Retirement homes, also known as independent living communities, are designed for retirees who are relatively independent and do not require round-the-clock medical care or assistance with daily activities. These communities offer residents the opportunity to maintain an active and fulfilling lifestyle while enjoying the benefits of communal living. Typically, retirement homes provide amenities such as entertainment, social activities, dining options, and various supportive services like housekeeping and transportation.

Residents in retirement homes typically live in private apartments or bungalows within the community, retaining a sense of autonomy and privacy while also having access to on-site amenities and social opportunities. The focus of retirement homes is on promoting a vibrant and engaging lifestyle for seniors who value independence and community interaction.

Care homes
In contrast, care homes, also known as assisted living facilities or nursing homes, are intended for those who require assistance with activities of daily living (ADLs) or have complex medical needs that call for ongoing supervision and support. Care homes provide a higher level of care and assistance, including help with bathing, dressing, medication management, meal preparation, and mobility assistance.

Care homes employ trained staff members, including nurses and caregivers, who are available around the clock to attend to residents’ needs and provide medical assistance as required.

Key differences
The primary distinction between retirement homes and care homes lies in the level of care and support provided to residents. Retirement homes stress independence, autonomy, and a vibrant social environment, catering to those who are capable of managing their daily routines with minimal assistance. In contrast, care homes prioritise healthcare and assistance with activities of daily living, making them suitable for those individuals with more significant care needs or medical conditions requiring ongoing supervision.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
At Blaser Mills Law we have wide experience of acting for clients who are buying retirement homes and we know exactly what to look out for. We know that the sheer volume of documentation can be overwhelming, and we take great care to explain all aspects of the purchase as we move through the conveyancing process.

If a retirement home sounds like the best option for you please contact Shabina Hussain on 01494 788027 or email shh@blasermills.co.uk

Why everyone needs a Will

In today’s fast-paced world, it’s easy to put off important tasks, and writing a Will is often one of them. However, having a Will is crucial for ensuring your wishes are carried out after your death and providing peace of mind to your loved ones. Heenal Chhipa-Gadday, Senior Associate in our Wills, Trusts and Probate team, highlights the importance of having a Will, and the steps to take in order to secure your legacy.

Why do I need a Will?
A Will is a legal document that outlines how your estate, including your property, money, and possessions, should be distributed after your death. Even if you think you don’t need one, having a Will ensures that your wishes are respected, and your loved ones are taken care of. Without a Will, your estate will be distributed according to the intestacy rules, which may not align with your wants.

What are the benefits?
Writing a Will offers several benefits beyond determining the distribution of your assets. Firstly, if you live with a partner without being married or in a civil partnership, they won’t automatically inherit your estate without a Will. Secondly, if you have children, a Will allows you to nominate a legal guardian who will care for them in the event of your passing. Additionally, a Will enables you to express your funeral wishes and can help mitigate inheritance tax.

What are the consequences?
Dying without a will, also known as dying intestate, can lead to complications and unintended consequences. The rules of intestacy determine how your estate Will be distributed, and these rules may not align with your preferences. For example, if you have a spouse and children, your spouse may only receive a portion of your estate, with the remainder divided among your children. In some cases, if you have no surviving relatives, your estate may be claimed by the Crown.

The process
Gathering information
Before your appointment, it’s helpful to gather relevant information that will assist in the process. This includes details about your assets, such as property, savings, investments, and valuable possessions. You should also consider any debts or liabilities, such as mortgages or loans. Additionally, think about who you would like to appoint as the executor of your Will, the person responsible for carrying out your wishes that you trust.

Seek legal advice
During your appointment, the solicitor will guide you through the process. They will ask you a series of questions to understand your wishes and ensure your Will accurately reflects your intentions. The solicitor will provide advice on legal matters, including inheritance tax implications and any specific considerations based on your unique circumstances. After the consultation, the solicitor will draft your Will.

Review and signing
Once the solicitor drafts your Will, they will provide you with an opportunity to review it thoroughly. It’s crucial to carefully read through the document to ensure all your wishes are accurately represented. If any changes or adjustments are necessary, discuss them with the solicitor. Once you are satisfied with the final version, you will sign the Will in the presence of witnesses, who will also sign to validate the document.

What happens next
Power of Attorney
While a Will is an essential component of estate planning, it’s also important to consider other aspects of protecting your interests and wishes. One such measure is establishing a lasting power of attorney. This legal document allows you to appoint a trusted individual to make financial and personal decisions on your behalf if you become incapacitated. By appointing someone you trust as your attorney, you can have peace of mind knowing that your affairs will be handled according to your wishes.

Regular updates
Creating a Will is not a one-time task; it requires periodic review and updates. Life circumstances change, and it’s essential to ensure that your Will accurately reflects your current wishes and circumstances. Significant events such as marriage, divorce, birth, or death in the family may necessitate modifications to your Will. It’s advisable to review your Will regularly and consult with a solicitor to make any necessary updates to ensure your legacy is preserved.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
The areas we deal with are never easy to discuss. Planning for the future can often be upsetting and daunting. Our team understands how difficult these conversations can be, and we take the time to understand your particular areas of concern and your wishes for the future.

We will ensure we always explain the situation clearly and we remain available on an ongoing basis to advise and update schemes where needed. Importantly, we will never hurry you and we will always make sure you are completely happy with the plans we put in place for you.

To speak to our team about managing your affairs email cad@blasermills.co.uk.

New flexible working regulations come into force in April 2024

From 6th April 2024, The Employment Relations (Flexible Working) Act 2023 will come into force with new flexible working regulations coming into effect. Noel Deans, Partner in the Employment team, outlines the key changes.

The new regulations incorporate a broader definition of flexible working; the traditional flexible arrangements, such as part-time work and job-sharing, remain valid, with provisions for hybrid working and reduced hours being included. They also extend the right to request flexible working arrangements to all employees, removing the previous limitations based on tenure or parental status.

The updated legislation aims to focus on setting the right conditions so that employees and employers can have an open-minded conversation about what flexible working arrangements might be possible in any given context, allowing all employees to request changes to their work arrangements and requiring employers to properly consider those requests, although they do not have to necessarily agree to them.

The headlines of the new regulations are:

Day one right
Employees will have the right to request flexible working from day 1 of their employment.
Previously 26 week’s service was required before making a request.

Two month response time
Employers need to respond to each request within two months.
Previously this was three months.

Two requests in 12 month period
Employees will be able to make a second flexible working request within any 12-month period.
Previously this was one request per 12 months.

However an employee may have only one ‘live’ request for flexible working with their employer at any one time. Once a request has been made, it remains live until:

– A decision about the request is made by the employer.
– The request is withdrawn.
– An outcome is mutually agreed.
– The statutory two-month period for deciding requests ends.
– A request continues to be live during any appeal or any extension to the statutory two-month decision period that an employer and employee may have agreed.

Employers must consult with employees
Unless the employer decides to agree to the employee’s written request in full, they must consult the employee before they make a decision. In such cases, the employer should invite the employee to a consultation meeting to discuss the request. This duty aims to prevent employers from defaulting to ‘no’ without first engaging with the employee when responding to individual requests.

Employees no longer need to explain effect of changes
The new regulations remove the requirement for employees to explain what effect the change applied for would have on the employer and how that effect might be dealt with. However, a request must be in writing and state that it is a statutory request for flexible working, and include:
– The date of the request.
– The change the employee is requesting to the terms and conditions of their employment in relation to their hours, times or place of work.
– The date the employee would like the change to come into effect.

Effectively and fairly dealing with a request for flexible working
It is crucial for employers to engage in a reasonable and timely manner when considering flexible working requests. It is important to maintain transparent communication with employees throughout the process, providing clear reasons for accepting or rejecting a request.

In handling a request, and any information that the employee discloses as part of that request, employers must not discriminate unlawfully against the employee in relation to any of the protected characteristics set out in the Equality Act 2010. The nine protected characteristics are: age, disability, gender reassignment, marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy and maternity, race, religion or belief, sex, and sexual orientation.

Employers will retain the ability to refuse such requests based on specific grounds. A decision to reject a request must be for one or more of the following business reasons:

– The burden of additional costs.
– An inability to reorganise work amongst existing staff.
– An inability to recruit additional staff.
– A detrimental impact on quality.
– A detrimental impact on performance.
– A detrimental effect on ability to meet customer demand.
– Insufficient work available for the periods the employee proposes to work.
– Planned structural changes to the employer’s business.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
As the UK adopts new flexible working rules it is important to stay informed on the expanded eligibility criteria, diverse types of flexible working, and the considerations surrounding these arrangements.

Blaser Mills Law recommends that employers review their contracts of employment and flexible working policies and procedures to ensure that they are compliant with the new flexible working rules. If you would like access to advice or need further guidance on flexible working, please contact the Employment Team at Blaser Mills Law on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermillslaw.co.uk.

Volunteering for the One Can Trust

The team at Blaser Mills Law had a fantastic time volunteering for the One Can Trust at the local Sainsbury’s in High Wycombe.

The One Can Trust is a foodbank operating in High Wycombe and South Buckinghamshire since 2011. They work with local organisations, including Bucks Council, housing associations and the Department for Work and Pensions, to provide weekly food parcels to those in need.

Through the kindness of the High Wycombe locals, our volunteers managed to collect 32 crates worth of food donations that will help serve our local community.

We would like to thank those who supported us on the day and the One Can Trust for the opportunity.

To find out how you can donate or help click here: One Can Trust – Foodbank serving families in need

Blaser Mills Law grows Corporate team with addition of Oksana Howard as a Partner

We are delighted to announce that Oksana Howard joins the firm as a Partner in the Corporate department. With experience in corporate law at a renowned City firm and a Central London practice where she was head of the Corporate team, Oksana brings valuable expertise to Blaser Mills Law.

Specialising in cross-border transactional M&A, Oksana advises both domestic and international clients, with a strong focus on the US market. Her expertise involves a wide range of corporate transactions, including buying and selling companies and businesses, management buy-outs, joint ventures, reorganisations, mergers, de-mergers, private equity deals and investments.

Drawing upon her Ukrainian background, Oksana often supports Eastern European companies, businesses, and high-net-worth individuals with legal matters that demand expertise in English law.

Edward Lee, Partner and Head of Corporate commented: “We are delighted to welcome Oksana to the Corporate team. Oksana’s experience and expertise in handling complex corporate transactions, coupled with her international perspective, will further strengthen our ability to deliver exceptional service and value to our clients.”

Oksana added: “The reputation of Blaser Mills Law and the continual achievements of the corporate team means this is an exciting move for me. I very much look forward to collaborating with the wider team and delivering unmatched value to our clients.”

Hold the front page: The Courts have considered the Building Safety Act

For the first time, the Building Safety Act has been tested in the Courts. Kate McLauchlan looks at the impacts for developers and commercial landowners.

Origin of the Building Safety Act 2022

The Building Safety Act (“the Act”) was introduced following the Grenfell Tower fire in June 2017 and the Government’s subsequent review into the safety of high-rise residential buildings in particular.

The Act provides clarity as to how buildings should be constructed, maintained and made safe and applies to all buildings with additional requirements for ‘Higher Risk Buildings’ i.e. residential buildings at least 18 meters in height or with at least 7 storeys.

In particular, the Act entitles an ‘interested person’ to apply to the Courts for a Remediation Contribution Order (“RCO”) to require a former or current landlord, or the original developer, to contribute to the cost of remedying ‘relevant defects’ in a ‘relevant building’.

Triathlon Homes LLP v Stratford Village Development Partnership, Get Living Plc and East Village Management Limited

On 19 January 2024, the Courts handed down the first judgment clarifying when the Courts may grant an RCO.

In this case, Triathlon Homes (TH) owned affordable and social housing in the blocks of flats in question. The remaining privately rented units were owned by subsidiary companies of Get Living Plc (GLP) which was a real estate investment trust which also owned Stratford Village Development Partnership (SVDP), the company which originally developed the properties. The flats were managed by East Village Management Limited (EVML) which was jointly owned by GLP and TH.

In November 2020, EVML discovered serious fire safety defects on the external cladding of the building. A remediation programme began very quickly with works funded by grants from the government’s Building Safety Fund (BSF). The total cost was expected to be over £24.5 million, of which TH was liable for £16.03 million. TH therefore applied to the Courts for an RCO against SVDP (the developer) and GLP (its parent company) for that amount.

The case turned on whether it was ‘just and equitable’ for an RCO to be made. The Court did not agree with SVDP/GLP’s arguments that an RCO was unnecessary because the remedial works, which had already commenced, were due to be fully funded by the Building Safety Fund. Alternatively, SVDP/GLP argued that TH should pursue the contractor or consultants involved in the designing and construction phases for damages under normal contract rules. The Court was not persuaded by this argument either.

The Court decided that RCOs are intended to be a ‘no-fault’ remedy and therefore the Court did not consider it relevant that TH had the possibility of succeeding in a claim against another contractor when deciding whether it was ‘just and equitable’ to make an RCO. The Court held that the purpose of the legislation is to allow applicants to source alternate funding without needing to be involved in lengthy, expensive litigation. It considered that it was just and equitable for remediation costs to fall to the original developer, especially as it had been readily supported by its wealthy parent company.

Although funding was made available by the BSF, the Court found that there was strong public interest in reimbursing those funds where possible as the Fund would be put at risk without further support.

The Explanatory Notes to the Act place the original developers at the top of the hierarchy for liability wherever possible, ahead of freeholders and subsequent landlords.

What does this all mean?

The important message from this recent case is that not only does this legislation impose liability on developers and landlords alike, but also the Courts are very willing to uphold Parliament’s intention to make those entities accountable for the enormous, but necessary, remediation costs involved in improving building safety.

This case demonstrates that parent companies are not exempt simply because they are separate entities. The Courts will always consider all of the facts before deciding whether it is fair to make an RCO.

Developers will most likely be placed with the burden of meeting remediation costs. However, where a developer does not have the financial resources to do so, those corporate entities with the deepest pockets are likely to be pursued first in practice, wherever they fall on the hierarchy of liability. Therefore, this case should put all entities on notice of how they may be implicated if remediation works are needed, irrespective of whether or not they are at fault. This may include management companies and landlords.

If faced with an application for an RCO, the entity in question should consider the hierarchy of liability and submit their own RCO application if necessary.If you need assistance with the Building Safety Act or any property litigation or construction matter, please contact Blaser Mills Law on 020 3814 2020 and ask for Sara Davies for Property Litigation or Tess Turner for Construction.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Navigating divorce finances

Navigating divorce finances

Divorce is often a challenging and stressful process, especially when it comes to dividing financial assets and property.

A recent Nuffield-funded research study titled “Fair Shares? Sorting out money and property on divorce” sheds light on the intricacies of this issue in England and Wales. Led by Professor Emma Hitchings at the University of Bristol, the study aims to provide a comprehensive understanding of how the current legal framework functions and its impact on divorcing couples.

Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate, from the Family and Divorce team at Blaser Mills Law outlines key findings from the study.

Financial context

Contrary to media portrayals, the study reveals that most divorcees involve modest assets, with a median total asset pool of £135,000. This means that the average picture for divorcing couples is far removed from what you might see in the news.

Financial vulnerability is pronounced, especially among women and mothers. This was partly because they were less likely to work full time and on average earned less than their husbands primarily because of the impact of having children on their employment. They also tended to accumulate less pension during the marriage as a result of this.

Lack of financial and legal knowledge

The study also highlights the lack of awareness among a significant number of divorcees regarding the family and their ex-spouses’ finances which creates further vulnerability. Although 60% of divorcees turn to a solicitor for advice, 40% do not and the study stresses the need for authoritative, clear, and accessible information sources to navigate the complex landscape of financial settlements on divorce.

A personalised approach

The study underlines the need for a personalised approach in reaching financial arrangements during divorce. Although the factors that are taken into consideration when looking at a financial settlement are set out in legislation, because of the individual circumstances, no two cases are the same so it’s important to seek help from a professional that will offer tailored advice.

Sorting out finances

The research unravels confusion around dispute resolution methods and legal support, with cost concerns deterring many from seeking legal assistance. Only 32% of divorcees used legal services.  

Worryingly, 36% of divorcees stated that they had not made any financial arrangement with their ex-spouse when they divorced. The study highlights the potential benefits of legal oversight in ensuring fair financial arrangements and when using a lawyer, the research showed that couples were more likely to consider the pension arrangements, on-going spousal maintenance, and a greater share of the home for the wife.

Splitting equally – is not the norm!

It’s important not to assume you will both get a broadly equal split, the study reports that only 28% of divorcees received approximately half of the total asset pool. Unequal distribution is often the case because of the individual circumstances, needs, and objectives of the divorcees.

Pensions, assets, and debts

The study highlights lack of awareness and understanding of pensions, emphasizing their significant role in determining post-divorce financial positions. Pensions are often one of the largest assets in a divorce. The research showed a lack of interest in the pension and a view that it should remain with the person who contributed to the pension.

Achieving a financial clean break

A significant proportion of divorcees aspired to achieve a clean financial break and having no financial ties with the ex-spouse. Spousal maintenance arrangements were primarily used to address post-divorce living adjustments rather than serving as a perpetual income source. Maintenance is not the meal ticket it was.

In conclusion, “Fair Shares?” provides valuable insights into the challenges faced by divorcing couples, shedding light on the complexities that influence financial decisions and outcomes in England and Wales. Understanding the intricacies of financial arrangements during divorce is essential, and the study’s recommendations aim to help divorcing couples better prepare for what may lay ahead.

For further information or advice please contact Naim Qureshi on 01494 781356 or email naq@blasermills.co.uk.

Protecting your brand – Ways to handle parallel imports

2024 update

The UK’s departure from the European Union has had an inescapable impact on cross-border trade. One important aspect that has not grabbed headlines but has had major implications for domestic owners and exclusive licensees of intellectual property rights (IPR) such as trade marks in the UK, lies in the changes to the law relating to parallel imports and exhaustion of rights.

Parallel imports and exhaustion of rights

Normally, any trade, including import and export, of branded goods (e.g. goods bearing a registered trademark) can only be done with permission of the owner of the IPR. This permission is typically given to a licensed distributor. Parallel importing is where genuine IP-protected goods – not counterfeits – are imported from one territory into another . Problems arise if the territory into which the goods are imported is meant to be the exclusive sales territory of a specific licensor and not the importer.

While the default position should be that any imports and exports need the IPR owner’s permission, the EEA adopts a rule known as exhaustion of rights. This states that where the branded goods are sold in one EEA country with the IPR owner’s permission, those goods can lawfully be sold or imported/exported into any other EEA country without seeking any further permission.  In other words, once placed on the market in the EEA the right to prevent the further onward sale of those goods are exhausted. This means that ownership of a registered trade mark in the UK cannot by itself stop the sale of genuine goods bearing that trade mark, into the UK from the EEA.

The Brexit impact

Prior to Brexit, IPR-protected goods that were sold legally in the UK could (subject to any contractual limits set by the IPR owner) be freely exported to any other EEA country under the exhaustion of rights rules, and vice versa.

The legal position following Brexit however, created a more uneven legal position.

Branded goods sold in the UK can no longer be freely exported to the EEA without permission, as the IPRs are no longer considered exhausted within the EEA by being placed on the UK market. UK businesses looking to export branded goods into the EEA now need to seek the permission of the IPR owner(s) in the EEA to export these, with the risk that the IPR owner may refuse that permission and prevent the export.

Owners of IPR in the UK cannot, however, wield this same power over branded goods imported into the UK. This is because IPR in branded goods sold in another EEA country by, or with the consent of the IPR owner in that country are still deemed to be exhausted in the UK, and so can still be freely imported for sale in the UK market even without the UK IPR owner’s permission.  

This poses particular issues for UK exclusive distributors of branded goods because goods sold under the brand elsewhere in the EEA can still make their way legally to the UK market via import, undermining the distributor’s exclusivity. It similarly risks reputation damage to brand owners by undermining their exclusive distribution channel, through which a brand owner would typically control its brand prestige and reputation in the UK.

In 2021-22, the UK government ran a consultation to address this legal mismatch but concluded that there was not adequate grounds to justify changing the approach, despite its impact on brand owners and exclusive distributors. The government noted in its response that “any change to the exhaustion of rights framework for the UK has the potential to affect many business sectors and consumers“.

What Businesses Can Do

As the legal position on parallel imports is not expected to change in the medium term, it is vital that any distribution agreement granting exclusivity in the UK is looked at carefully, and suppliers use the tools at their disposal to identify, prevent and deter parallel imports.

For UK exclusive distributors

Exclusive distributors should always request the right to pursue any claims for third party IPR infringement. This is because, although importing is allowed without the IPR owner’s consent, the use of a UK-registered trade mark in UK advertising without consent of that trade mark’s owner is still unlawful. The UK Supreme Court has confirmed that this applies to parallel import sales as well as to sale of counterfeit goods. An exclusive UK distributor with a right to bring claims for trade mark infringements on behalf of the IPR owner can use this right to demand a stop to any advertising of goods in the UK that might lead to a parallel import. This can help to reinforce their exclusivity.

For suppliers appointing exclusive distributors

  • Suppliers appointing a series of separate exclusive distributors across different countries should ensure that their agreements allow each distributor to sell the supplier’s goods in their designated territory, but not into other specific territories where the Supplier has granted exclusivity to another distributor.  Such contracts should also build in remedies if these divisions are contravened, for example rights for the Supplier to terminate or remove a distributor’s exclusivity. This would allow a Supplier contractual recourse against a distributor who parallel imports goods. Additionally, contracts should control what a distributor can do with excess stock held by it upon termination, or (for industries with seasonal stock changes) at end-of-season.
  • Beyond the contract, suppliers can also use commercial tools to monitor the market, to ascertain whether parallel imports are happening and if so, how many. Investigative tools can indicate price and origin of goods; while identifying products with tell-tale packaging or labelling differences might demonstrate that they originated outside the UK market.
  • Suppliers can also seek to influence the buy-side of parallel imports by incentivising customers to shop through the Supplier’s authorised distribution channels instead. This aims to deter customers from buying parallel imports, so reducing demand for such imports. Popular incentives include loyalty schemes for shopping through authorised channels, or offering a customer service that exceeds what is offered by the parallel importers. By creating a customer service culture or rewarding loyalty, a Supplier can enhance its brand far beyond the products that are being parallel imported.

For further information please contact Rebecca Cooper on 01494 932614 or email rac@blasermills.co.uk.

Construction law update: The payment regime and why you must comply!

In the last few months of 2023, we represented parties in three different adjudications; an Employer, a Main Contractor and a Sub-Contractor. The common denominator was that all three involved a Referral for a true value adjudication of works undertaken and in each case there were issues concerning compliance with any payment regime and the ineffectiveness of payless notices.

In this article, we consider the requirements of the statutory regime and offer guidance as to how to comply.

What is a Payment Regime in the Construction Industry?

A Payment Regimes is nothing more complicated than the contractual provisions directing when payments are to be made and what the timetable is for applications and payment notices.

The principal parties are the ‘payer’ (often the Employer) and the ‘payee’, often the Contractor.

In the first instance, the payment regime may be set out in the contract. If it is then it must comply with the minimal requirements set out in the Housing Grants Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (“the Act”).

Where the contractual payment regime is insufficient, or the contract does not provide a regime, the Statutory Payment Regime (Scheme for Construction Contracts 1998) will apply.  The Scheme applies where certain payment provisions are missing, or in some circumstances, the entire Scheme will apply as there is no contractual payment provision at all.

The starting position is that the payee makes an application for payment on a regular basis. The payer then has a limited number of days to assess and issue a valuation of the application. It then issues a Payment Notice setting out the sum it intends to pay. If it intends to deduct money from the assessed value of the application it has to issue a Payless Notice.

The regularity of the payee’s payment applications must comply with the contractual payment regime, and if not applicable, the Statutory Payment Regime. The same applies to the payer when issuing payment notices. This is particularly important where the payer decides to withhold some or all of the payment and issues a Payless Notice. Failure to comply with the relevant regime will render such a Payless notices invalid.

Statutory Payment Regime

There are two key considerations here; content and timing.

Content

The payee’s payment application must be written, specifying the amount of any payment(s) it considers to be due and how those payments are calculated. In short, the payee must be able to support and evidence its claim and calculations.

When issuing a Payment Notice, the payer must also clearly set out how the Payment Notice is calculated, to what it relates and specify the amount it proposes to pay. This is crucial when issuing a Payless Notice – it is simply not enough to deduct an amount from the payment notice without clearly explaining the reasoning.

Timing

If the contract does not provide a regular period for payment, then the Statutory Payment Regime  requires invoices to be issued every 28 days. This is known as the ‘relevant valuation period.’ It does not matter what point in the month this 28-day period runs from but it must be consistent month to month.

The payment ‘due date’ is 7 days after the expiry of the relevant valuation period. Therefore, payment is due 7 days after the date of the invoice (assuming it is has been issued in accordance with the above.)

The ‘final date’ for payment is 17 days from the due date and the date for issuing a payment notice/payless notice is 5 days after the date on which payment becomes due.

For example, if an invoice was raised on 30 January in any given year payment would be due 7 days later on 6 February. The final date for payment would be 17 days later on 23 February. Payment Notices or Payless Notices are only valid if served no later than 5 days after this, on 28 February. Any Payless Notices received after this date would not be enforceable.

Smash and Grab Adjudications

Compliance with the Statutory Regime or a contractual provisions can be difficult, but if undertaken correctly, it opens the option for a technical adjudication, colloquially known as a ‘smash and grab’ adjudication.

Where the payer fails to issue a Payment Notice then the payment application stands as the assessed value. Where the payer gives an assessment of value or even a Payment Notice then in the absence of a valid Payless Notice the payer has no right to make a deduction.

In either case, in the event of non-payment of the assessed sum due, this constitutes a dispute which the payee can refer to Adjudication. The adjudicator is not asked to determine the value of the work in question but instead whether the payee has complied with the relevant regime (contractual or statutory) and if so in the absence of a Payless Notice, the payee will be awarded payment on a technicality.  

True Value Adjudications

Many Employers and Contractors are unaware of these requirements and so their contracts do not comply with the Statutory Regime. In such circumstances, where disputes over payment arise and neither party has complied, it is necessary to seek a true valuation of the works undertaken via an adjudication. By nature, these involve more work, evidence and may require an extension to the 28 days timescale to be determined.

Our Recent Cases

1) Our client was an Employer who had appointed a Contractor to complete construction works. A dispute arose when our client (for various reasons) did not pay the contractor who then referred the matter to adjudication. As the contractor had brought the adjudication based on it having applied for payment in accordance with the Statutory Scheme, the Adjudicator had to consider whether the requirements of the Statutory Scheme had been met. The Adjudicator concluded that the contractor had not adhered to the Scheme and that therefore our client was not in breach of their payment notice obligations and no payment was due.

2) Our client was a main contractor who was completing building works for a development company. Our client sub-contracted an element of the works to a sub-contractor. A dispute arose as to what was payable to the sub-contractor and whether payless notices were valid. In this case, it was clear that the Statutory Scheme had not been complied with and our client referred the matter to an Adjudicator for a true value of the works undertaken by the sub-contractor. The sub-contractor was unable to demonstrate the value of work it had undertaken and no further payment was found to be due.

3) We acted for a sub-contractor company which contracted to undertake maintenance works under a framework agreement. Payless notices were issued by the contractor and our client contested their validity., Our client later commenced a true value adjudication which was successful.

Analysis

In each of these disputes our clients were successful for two specific reasons:

1              They maintained good records; and

2              They won on the law by analysing the facts and applying the law appropriately.

Non-compliance with the contractual (or statutory) regime is commonplace and generally does not cause an issue where the parties have a good relationship and there is no dispute. Unfortunately, disputes will inevitably arise in some construction contracts in terms of valuation and payment. 

Operating under compliant contracts and understanding what notices are due, in what form and when are key to succeeding in adjudications.

If you need assistance with a construction dispute, or advice on how to ensure your payment regime is compliant, please contact us on 020 3814 2020.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Excluding liability for dishonest breach – A warning

The recent case of Innovate Pharmaceuticals Ltd v University of Portsmouth Higher Education Corporation [2024] EWHC 35 (TCC) provides a salient reminder of the need for parties to carefully consider the limitation of liability in contracts and the construction of these clauses.

Innovate sought damages from the University of Portsmouth arising from a Research Agreement between the parties concerning research into a drug patented by Innovate. An academic paper was published by the University which Innovate alleged had been “infected by dishonesty” because the author of the paper (a scientist at the University) either knew, or was reckless as to whether, the paper was in-part fabricated.

The Research Agreement included an exclusion of liability clause as follows:-

“…the University is not liable to [Innovate] because of any representation (unless fraudulent) or any warranty (express or implied), condition or other term, or any duty at common law, or under the express terms of this Agreement for any loss of profits, business, contracts, opportunity, goodwill, revenues, anticipated savings, expenses, costs or other similar loss; and/or any indirect, special or consequential damages or losses (whether for loss of profits or otherwise).”

Innovate sought to claim loss of profits in excess of £1 million on the basis that it alleged there had been a dishonest breach of the Research Agreement by the University.

The issue before the Court was the construction of the limitation clause. The sole carve out in the exclusion clause was for ‘fraudulent misrepresentation’. As a matter of construction the word ‘fraudulent’ applied only to representation and not to the remainder of the clause. The Court found that the exclusion of liability was applicable to all claims except where the claim was based upon a fraudulent misrepresentation. Therefore a dishonest breach of contract was not sufficient to defeat the exclusion of liability.

Further the Court found that the exclusion of liability was reasonable for the purposes of the Unfair Contract Terms Act 1977 and enforceable. The clause did not provide a blanket exclusion for all liability. There was no inequality in the parties bargaining power. A legally qualified individual had negotiated the Research Agreement on behalf of Innovate. Innovate did not blindly accept the terms put to it but actively negotiated amendments including to the wider exclusion clause. Further, the University was being paid a sum far below the commercial market rate for the work to be undertaken and therefore, it was reasonable that it sought to limit its liability for potentially significant sums far in excess of those rates, on the basis of acts of its agents.

The construction of a clause is an issue that needs to be considered on a case-by-case basis. However, this case is a stark reminder that although a clause may not expressly refer to any limitation for a claim of dishonest breach, it may well be caught and excluded by the overall construction of the clause. Careful review of any exclusion and limitation clauses is essential for parties before entering into any agreement.

If you would like to discuss any aspect of this article or require any further information or advice, please contact Jade Salton-Brooks on jkb@blasermills.co.uk.

The UK-US Data Bridge – What has it changed?

The 12th October 2023 saw the introduction of the UK-US Data Bridge (‘the Data Bridge’), transforming the way both nations handle the flow of information across their borders.

Pre-Data Bridge

Before the Data Bridge, the lawful transfer of personal data from an organisation based in the UK to a counterpart in the US was governed by complex regulations, specifically the EU-US Privacy Shield (‘the Privacy Shield’), the EU General Data Protection Regulation (‘UK GDPR’) and the UK General Data Protection Regulation (‘UK GDPR’).

EU-US Privacy Shield

From July 2016 until July 2020, the Privacy Shield partially governed the exchange of personal data between the US and EU (and then the UK, post-Brexit) for commercial purposes. Its purpose was to enable US organisations to easily receive personal data from EU entities under EU privacy laws, which intended to protect EU citizens. After concerns about the US government surveillance practices and their impact on the privacy of EU citizens’ personal data, the Privacy Shield was invalidated by the European Court of Justice in 2020, creating uncertainty in the transatlantic data-sharing network.

Alternative Data Transfer Mechanisms

By removing the Privacy Shield, UK organisations wishing to transfer personal data to the US had to rely on alternative data transfer mechanisms such as Standard Contractual Clauses (‘SCCs’) and Binding Corporate Rules (‘BCRs’).

Most UK organisations relied on SCCs to lawfully transfer personal data to the US following the demise of the Privacy Shield. However, SCCs were only deemed a lawful mechanism if the data exporter also carried out a potentially complex transfer impact assessment to consider whether the protection for UK data subjects under the UK data protection regime would be undermined by US laws.

In March 2022, the International Data Transfer Agreements (IDTAs) superseded the EU SCCs in the UK after the UK GDPR replaced the EU GDPR in January 2021. IDTAs operate in a similar way to SCCs and therefore, need to be accompanied by a transfer risk assessment to ensure that the transfer adequately protects the rights of UK data subjects.

EU-US Data Privacy Framework

On 25th March 2022, the US and EU announced the EU-US Data Privacy Framework (‘DPF’) which provided a mechanism for personal data to transfer safely from the EU to US organisations participating in the DPF, without the need for additional data protection safeguards. This came into force on 10th July 2023 after the European Commission’s decision that the US ensures an adequate level of protection for personal data transferred under the new framework.

UK-US Data Bridge

The Data Bridge is the UK extension to the DPF, allowing personal data to be transferred from the UK to organisations in the US which are participating in the DPF, with no further safeguards necessary. However, any transfer under the UK extension must be made to a DPF-certified US organisation which has opted into the UK extension. Additionally, any data transferred by this method which is ordinarily covered by the UK GDPR will be subject to the principles of the DPF.

To self-certify, eligible US organisations must agree with the DPF principles, which provide data protections for personal data transferred from the EU. Following this, they must make a public commitment to comply via a published privacy policy. The principles impose commitments in relation to data protection and set out requirements on how an organisation collects, processes, and discloses personal data.

Certain categories of personal data that are treated as ‘special category’ data under the UK GDPR are no considered ‘sensitive’ information under the DPF unless they have been identified as sensitive by the transferring organisation. The categories that must be expressly flagged as sensitive are:

  • Biometric data;
  • Data concerning sexual orientation;
  • Genetic data; and
  • Criminal offence data.

The following rights are not protected under the DPF but are provided for the in the UK GDPR:

  • The right to be forgotten under the UK GDPR;
  • The rights under the UK GDPR relating to decisions based solely on automated processing; and
  • The unconditional right to withdraw consent to data processing.

Before relying on the Data Bridge as a valid transfer mechanism, UK businesses should ensure that all pre-transfer requirements and considerations are satisfied and made.

Benefits

  • Legal clarity – the Data Bridge provides a clear legal framework for data transfers, reducing uncertainty for businesses and individuals in both the UK and US.
  • Enhanced security – agreement prioritises data security, ensuring that personal data remains safe during transit and storage.
  • Reduced compliance costs – administrative obligations under the Data Bridge are much reduced compared to those under alternative compliance measures. The Data Bridge therefore represents a more cost-effective means for businesses to operate in the UK and US.
  • Swift dispute resolution – Data Bridge includes mechanisms for swift resolution of data-related disputes, reducing the need for lengthy legal battles and associated costs. 

Challenges

  • Data privacy – it has been suggested that the agreement may no go far enough in safeguarding data privacy – it is crucial for governments and businesses to strike the right balance between data and individual privacy rights.
  • Security risks – as data sharing becomes more streamlined, there is always the risk of increased exposure to security threats.
  • Regulatory compatibility – Data Bridge must work in harmony with existing data protection regulations like the UK GDPR and US Privacy Act to ensure a seamless and compliant data-sharing environment.

If your business requires advice on its compliance with the Data Bridge, our data protection lawyers can help. For further information please contact James Simpson 01494 478689  on or email jfs@blasermills.co.uk.

This article is not intended to constitute legal advice and you should not take, or refrain from taking, any action based on the information which it contains. Always seek the services of a professional legal adviser.

Benefits of family mediation

January 22nd – 26th marks Family Mediation Week, an opportunity to raise awareness of family mediation and the benefits it may bring to separating families.

Family mediation is a process in which an independent and professionally trained mediator helps separating couples resolve any challenges and disputes faced when parting ways. The mediator will help you to work out arrangements for things such as housing, children, and finances, including pensions and other assets.

Mediation involves an initial assessment meeting, often referred to as a MIAM – Mediation information and assessment meeting, where the mediator will see you on your own to discuss the process and find out what you are hoping to achieve and for you both to consider whether mediation will be appropriate in your case. There will then be a series of joint sessions between you and your partner, which are facilitated by a mediator. The mediator will help you and your partner make decisions in a constructive and confidential setting, making sure all disputes are resolved with as little conflict as possible.

If you do not feel comfortable with face-to- face mediation, the mediator will offer video mediation or shuttle mediation – where you will each be in a separate room and the mediator will shuttle between you.

What are the benefits?
There are several benefits to the mediation process, some of which are set out below:

Cost effective: Mediation tends to be more cost-effective than involving solicitors. Even if you do not come up with a complete agreement in mediation, the mediator should help you narrow the issues that are being disputed.

Confidential: Disputes resolved through mediation and not in court are completely confidential for both parties involved.

Faster outcome: Mediation generally takes less time to complete, allowing for an earlier solution than through the legal or court route.

More control: Mediation increases the control both parties have over the resolution. Both parties are involved in negotiating their own agreement and no settlement can be imposed upon you.

It improves communication: The mediation process helps both parties to focus on communicating effectively and relieves the pressure and stress that court disputes may bring.

Flexible: The process is informal and there are no formal rules and evidence required although the mediators at Blaser Mills Law will explain the advantages of full financial disclosure.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
By focusing on clear and open communication, family mediation has the potential to get you and your partner on the same page.

Voucher Scheme
Blaser Mills Law is part of the Family Mediation Voucher scheme, where in some cases, we can help you claim up to £500 towards your mediation costs.

The Ministry of Justice scheme, offers contributions of up to £500 per case/family for mediation that includes the arrangements for the children / child , encouraging people to seek to resolve their disputes outside of court where appropriate to do so.

The purpose of the scheme is to promote the benefits of mediation and divert matters where appropriate away from the family courts which are backlogged and a much more contentious way of trying to resolve most cases.

Lucinda Holliday
With over 10 years of experience in mediation, Lucinda Holliday qualified as a mediator in 2011 and became accredited in 2018.  Lucinda went on to qualify as a child inclusive mediation in 2020 which means she can facilitate your children being heard in the mediation process when relevant.

She is an expert in her field with expertise in dissolution, divorce, and separation and the associated financial issues and children matters that might occur as a result of the breakdown of a relationship.

To speak to Lucinda further about family mediation services call 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

Child Care team receives Competence Plus (2) award from the Legal Aid Agency

We are delighted to announce that our Child Care team has been awarded Competence Plus (2) recognition, in the family category, from the Legal Aid Agency Peer Review Report.

The team has been praised for its excellent communication, tailored advice, proactive approach, and ability to achieve great outcomes for its clients.

Denise Herman, Partner and Head of the Child Care team, commented: ‘This achievement is a testament to the dedication and hard work carried out by the Child Care team, who consistently go above and beyond to ensure the families we act for achieve the best possible outcomes during what can be a challenging time.

It reminds us of our ongoing commitment to making a positive impact in the lives of the families we assist’.

For further information or advice from the Child Care team please email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Benefits of instructing a local conveyancer to handle your move

We often find ourselves turning to the internet for various aspects of our daily lives, including tasks like banking, shopping, and ordering takeaways.  However, this might not be the best choice when it comes to property transactions which are a significant financial commitment for most individuals.

Many people assume that the conveyancing process is straightforward, this is far from the truth and difficulties can often arise as matters progress.  Challenges often surface as matters progress, and it is essential to have a skilled professional who can handle these situations, ensuring a smoother and less stressful experience for you.

Sam Bellia, Partner in the Residential Property team at Blaser Mills Law, outlines the key benefits of instructing a local solicitor as opposed to an online e-conveyancer.

  1. Local knowledge and expertise: A local solicitor will have personal knowledge of the area and will be aware of developments with specific issues.
  2. Face to face communication: You can book in a face-to-face meeting with your local solicitor at any point during the transaction.
  3. Witnessing documents: Many documents will need to be witnessed by someone independent and not related to you. These can be signed and witnessed at the office of a local law firm.
  4. Time sensitive matters: On some occasions, matters can become time sensitive which means you can visit your solicitor directly and hand over the hard copy of the documents rather than worry about postal arrangements.
  5. No hidden costs: Many local law firms pride themselves on transparency when it comes to costs. E-conveyancing firms are often known to add on hidden costs throughout the process.
  6. Reputation: Local law firms are usually recommended based on their reputation and expertise. The recommendations can come from the likes of estate agents, financial advisors or even friends and family.
  7. Local connections: A local law firm will have relationships with other professionals that can assist you with your property transaction, such as mortgage brokers and surveyors.
  8. A personal touch: E-conveyancing firms often handle a large volume of cases and lack personal contact with the client, often leaving you to deal with multiple agents. Using a local law firm, like Blaser Mills Law, means you will have a designated lawyer representing you and taking care of your requirements.
  9. Property transactions and beyond: Your local law firm will be able to service all your legal needs, becoming your go to legal partner throughout various stages of your life.

Why choose Balser Mills Law
Blaser Mills Law is regulated by the Solicitors Regulation Authority meaning we are accountable.  We have also been awarded the Conveyancing Quality Scheme accreditation by the Law Society which is a recognised quality standard regulated law firms dealing with residential conveyancing and is a symbol of certain standards of competence and client service levels being met. 

Get in touch
If you are thinking about moving home and are looking for a local, personal service to assist you with the legal aspect of the process, please get in touch with Sam on 01494 478609 or email sxb@blasermills.co.uk.

Family mediation at Christmas

The holiday season is a time of celebration and family gatherings. However, for separated or divorced parents, it can also be a period of stress and conflict, particularly when there is no clear plan for child arrangements over the festive break. Although there are many legal avenues to resolve such disputes, mediation is often the most preferred route by many.

Lucinda Holliday, Partner and Head of Family & Divorce at Blaser Mills Law, explains how mediation can help to relieve some stress this Christmas.

What is mediation?
Mediation is a voluntary process where a neutral third party, known as a mediator, helps the disputing parents to reach an agreement. In the context of family law, mediation can be used to resolve a wide range of issues, including child arrangements during the holidays. The mediator does not make decisions for the parties but facilitates communication and negotiation between them to help them reach a mutually acceptable solution.

The benefits
Mediation offers several advantages over litigation. It is generally quicker, less stressful, and less expensive than going to court. It also allows the parties to maintain control over the decision-making process, which can be particularly beneficial when dealing with sensitive issues such as child arrangements. Additionally, mediation encourages cooperation and communication, which can help to improve the long-term relationship between the parents, ultimately benefiting the children.

The process
The mediation process typically begins with an initial meeting, known as a Mediation Information and Assessment Meeting (MIAM). During this meeting, the mediator will explain the process, assess whether mediation is suitable for your situation, and answer any questions you may have.

If both parties agree to proceed with mediation, the mediator will arrange a series of sessions where you and the other parent can discuss your issues. These sessions are confidential, and the mediator will ensure that both parties have an equal opportunity to express their views and concerns.

During the mediation sessions, the mediator will help you and the other parent to explore different options and negotiate an agreement. If an agreement is reached, the mediator will draft a Memorandum of Understanding, which outlines the terms of the agreement. This document is not legally binding, but it can be converted into a legally binding court order if necessary.

What can I do if I don’t have a plan?

If you and the other parent have not yet agreed on where the children will spend Christmas, mediation can be an effective way to resolve this issue. Below are some steps you can take:

  1. Contact a mediator: Lucinda Holliday can facilitate mediation at Blaser Mills Law, she also offers child inclusive mediation. 
  2. Attend a MIAM: This meeting will help you understand what mediation involves and whether it’s the right approach for your situation.
  3. Prepare: Ahead of the sessions, think about what you want to achieve and any potential compromises you might be willing to make. It can also be helpful to seek legal advice so that you understand your rights and responsibilities.
  4. Participate: Try to stay open-minded, listen to the other parent’s perspective, and focus on the best interests of the children. Remember, the goal is not to ‘win’ but to reach a solution that works for everyone.
  5. Implement: If an agreement is reached, make sure you understand the terms and how they will be implemented. If necessary, you can ask the mediator to draft a court order to make the agreement legally binding.

In conclusion, while disputes about child arrangements during Christmas can be challenging, mediation offers a constructive and cooperative way to resolve these issues. By focusing on the best interests of the children and working towards a mutually acceptable solution, parents can ensure that the festive season is a time of joy and celebration for everyone.

To speak to Lucinda Holliday in regards to a mediation please contact her on (01494) 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

Blaser Mills Law raise £1,240 during Movember

Throughout the month, our Inclusion Forum has been raising awareness and shedding a light on men’s mental health challenges, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, and suicide.

Our wonderful mo’ growers and BML colleagues have raised a hugely impressive £1,240!

We would like to thank everyone who joined the movement and contributed a donation to this amazing cause. 🙌🎉

#Movember lives on beyond the facial hair, as we continue to champion men’s health every month! 🤝

https://uk.movember.com/team/2459445

Ps: Spot the comedy mo’…

Fast Track Conveyancing Service

We understand that selling a property can be stressful, there can be many obstacles that can arise throughout the conveyancing process, including the worry that your sale could fall through. Our expert Residential Property lawyers are here to provide a proactive and straightforward approach to the conveyancing process.

With our clients in mind, we have developed a Fast Track Conveyancing Service to maximise our clients’ chances of a successful sale, by starting the conveyancing process as soon as they put their property on the market.

What is the Fast Track Conveyancing Service?
Many sellers make the mistake of instructing a solicitor after they have accepted an offer on their property. This can often slow the conveyancing process down increasing the chances of someone in the chain changing their mind, causing the chain to collapse.

Instead, our Fast Track Conveyancing Service is available to clients as soon as they put their property on the market. By instructing us before you have a buyer in place, you can maximise the chances of a successful sale by speeding up the process and allowing for issues to be ironed out at the outset before they turn into potential problems and delays.

Our Fast Track Conveyancing Service enables us to trim weeks off the conveyancing process. Our experienced lawyers help you complete the Property Information Forms by making sure all the necessary supporting documents, like certificates and guarantees, are in order.

Ultimately, getting started on the conveyancing process as soon as your property is on the market, gives plenty of time to prepare and make sure that the initial documentation is comprehensive and readily available.  This allows us to issue contracts promptly when a Memorandum of Sale is received from your estate agent confirming that a buyer has been secured.  It will also reduce the amount of enquiries being raised by the buyer which will, in the long run, save you time and money.

Cost
No additional costs are paid for this service should you decide not to sell or to sell at a later date.  

If you are interested in selling your home and would like to discuss our Fast Track Conveyancing Service, then please contact Samantha Bellia, Residential Property Partner, at sxb@blasermills.co.uk or call us on 0203 814 2020.

*Please note this offer is only applicable with property sales and not purchases.*

Insolvency in the Construction industry – An update

Insolvency in the Construction Industry is on the rise and the impact is being felt in and around Buckinghamshire. Lewis Cohen, Partner and Head of Construction & Engineering, looks at the impact and sets out some key pointers.

South Buckinghamshire is a green and affluent part of the country, but in late October, the Construction & Property sector was rocked by the news that Inland Properties PLC (and various subsidiaries) had appointed Administrators.

Inland, based in Beaconsfield, is a major brownfield developer with a portfolio of successful residential projects across the South-East of England. In addition, the very large and respected M&E Engineering Sub-Contractor, M J Lonsdale Ltd, headquartered in Slough, and Staines based Richardson Roofing (Industrial) Ltd both also appointed Administrators.

In total, according to a report in Construction News, 37 construction related companies appointed Administrators in October 2023 compared with 19 in October 2022, with the year-to-date total at 312 which is a 58 % increase on the same period in 2022.

Whilst less than 500 Administrations is not a significant number, it has to be understood that Administration is only suitable for a small number of insolvent companies and that the vast majority go straight into liquidation.

Far more worrying is a report from Insolvency Practitioners, Begbies Traynor, who run the Red Flag Alert reporting system. They have advised that almost 6,000 construction related companies are close to being insolvent.

The current level of interest rates which has significantly increased the costs of borrowing, and inflation, both in general and in relation to Construction Industry specific materials have made it much harder to finance and build out developments.

In many cases, developments, which will have been conceived pre-Covid and before the significant inflationary pressure on the cost of fuel and the cost of transporting materials as a result of the invasion of Ukraine, are now struggling to complete.

In the last 12 months the team has advised a number of developers and contractors where all these factors have contributed to substantial delays and in some cases stalled projects.

How can I protect my project?

Employers

Employers must be cautious. Gone are the days of a quick turnaround.

First, and perhaps most obvious is do not overreach:

  • Make sure that there is plenty of contingency in the budget;
  • Keep your funder involved at all times; and
  • Set realistic estimates on timescale for completion and the expected profit margins.

Secondly, go out to tender with open eyes:

  • Do not award the contract on price only. If one contractor is 25% cheaper than the others, that should set alarm bells ringing;
  • Do not be scared of asking for a Parent Company Guarantee or a Performance Bond; and
  • In this market, look for contractors who are busy and have a track record.

Thirdly, remain involved during the construction phase:

  • The terms and conditions are to protect both parties.  Too many developers do not adhere to the contract and fail to give appropriate notices – especially Payment Notices;
  • If the Contractor is falling behind or the Contract Price is increasing, you need to step in and take control and not let matters drift; and
  • Ensure your professionals are fully engaged and not delaying the project.

Contractors

For Contractors, the advice is similar.

First, and as with Employers do not over commit:

  • Do you have both the requisite skills and capacity to undertake the Contract?
  • Is the project viable? and
  • What cash reserves do you need if any?

Secondly, be realistic when tendering:

  • Do not discount the tender if you cannot complete the work at the bid price;
  • Make sure the timescale for the project is viable; and
  • Do not be afraid to award to push back on punitive contract terms and in this climate, ask for an agreement on price fluctuations.

Thirdly, remain involved during the construction phase:

  • As above, the terms and conditions are to protect both parties.  Record all instructions in writing and give notices of delay in compliance with the contract;
  • Look ahead and order materials in good time. Likewise review the design in advance and make sure that the design is sufficiently detailed. If not raise this with the design team; and
  • If the Employer falls behind in making payments or issues spurious pay less notices do not be shy in issuing a Notice of Intention to Suspend or commencing an Adjudication.

Insolvency

There are rigorous requirements on Directors to ensure that they are not trading insolvently. This requires proper accounting methods and regular reviews of cash flow and turnover. 

Do not ignore early warnings. If there are any doubts consult your accountant.

Finally, if a contract is in difficulty take legal advice to protect your position and where possible enter into dialogue to negotiate a positive outcome for all involved.

For further information or advice please contact Lewis Cohen on lnc@blasermills.co.uk or call 07956 974 466.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Structuring wealth through a Family Investment Company

A Family Investment Company (“FIC”) is a private company, incorporated under the Companies Act 2006, which is created for the purpose of holding investments for a family and is used as an alternative to family trusts. It is a company which you and your family have shares in.

A FIC allows the founders (usually parents) to create a structure where they can grow and manage the family wealth whilst maintaining control of it and in time, transfer the company to younger generations.

FICs have become popular in the recent past due to the changes in 2006 concerning the taxation of trusts resulting in their reduced popularity. A FIC is generally beneficial for larger investments – typically those over £1 million.

Setting up a FIC

The process of incorporating the FIC is the same as a private company. FICs are normally incorporated with limited liability but it is also possible for them to be created with unlimited liability, if there is sufficient justification to do so. An example of where this might be appropriate is when there is a need to preserve the privacy of the shareholders. Unlimited liability companies are not required to file accounts at Companies House, thereby providing greater privacy to the assets of the investors.

A FIC is usually incorporated with subscriber shares issued at nominal value to individual family members. Typically, there will be varying classes of share with different rights attached, for example voting rights and rights to dividends can be attached to shares only held by the parents so that they can retain control of the FIC. 

Funding a FIC

Once a FIC has been established it can be funded by gifting or loaning assets.

Assets gifted can be made up of property, share portfolios or even cash. Moving non-cash assets into a FIC can crystallise other taxes such as stamp duty and capital gains tax, so each asset needs to be considered on a case-by-case basis.

If the asset is only cash, then it can be loaned to the FIC. This would also allow flexibility to extract funds from a FIC without needing to draw dividends, subject to the FIC having sufficient distributable reserves.

Tax advantages of a FIC

  • The FIC will pay corporation tax at 25% (the reduced rate of 19% may not be claimed by close investment-holding companies and this unlikely to apply to a FIC) compared to up to 45% personal tax payable for individuals.
  • Capital gains made by a FIC will be subject to corporation tax at a rate of 25%, as opposed to capital gains tax.
  • There are generally no inheritance tax liability arising from putting money into the FIC. Nevertheless, there may be future lifetime tax charges on all gifts which could include those within a FIC. However, no such legislation provides for this yet.

If you require any further information or advice, please get in touch with Edward Lee on epl@blasermills.co.uk.

Blaser Mills Law announces three partner promotions

We are delighted to announce the promotions of Samantha Bellia, Victoria Harvey, and Tracy Jones to partnership in the firm.

Samantha Bellia is very well known throughout the region as a top residential conveyancing practitioner. Blaser Mills Law was delighted to recruit her in 2021 and her rapid rise to partnership is testament to the remarkable contribution that she has made to the firm since joining.Sam’s wealth of experience, dedication to client-care, and long-standing strong connections within the local property network enable her to ensure that the process of moving home is made as stress-free as possible.

Victoria Harvey joined Blaser Mills Law in 2017 from a major London firm. Recognised as a leading practitioner in medical negligence and personal injury law, Victoria has spent her career helping people who have suffered major injuries to rebuild their lives – securing tens of millions of pounds in damages for the victims of negligence. Victoria is not only a great lawyer but also has genuine empathy, enabling her to provide a great service while securing exceptional results for her clients.

Tracy Jones is a partner dedicated solely to Responsible Business (often also referred to as ESG or sustainability). To have a partner in this position is almost unique in law firms. Tracy joined Blaser Mills Law in 2017, following two decades of experience as a property lawyer. Having then embraced a new role in business development, she took on becoming a Responsible Business Director in 2021. As a Responsible Business Partner. Tracy leads the firm’s focus on inclusion, diversity, wellbeing, community and the environment. Tracy’s success in this role has played a huge part in shaping Blaser Mills Law’s culture and the firm’s standard-setting approach to these vital issues.

CEO Dave Matthews says: “This is a great trio of promotions. Sam and Vicki are true leaders in their respective fields, and the promotion of Tracy shows our genuine commitment and passion to becoming a truly
responsible business, prioritising the important values that companies should embrace at their core”.

Congratulations to all.

Key takeaways: Chancellor’s Autumn Statement

Chancellor Jeremy Hunt’s recent Autumn Statement outlined tax reductions, permanent business incentives, and a £500 million investment in AI. Economic challenges were acknowledged, but the notable omission of inheritance tax raised concerns among experts. This overview breaks down the key points, giving a glimpse into the UK’s economic direction.

1. Tax reductions for employees and the self-employed:

  • Employees’ contribution rate reduced from 12% to 10%.
  • Self-employed see cuts with the abolition of class 2 contributions and a 1% reduction in class 4 contributions, down to 8% from 9%.

2. Permanent “full expensing” for businesses:

  • Businesses granted a 100% first-year allowance for qualifying plant and machinery assets.

3. £500 million funding for AI innovation:

  • £500 million allocated to establish the UK as an AI powerhouse, supporting innovation centers.

4. Economic outlook and forecasts:

  • OBR predicts a decrease in headline inflation from 4.6% to 2.8% by end-2024, reaching the government’s 2% target in 2025.
  • Economic growth forecasts reduced to 0.7% in 2024 and 1.4% in 2025, down from earlier projections.

5. Inheritance Tax (IHT)

  • IHT nil rate band freeze until April 2028; concerns raised about its long-term impact.
  • Inheritance tax described as the “elephant in the room” and likened to a “polar bear” due to prolonged nil rate band freeze.
  • Expert advises regular checks on IHT status and planning to minimise liability.
  • Individuals can pass on up to £325,000 tax-free; additional £175,000 for the main home passing to a direct descendant.
  • Strategies to reduce IHT include making gifts, utilising trusts, and understanding exemptions and allowances.
  • Specialist advice recommended for trusts and gifts, highlighting the importance of record-keeping and financial planning.

The Autumn Statement focused on tax reductions, business incentives, and AI innovation funding. However, concerns persist about the unaddressed issue of inheritance tax, prompting experts to highlight the need for proactive planning to navigate complexities and minimise liabilities.

Silence isn’t always golden – The limitations on implied contract terms

It comes as no surprise that commercial contracts lawyers repeatedly recommend that contractual arrangements are written into formal agreements. The realities of business though, sometimes mean that not all contracts can or will be fully or properly documented. In certain circumstances, implied terms can be a helpful tool for contracting parties, allowing unwritten provisions to be incorporated into a contract. Some are implied by specific legislation – for example, to grant consumers protection in a sale of goods. Other terms can be implied by a court if they meet the requirements set by case law.

Implied terms typically are used when a contract is silent on a subject. However, courts are also asked to imply a term where contract states something that has created unintended consequences for a party. In these cases, a contract might inadvertently paint a party into a corner and an implied term could solve their problem.

In two recent cases[1], the English courts were asked to consider contracts which contained specific triggers for a payment of a success fee – respectively, on the sale of a property at or above a given price, and on the completion of the sale of a company. In each case, the specific trigger had not been achieved, but the affected party still sought payment, arguing that they had still done significant work and so deserved to be paid. The courts were asked to consider if the payment obligation should be honoured, even though the specific trigger in the contract was not met. This would be done by inserting an implied term that payment is due even without the trigger.

The courts consistently refused to insert the implied term that payment should be honoured. These decisions by the courts reiterate the long-standing principles regarding insertion of implied terms:

  1. implied terms will not be inserted simply to make the contract reasonable or fair and must only be permitted if either:
  1. the implied term is needed to give business efficacy to the contract; or
  2. no implied term should be inserted that contradicts an express term already present in the contract

2. the implied term is so obvious that it goes without saying that it should be included; and

In both cases, the contracts stated specific triggers for payment, so the courts refused to insert an implied term contradicting those provisions and allowing payment without the trigger.

Underpinning the courts’ decisions are two fundamental assumptions that dominate how contracts between commercial parties with comparable bargaining power will always be interpreted:

  1. everything of importance to the parties was captured by them in the contract; and
  2. commercial parties have complete freedom of contract and may strike whatever bargain they choose, and it is not the court’s place to unwind a bad bargain.

The court’s reminder of these fundamental principles highlights that commercial agreements are undeniably best served by being documented clearly in a formal contract. However, businesses should also take care to ensure that what is written in a contract works for them commercially. These cases demonstrate starkly that, while the law can help imply terms, the courts will have little sympathy for a party seeking to go against the written wording of a contract in order to improve its commercial position.

Blaser Mills’ Commercial team are on hand to guide you through the whole journey of your commercial arrangements, from negotiation to reviewing and drafting documentation and licensing of your business’ intellectual property.

For more information, or for help and advice on a range of company commercial matters, please contact our commercial team by calling on 020 3814 2020, emailing us at enquiries@blasermills.co.uk, or filling in our contact form.


[1] Barton v Morris in place of Gwyn Jones (deceased) [2023] UKSC 3, Contra Holdings Ltd v Bamford [2023] EWCA Civ 374

Blaser Mills Law shortlisted for CICM British Credit Awards 2024

We are delighted to announce that we have been shortlisted for the CICM British Credit Awards 2024.

The British Credit Awards recognise the achievements of the most deserving individuals, teams and organisations in the international credit industry.

Our Commercial Recoveries, Litigation & Insolvency team has been named as finalists in the ‘Legal Provider of the Year Award’. A category aimed at legal providers that offer the highest quality service and appropriate solutions to its clients.

Nina Toor, commented: ‘We are very pleased to be shortlisted for the award and to be recognised within the industry reflects on the hard work and dedication from our team’.

Winners will be announced on the 1 February 2024 at the Royal Lancaster of London.

Challenging a Will under the Inheritance Act 1975

There has been much media attention that focuses on cases where adult children have been left little or nothing in a parent’s Will and have sought to challenge this. Series such as ‘The Inheritance’ delve into the family infighting that can occur upon a person’s death.

It is no secret that family relationships can be immensely complicated. Shakespeare wrote in King Lear, “How sharper than a serpent’s tooth it is to have a thankless child”.

However, no matter how bitter the fall out, the truth is that there is nothing to stop a person making a Will that is particularly capricious or downright spiteful.

In light of this, the question many will ask is what can I do if I have been left out of a Will or left a small percentage of an estate? What can I do if I wish to challenge a Will?

The Inheritance Act 1975 (Provision for Family and Dependants) Act 1975 (“the Act”) provides a method whereby a will can be challenged on the grounds that reasonable financial provision has not been made. This should not be confused with whether the person making the will was acting unreasonably.

In this article I will provide a brief overview of the initial steps to take if you wish to challenge a Will on the ground that reasonable financial provision has not been made to you. Nothing in this article should be used as a substitute for proper legal advice.

  1. What is reasonable financial provision?

The question of what constitutes reasonable financial provision depends on a number of factors, such as to what, if any, extent you were financially dependent on the deceased and your relationship to the deceased. The court will expect you to show that you require the reasonable financial provision. The Inheritance Act does not exist simply to give a capital lump sum to anyone making a claim, the court’s starting point is quite the opposite.

2. Who is eligible to bring a claim?

Section 1 of the Act lists those who can bring a claim which includes:

a) the spouse or civil partner of the deceased;

b) former spouse or former civil partner of the deceased, but not one who has formed a subsequent marriage or civil partnership;

c) a child of the deceased;

d) any person (not being a child of the deceased) who in relation to any marriage or civil partnership to which the deceased was at any time a party, or otherwise in relation to any family in which the deceased at any time stood in the role of a parent, was treated by the deceased as a child of the family;

e) any person (not being a person included in the foregoing paragraphs of this subsection) who immediately before the death of the deceased was being maintained, either wholly or partly, by the deceased.

3. How long do you have to bring a claim?

You have just six months from the grant of probate being issued to make a claim for reasonable financial provision from an estate pursuant to the Act. Most people are unaware of this short timeframe for making a claim, especially given that the months immediately following the death of a relative are usually somewhat chaotic. The court will consider applications that are made out of time, however you must have a very good reason for delaying the application and evidence of a strong claim against the estate.

4. Factors the court will consider when deciding your case

When deciding whether you should be granted reasonable financial provision from an estate, the court will make an assessment of any award based on the following criteria, set out in Section 3 (1) of the Act:

a) the financial resources and financial needs which the applicant has or is likely to have in the foreseeable future;

b) the financial resources and financial needs which any other applicant for an order under section 2 of this Act has or is likely to have in the foreseeable future;

c) the financial resources and financial needs which any beneficiary of the estate of the deceased has or is likely to have in the foreseeable future;

d) any obligations and responsibilities which the deceased had towards any applicant for an order under the said section 2 or towards any beneficiary of the estate of the deceased;

e) the size and nature of the net estate of the deceased;

f) any physical or mental disability of any applicant for an order under the said section 2 or any beneficiary of the estate of the deceased;

g) any other matter, including the conduct of the applicant or any other person, which in the circumstances of the case the court may consider relevant.

5. Is court the only option?

Court action should always be the last resort once all other avenues are exhausted. Litigation is prohibitively expensive and even larger estates can be whittled down to nothing through a drawn out court battle.

Whilst a formal court application may be the only option if the parties cannot come to an agreement, parties are encouraged to resolve the claim by way of alternative dispute resolution (ADR). The most common form of ADR in estate disputes is mediation.

Mediation is a process that is far less formal than court proceedings. Parties will agree a bundle of documents and exchange mediation position statements in advance of a day of negotiations either in person or virtually.

Unlike a court hearing where a judge will make a decision on the matter which his binding, at mediation the parties are only bound by what they agree on the day if they sign a formal settlement agreement.

How can Blaser Mills Law’s Private Wealth Disputes Team help?

At Blaser Mills we understand the stress caused by being inadequately catered for in a Will and are here to help. If you would like to discuss instructing us to act for you, please call us on 01494 788 998 and ask to speak to the Private Wealth Disputes Team or get in touch by email at mcw@blasermills.co.uk.

Protecting your family business from divorce

Family businesses are the backbone of the UK economy, contributing significantly to employment and economic growth. However, when a divorce looms, the future of a family business can be at risk. Divorce proceedings can complicate the ownership and management of a family business, potentially leading to its division or even sale. To protect your family business from the impacts of divorce, it is crucial to take proactive measures.

Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate in the Family & Divorce team at Blaser Mills Law, outlines key considerations.

Prenuptial and postnuptial agreements
One of the most effective ways to safeguard a family business from the uncertainties of divorce is through prenuptial or postnuptial agreements. These legal documents outline the distribution of assets, including the family business, in the event of a divorce. While prenuptial agreements are made before marriage, postnuptial agreements can be established after the wedding.

It’s essential to engage experienced family law solicitors to draft a comprehensive and fair agreement that can be regarded by the court.

Shareholder agreements
For family businesses structured as limited companies, shareholder agreements are invaluable tools. These documents specify the rights and obligations of shareholders, including those of family members. They can include provisions that protect the business in the event of divorce, such as requiring the departing spouse to sell their shares to the remaining family members at a fair market value.

Shareholder agreements can help maintain the stability and continuity of the family business by preventing outsiders from acquiring a stake during a divorce.

Protecting non-family shareholders
If your family business has non-family shareholders, it is crucial to protect their interests during divorce proceedings. This can be achieved through buy-sell agreements, which stipulate the terms and conditions for the sale or transfer of shares owned by the divorcing family member. These agreements can help maintain the stability and continuity of the business by ensuring that control remains within the family or is transferred to trusted individuals.

Mediation
In many divorce cases, mediation can be an alternative to lengthy and costly court battles. Engaging in mediation allows both parties to negotiate and reach mutually agreeable terms for the division of assets, including the family business. It can be a more amicable and less disruptive approach, particularly when children or other family members are involved.

Conclusion
Protecting your family business from the impacts of divorce requires careful planning and proactive measures. Prenuptial and postnuptial agreements, shareholder agreements, buy-sell agreements, valuation experts, and alternative dispute resolution methods can all be vital tools in preserving your family business.

It’s essential to seek advice from experienced family law solicitors and financial advisors who understand the complexities of family business ownership and the legal intricacies of divorce. By taking these precautions and seeking professional guidance, you can help secure the future of your family business in the face of marital challenges.

Get in touch with Blaser Mills Law
To speak to our Family & Divorce team please contact Naim on 01494 781356 or email naq@blasermills.co.uk.

The new fixed costs regime

From 1 October 2023 the fixed costs regime in civil litigation has been extended to cover most claims issued on or after this date with a value up to £100,000 (although there are certain specified exceptions).

This note summarises some of the key changes under the new regime.

A New Intermediate Track
The rules have created a new ‘intermediate track’ to which claims can be assigned. There are now a total of four tracks which generally apply as follows (although the Court retains its discretion to allocate claims as it deems appropriate taking account of factors including complexity):

  • Small Claims Track: for claims of a value up to £10,000.
  • Fast Track: for claims of a value between £10,000 to £25,000 where (i) the trial is likely to last for no longer than one day (ii) oral expert evidence is likely to be limited to one expert per party per field and (iii) expert evidence is likely to be limited to two fields.
  • Intermediate Track: for claims of a value between £25,000 to £100,000 where (i) the trial is not likely to exceed three days (ii) oral expert evidence is likely to be limited to two experts per party and (iii) the claim is brought by one claimant against up to two defendants or up two claimants against one defendant.
  • Multi-track: for claims in excess of £100,000 and generally, this will mean that multi-track claims are now the preserve of the High Court. 

The Implementation of ‘Complexity Bands’
Claims allocated to the fast track or intermediate track will also be assigned to a specific complexity band, ranging from 1 to 4. The complexity band will determine the level of recoverable costs, by reference to various tables set out in Practice Direction 45 of the Civil Procedure Rules (CPR) (Cost Tables). The parties can seek to agree a complexity band but the Court retains discretion to assign a claim as it sees fit.

In assigning a complexity band the Court is to have regard to the factors set out at CPR 26.13 these include, amongst others (i) the financial value of the claim (ii) the nature of the remedy sought (iii) the complexity of the facts, law or evidence and (iv) the number of parties. CPR 26.15 and 26.16 provide examples of the claims that may be properly allocated to each complexity band.

General Principles that Apply to Recoverable Costs under the Fixed Costs Regime  
The fixed recoverable costs applicable will depend on the stage at which a claim is settled/discontinued or whether it proceeds to trial.

Each of the Cost Tables provides for a set fixed fee for each stage for cases assigned to complexity band 1. For cases assigned to complexity bands 2 to 4, generally the Cost Tables provide for a fixed fee plus a specified percentage of damages recovered.

For non-money claims, or claims including non-monetary relief, the ‘non-money’ element of the claim will be assigned a specified value for the purpose of calculating fixed costs.

VAT and disbursements are recoverable in addition to the fixed costs specified in the Cost Tables. In the intermediate track a disbursement is recoverable where it is ‘reasonably incurred’.  However, it should be highlighted that disbursements for the instruction of Counsel are included within the fixed costs provided for in the Costs Tables. 

There is provision within the CPR for London weighing which entitles a party to recover an additional 12.5%.

The Cost Tables limit the amount of fees that a successful party may recover from its opponent but it is important to note that they do not restrict the fees that a legal representative may charge. It therefore remains the case that for many cases there will be a significant proportion of unrecoverable cost (and indeed this may in fact increase as a result of the extended fixed cost regime) and this will need to be considered before proceedings are commenced and as litigation progresses.

Cost Budgeting
A significant impact of the extended fixed costs regime is the removal of the requirement for parties to cost budget in claims which are subject to fixed recoverable costs.

Circumstances in which Parties can Claim for Costs Exceeding Fixed Recoverable Costs
CPR 45 confers discretion on the Court and there are limited exceptions in which the Court may depart from the fixed costs regime, including:-

  • CPR 49.5 provides that the Court may consider a claim for an amount of costs which is greater than fixed recoverable costs where there are ‘exceptional circumstances’ making it appropriate to do so.
  • CPR 45.10 provides that the Court may consider a claim for costs which is greater than fixed recoverable costs where a party or witness is vulnerable, that vulnerability has required additional work to be undertaken and by reason of that additional work alone, the claim is for an amount that is at least 20% greater than the amount of fixed recoverable costs.
  • CPR 45.13 where an order for costs is made in favour of/against a party whom the Court considers has behaved unreasonably, the other party may apply for an order that those costs be reduced or increased, respectively, by an amount equal to 50% of the fixed recoverable costs which would otherwise be payable (excluding VAT and disbursements). Unreasonable behaviour is conduct for which there is no reasonable explanation.

Given that the fixed cost regime would apply in the event of an unsuccessful claim for costs exceeding fixed recoverable costs, there are a number of commentators who expect claims of this nature to be made frequently, given that many may view there being limited risk in pursuing such a claim.

Part 36 Offers
A significant impact of the extended fixed costs regime, is the consequences that will flow from offers made pursuant to Part 36 of the CPR. Claimants may be able to recover a 35% uplift on the fixed costs payable from expiry of  the relevant period and the fixed costs payable at the date of judgment, if they obtain a judgment which a Defendant fails to beat. Interestingly, this only applies to Claimants and not a Defendant to a claim.

Contracting Out of the Fixed Costs Regime, Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) and Settlement
It will always be open to the parties to agree contractual mechanisms which seek to increase cost recovery beyond the scope of the fixed cost regime. Making appropriate provision for cost recovery in contractual agreements, prior to the commencement of any dispute, is going to be of critical importance. Parties may also want to consider including mandatory ADR clauses, including arbitration clauses.

As part of any settlement, it will remain open to the parties to agree costs and attempts may be made to agree settlement terms that provide for costs in excess of those provided for under the fixed costs regime.

It is of particular interest to note that the extended fixed recoverable costs regime provides for costs to be payable even if a matter is not issued and parties reach a settlement prior to a claim being issued.

Commentary
The extended fixed costs regime is intended to provide more certainty for parties embarking on litigation. The model is more comparable with the regime implemented in a number of European countries, in particular the German system of fixed recoverable costs.

It is anticipated that generally parties will be able to recover less from an opponent than under the previous system and this will need to be borne in mind as part of the prospects of pursuing any claim and/or defence. It will undoubtedly have an impact on the strategy employed in claims subject to the regime given that costs payable will be triggered at set stages. 

The rules are ripe for satellite litigation to arise on many issues, not least of all track allocation and the assignment of complexity bands. We expect to see a spate of case law over the coming months which will provide further guidance on the application of the new regime.

Why you should have a Will as a business owner

For business owners, the importance of having a Will cannot be overlooked. A Will, often seen as a tool for individuals to distribute their personal assets, is equally crucial in the context of business ownership.

Jonathan Gallop, Partner and Head of Wills, Trusts and Probate, outlines why having a Will is necessary for business owners, and how it can help protect both the business itself and the interests of its shareholders.

Business continuity
One of the main reasons business owners should have a Will is to ensure the continuity of their business in the event of their death. Without a clear plan in place, the business may be thrown into chaos, potentially leading to its collapse. A well-structured Will can designate a successor or outline a plan for the transfer of ownership, ensuring the business can carry on without disruption, should any issues arise.

Protecting family interests
Many business owners have family members who rely on the income generated by the business. Without a Will, the family’s financial security may be at risk, especially if the business has to be sold or liquidated to settle debts and taxes. A well-drafted Will can address these concerns by providing for the family’s financial needs and preserving the business for future generations.

Tax efficiency
An effective Will can also help minimise tax liabilities. Business owners can use estate planning strategies within their Wills to reduce the tax burden on their successors. This may involve taking advantage of tax exemptions or using trusts to distribute assets in a tax-efficient manner. By doing so, business owners can pass on the maximum value of their business to their beneficiaries.

Avoiding legal disputes

In the absence of a Will, disputes among family members, business partners, or shareholders can arise. These disputes can be costly, time-consuming, and damaging to both the business and personal relationships. A well-drafted Will can help prevent such conflicts by outlining the owner’s wishes in a legally binding document.

Choosing the right successor
Selecting the right person to take over the business is a critical decision. Business owners must consider the qualifications, experience, and commitment of that individual. A Will can specify the criteria for choosing a successor or even appoint a specific individual to take on this role, ensuring the business is entrusted to someone capable of preserving and growing it.

Asset protection
In many cases, a business is one of the most valuable assets in an owner’s estate. Without a Will, this asset may be vulnerable to creditors, legal claims, or mismanagement. With a Will in place, the owner can take steps to protect the business from these risks, safeguarding its value for the benefit of the family and shareholders.

Peace of mind
Having a Will offers peace of mind to the business owner, knowing that their legacy and hard work will be preserved and managed according to their wishes. It provides a sense of control and security, reducing the stress and uncertainty that can result from not having a clear plan for the business’s future.

In conclusion, the importance of having a Will as a business owner cannot be stressed enough. A well-structured Will ensures the smooth transition of the business, protects the interests of family and shareholders, and minimises tax liabilities. It also helps prevent legal disputes and safeguards the business from potential threats. Ultimately, having a Will provides peace of mind to the business owner, knowing that their legacy is secure and that their business will continue to thrive even in their absence.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
At Blaser Mills Law we work collaboratively with our clients to create a plan for the future that is tailored to their individual requirements. We know that making a Will is an important moment, so we’ll ensure you clearly understand the process and the implications of any decisions you make.

For any further information please contact our Wills, Trusts and Probate team on 01494 781362 or email privateclient@blasermills.co.uk

Blaser Mills Law wins multiple awards at The ESTAS

We are delighted to announce that our Residential Property team has won multiple awards at The ESTAS Customer Service Awards 2023.

The team have won the following awards:
Silver – Southern High Wycombe
Bronze – Southern Amersham
Best in postcode – HP6
Best in postcode – HP11

The awards, which this year celebrated their 20th birthday, power the ESTAS own customer review platform which recognises the best conveyancers for customer service based on ratings from clients who have been through the whole moving experience with an agent. This year’s results were calculated from over 300,000 customer review ratings.

Jane Hannaway, Partner & Head of Residential Property commented: “We are thrilled to be recognised in this year’s ESTAS. We take our levels of customer service very seriously and have always been very proud of the personal service provided by our team. The awards prove we are delivering what we promise.”

The firm would like to congratulate everyone in the Residential Property team and thank them for all their hard work.

Preventing contractual disputes

We regularly advise on contractual disputes and the repercussions can be costly both financially and to the reputation of a business. Whilst contracts are the foundation of business, both in the UK and internationally, it is not uncommon to be involved in disputes where parties have either an entirely undocumented agreement or a poorly drafted contract.

Whilst any contract can be the subject of a dispute, we set out below some key provisions that parties should consider including in contracts to help prevent a dispute or mitigate the risks should a dispute become unavoidable.

  1. Written Agreement

Whilst not strictly a provision itself, it is critical that parties ensure that contracts are made or documented in writing.

Whilst generally in English law an oral agreement carries just as much weight as a written agreement (there are some exceptions including contracts relating to land), enforcing an oral agreement is often fraught with difficulties as issues arise in evidencing what was agreed between the parties.

It is worthwhile obtaining professional advice when having a contract drawn up as the costs involved pale in comparison to the costs of litigation. A lawyer can assist in navigating potential risks and pitfalls in a contractual arrangement and can help to negotiate more beneficial terms.

2. Pre-Contractual Discussions

At a pre-contract stage it is often advisable to ensure that discussions are ‘subject to contract’ and all correspondence relating to contractual negotiations should generally be marked as such.

As part of any substantive contract parties should consider incorporating ‘entire agreement’ and ‘non-reliance’ clauses. These clauses can be pivotal in clarifying the scope of any contract and provide certainty to the parties, as they prevent parties inadvertently becoming bound by pre-contractual discussions and representations.

3. Variation Clauses

It is often be advisable to include provision for how changes to the agreement should be effectively made. The belt and braces approach is to provide for changes to be made in writing and signed by all parties. This again ensures certainty for the parties and prevents inadvertent amendment to the contract by conduct or oral agreement.

When any variation of a contract is contemplated a wholesale review of the terms of the agreement should be undertaken to consider whether there are any unanticipated consequences that the amendment may have to the remainder of the contract.

4. Consistency and Priority

The need for clarify and consistency in contracts is paramount. Where contracts are based upon multiple documents including side agreements and terms and conditions, these should be reviewed to ensure consistency with the master agreement.

Standard terms and conditions will invariably be used in repeat business situations. However, a policy should be implemented to ensure that these are regularly reviewed to ensure that they take appropriate account of changes within your business.

An additional layer of protection can be implemented by including a ‘priority clause’ within a contract to confirm the documents that should take precedence in the event that there are inconsistencies between clauses. 

5. Termination Clauses

Many contractual disputes centre on termination. Ensuring that a contract clearly details the circumstances in which it can be terminated is pivotal. Parties should consider whether provisions such as rolling contract terms provide them with sufficient control in the event of a need to exit the contract. 

6. Choice of Law & Jurisdiction

Particularly in cross-border contracts there is merit in specifying the law that is to govern the agreement and the Courts that are to have jurisdiction over the contract. For example, parties can elect for an agreement to be subject to the law of England & Wales and the jurisdiction of the English Courts.

This provides certainty for the parties in the event that a dispute does arise, and prevents the need for parties to have a satellite dispute on jurisdictional challenges before a substantive dispute can even be dealt with. It also can have significant implications when it comes to service of proceedings.

7. Dispute Resolution Mechanisms

There are occasions when a dispute is unavoidable. Incorporating a specific dispute resolution mechanism within a contract provides a framework for the parties to follow in the event of a dispute and can help to take some of the heat out of a dispute and illicit a resolution.

In the event that an agreement does not include a specific alternative dispute resolution (ADR) mechanism, parties are still free to engage in ADR, but would need to agree terms for the same.

There is no fixed requirements for a dispute resolution mechanism. However, common provisions include:-

  • A specified period in which parties will enter into good faith negotiations in an attempt to resolve the dispute. This could also include a requirement for a face-to-face settlement meeting.
  • A requirement for the parties to mediate, in which a third-party mediator will look to assist the parties in facilitating a resolution of a dispute. Mediation is non-binding in that the parties must reach a consensual agreement. A mediator will not determine the dispute or make any judgment as to who is right or wrong. We find that parties often have significant success at mediation and it is much more cost effective than substantive Court proceedings.
  • A requirement for the parties to attend arbitration. Generally 1 or 3 arbitrators will be appointed at the agreement of the parties. There no requirement that an arbitrator be legally qualified, it could be another relevant professional, which is why arbitration can be particularly useful in technical disputes. The arbitrator will determine the dispute and this decision is binding on the parties. Arbitration is very flexible and depending on the claim, and the exact process followed, it can be quicker and more cost effective than litigation.

If a contract includes a dispute resolution mechanism this will generally be binding on the parties and in the event that substantive litigation was commenced, in breach of the dispute resolution clause, the responding party may be entitled to raise a challenge to the jurisdiction of the Court to determine the dispute.

Blaser Mills Law announces Chambers UK 2024 results

Blaser Mills Law is delighted to announce its results in the 2024 Chambers UK Legal Directory rankings. Chambers UK is a highly respected legal directory that conducts in-depth research and analysis to identify and rank top lawyers and law firms across the United Kingdom.

New Individual Rankings

Noel Deans, Partner and Head of Employment – Noel Deans is head of the employment team at Blaser Mills Law. He is notable for his work on contentious employment matters and he advises both individual claimants and employers.

Client feedback
“I have relied on his vast expertise in domestic and international employment matters.”
“He gives good advice.”
“He’s strategic, sophisticated and excellent.”

Lucinda Holliday, Partner and Head of Family & Divorce – Lucinda Holliday leads the family and divorce team at Blaser Mills Law. She assists clients with both the financial and child care aspects of divorce and separation, including high net worth cases.

Client feedback
“Lucinda has a really good knowledge of where a sensible settlement lies and doesn’t litigate for the sake of it.”
“I cannot speak highly enough of Lucinda and her professionalism – she has provided excellent counsel and a considered approach tailored to my specific circumstances, dealing with a high-conflict situation with grace and decorum.”
“The service she provides is exceptional.”
“Lucinda is fantastic at the job she does, with quick turnarounds and realistic outcomes when giving advice.”

Ben Langley, Criminal Defence Consultant – Ben’s contributions to the legal field have earned him a well-deserved individual ranking in the directory.

Client feedback
“He has a great attention to detail and is very client friendly.”

Retained Individual Ranking

Edward Lee, Partner and Head of Corporate, has maintained his Band 1 individual ranking.

Client feedback
“Edward is an excellent corporate lawyer who brings a great deal of commerciality as well as technical advice.”
“Edward is a highly astute and competent individual.”
“Edward is a highly competent lawyer who gives good, practical and commercial advice. He helped us navigate multiple challenging scenarios.”

New Departmental Ranking

The Employment team has received a new ranking in the 2024 guide. The team advises a wide range of clients including large corporates, SMEs and individuals. The team is multi-skilled and regularly advises clients on employee disputes, both in and out of court, as well as on day-to-day matters.

Client feedback
“They deliver for my organisation 100% of the time.”
“They are very knowledgeable and helpful from start to finish in an incredibly timely and supportive manner.”
“I always found them to be knowledgeable and able to articulate the process and legislation clearly.”

Retained Departmental Rankings

The departments of Criminal Defence, Family & Divorce, and Real Estate have once again demonstrated their exceptional capabilities and have retained their top rankings in the 2024 guide.

For more detailed information about the rankings and to explore the full directory, please visit the Chambers UK website. Congratulations to all those recognised in the 2024 Chambers UK legal directory and thank you to our clients for their feedback and time.

Blaser Mills Law, UK 2024 | Chambers Profiles

Blaser Mills Law achieves record Legal 5002024 recognition

The Legal 500, one of the UK’s leading legal directories, has announced its much-anticipated results for 2024.  We are delighted to announce that we have achieved rankings in 12 practice areas and 27 of our lawyers have been recommended, achieving our best results to date.

Department rankings
The Legal 500 continues to award Top Tier 1 status to Employment and Wills, Trusts, and Probate.

The Legal 500 describes the Employment team as ‘exceptional’ with ‘vast amount of knowledge’. The team received a glowing testimonial from a former client Excellent service from start to finish, very timely, very knowledgeable, feel very safe in their hands and that they have my best interests at heart’. Another client went on to say ‘From the first call through to resolution, the team is outstanding. The expertise of the team is invaluable…’.

The Wills, Trusts and Probate team have been complimented for their ‘calm, common sense approach’ and the Legal 500 highlights on the fact they are ‘strong across the board’. A client further praises the team on their ‘efficient and pragmatic approachwhilst another client finds them ‘…very approachable.’

New rankings

We also welcome two brand new rankings for 2024 – Corporate & Commercial contracts and Insolvency.

Our Corporate and Commercial teams have been praised by the Legal 500 for their ‘integrity and accuracy’ highlighting Edward Lee as a ‘first-class corporate lawyer’. The team received many positive testimonials from former clients ‘The corporate team were willing to go the extra mile to ensure deals are completed. They are always available to offer advice and support’ ‘Blaser Mills reacts unflinchingly. We feel they have our backs and are dogged and successful in the defence of our interests.’

The Legal 500 highlights on the Insolvency teams ‘very good depth of talent’ naming Jackie Ray as an ‘excellent and client-focused commercial lawyer’. Clients go on to say ‘The firm has excellent strength in terms of service provision and delivery. It has very good depth of talent at all levels of qualification.’

In addition, the following teams have retained their rankings, here is what our clients think:

Commercial Litigation (Tier 2): ‘Blaser Mills is excellent at delivering debt recovery solutions for clients, whether at volume or in one-off cases. They are adept at using a systems-based approach. The firm has excellent strength in terms of service provision and delivery. It has very good depth of talent at all levels of qualification.’

Property Litigation (Tier 4): ‘Blaser Mills Law have, in my experience, always proved to be extremely pro-active in all aspects of property litigation that we have been involved with. They have an extremely responsive team with a clear billing strategy.’

Debt Recovery (Tier 2): ‘We have used this practice for many years and have never had an issue or been disappointed with their service.’

Real Estate & Development (Tier 3).

Family & Divorce (Tier 2): ‘The team are boutique in a sense that they are able to offer clients a bespoke service, clients really appreciate a personal touch point, their solicitor becomes a true emotional connection rather than just a perfunctory service. They are a first-rate team.’

PI & Medical Negligence (Tier 3): ‘The clinical negligence team at Blaser Mills is very user-friendly, knowledgeable and experienced. They always put their clients first and will do everything to secure the best possible result for them.’

Criminal Defence (Tier 4): ‘Blaser Mills Law offers an outstanding service in relation to all criminal matters. Head and shoulders above ordinary high street practices.’

Contentious Trusts and Probate (Tier 4): Any dealings with Blaser Mills have been easy at a very stressful time. The knowledge and the response times were fantastic.

Individual Rankings

Leading Individuals
The Legal 500 announced that James Simpson, Commercial Parnter, and Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate in Family & Divorce, have retained their rankings as Leading Individuals.

Naim’s received a excellent testimonial from a former client ‘Naim is wonderful and is an extremely safe pair of hands. He is very gentle and reassuring with clients but can be as robust as they come in representing them’.

Newly ranked Leading Individual Noel Deans, Partner and Head of Employment, has also received a glowing testimonial ‘Noel Deans is quietly confident, his knowledge of employment law has not gone unnoticed. He presents clear and unambiguous advice. Noel has outstanding knowledge, is calm, and understands the complexity of my case, providing me with a strategy that I endorse.’

In addition, Jonathan Gallop, Partner and Head of Wills, Trusts & Probate, has improved his ranking from Next Generation Partner to Leading Individual…‘Jonathan Gallop is very user friendly and responsive, with a calm, common sense approach’.

Rising Star

Our Rising Star for 2024 is Jade Salton-Brooks, Senior Associate in our Commercial Dispute Resolution team. Clients note Jade is ‘phenomenal’ and ‘truly excellent’ at what she does.

Recommended

Our 2024 Legal 500 rankings announced new individual lawyer recommendations across various practices.

Edward Lee, Partner & Head of Corporate: ‘Edward Lee’s experience is invaluable. Edward is a first class corporate lawyer who brings sensible commercial advice to the deal.’

Colin Smith, Partner & Head of Commercial: ‘Blaser Mills reacts unflinchingly. We feel they have our backs, and are dogged and successful in the defence of our interests.’

Ben Lindsay, Associate in our Employment: ‘Ben Lindsay was always available to provide support, guidance and updates in a timely, professional and helpful manner’.

Nina Toor, Senior Associate and Head of Commercial Recoveries: ‘Nina Toor is a very good junior lawyer, who is well attuned to clients’ needs.’

Olivia Dann, Lawyer Family & Divorce: ‘Olivia Dann handled my divorce and made an emotional process manageable with her gentle nature, understanding, and support in reaching the best possible outcome for me. I cannot thank Olivia enough for her approach in my vulnerable position. She is wise beyond her years and an excellent strategist.’

Juliana Pooler and Sara Davies, Property Litigation:Blaser Mills Law have, in my experience, always proved to be extremely pro-active in all aspects of property litigation that we have been involved with. They have an extremely responsive team with a clear billing strategy.’

The following individuals have retained their recommended status: James Simpson, Noel Deans, Jonathan Gallop, Karen Woodison, Minesh Thakrar, Sara Rendell, Jackie Ray, Jonathan Lilley, Lucinda Holliday, Naim Qureshi, Victoria Harvey, Daria Stepien, Dave Matthews, Ben Langley, Emma Hurrell, Jade Salton-Brooks.

To our full rankings please visit: Blaser Mills Law > High Wycombe > England | The Legal 500 law firm profiles

Congratulations to all of those involved and thank you to our referee’s for their participation.

Service out of the Jurisdiction & Exclusive Jurisdiction Agreements – An Update

The jurisdiction of the English Court’s over a defendant who is domiciled outside of the jurisdiction is governed by the Civil Procedure Rules (“CPR”). Often the permission of the Court will be required to serve a claim out of the jurisdiction.

However, this article concerns circumstances in which the permission of the Court is not required to serve a claim outside of the jurisdiction and more specifically, the mechanism that applies where the parties have submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English Courts.

After ‘Brexit’ the Civil Procedure Rules relating to service out of the jurisdiction were amended. In particular CPR 6.33 (2B) now provides that, without permission of the Court, a claimant may serve a claim form on a defendant outside the jurisdiction where:-

(a)    the court has power to determine the claim under the 2005 Hague Convention and the defendant is a party to an exclusive choice of court agreement conferring jurisdiction on that court within the meaning of Article 3 of the 2005 Hague Convention;

(b)   a contract contains a term to the effect that the court shall have jurisdiction to determine that claim; or

(c)    the claim is in respect of a contract falling within sub-paragraph (b).

The recent case of Pantheon International Advisors Ltd v Co-Diagnostics Inc [2023] EWHC 1984 (KB) is helpful in providing guidance on the requirements of CPR 6.33(2B)(b) which had not been the subject of much judicial scrutiny given its relatively recent introduction.

In order to rely on the jurisdictional gateway under CPR 6.33 (2B)(b) a claimant needs to satisfy the ‘good arguable case test’. Case law which proceeds the introduction of CPR 6.33(2B)(b) remains good law in providing guidance on what is a ‘good arguable case’ (see Brownlie v Four Seasons Holdings Inc [2017] UKSC 80; Goldman Sachs International v Novo Banco SA [2018] UKSC 34; Kaefer Aislamientos v AMS Drilling Mexico [2019] EWCA Civ 10).

The relevant question is whether there is a good arguable case that there is a contract containing a term that the English court has jurisdiction to determine the claim and that the dispute falls within the scope of the jurisdiction agreement. To satisfy this, the claimant must show there is a good arguable case that:

  • the contract in respect of which the claim is made existed and was legally binding;
  • whether such contract contained a valid and effective jurisdiction agreement in favour of the English Courts binding on the defendant; and
  • the dispute falls within the scope of that jurisdiction agreement.

The Court was clear that the wording of CPR 6.33(2B)(b) limits its application to contractual claims and does not extend to claims brought outside of a contract. This is supported by the fact that CPR 6.33(2B)(c) was latterly introduced to bridge this gap.

On the facts of Pantheon the Court found that despite the contract in question having only been signed by the Claimant, there was a good arguable case that there was a binding contact with a valid and effective jurisdiction agreement covering the subject matter of the dispute.

However, Pantheon’s claim was a ‘mixed claim’ and whilst the contract claim fell within the jurisdictional gateway of CPR 6.33(2B)(b), the claim in unjust enrichment, although brought in relation to the contract, did not and at the time of service required the permission of the Court for service out. However, it would now fall within CPR 6.33(2B)(c). This did not prevent the validity of the contractual claim. In the alternative, the Court was prepared to retrospectively permit service out of the jurisdiction in respect of the contractual claim and noted that the interests of justice demanded this.

The case is a salient reminder of the importance of jurisdiction clauses within contracts. This is an issue that parties should regularly consider as relationships develop and contracts are renewed or amended. The judgment is useful in clarifying the application of the ‘good arguable case test’ to the issue of whether the jurisdictional gateway in CPR 6.33(2B)(b) is met. Further it clarifies the scope of CPR 6.33(2B)(b), and highlights the technical issues that can arise on service out and the critical need for a claimant to ensure the correct use of the jurisdictional gateways. However, in the interests of justice, the Court retains a relatively wide discretion to retrospectively permit service out of the jurisdiction if the necessary conditions are met.

Navigating adjudication

Adjudication

Whilst adjudication has been available for a number of decades, legislation passed in 1996 provided statutory legislation as a formal dispute resolution procedure which is available for all construction projects other than contracts for residential homes, unless provided for by the contract itself.

The procedure is fast track. The referring party issues a Notice of Intention to Refer and a nominating body such as the RICS or RIBA appoint an adjudicator. Within seven days of the Notice the referring party then has to issue its claim document (known as a referral) and any supporting information. Subject to an additional 14 days which the adjudicator can seek, the adjudication must be completed within 28 days of issue of the referral.

This process was intended to promote cash flow within the Construction Industry and was particularly targeted at interim payments.

The process has been hijacked, to a large degree, by lawyers and is now seen as a particularly efficient way of addressing disputes, either during the currency of a contract or at the end, replacing what would otherwise have been an expensive piece of litigation or arbitration, especially with respect to extensions of time and final accounts.

There are a set of standard rules governing adjudication, although the parties can vary these by agreement or through the mechanism of the original contract.

The standard rule on costs is that each party bears its own costs and the adjudicator is entitled to award his/her costs against either or both of the parties as appropriate. The normal course of events is for the losing party to pay the adjudicator’s costs in full.

Lewis Cohen is a qualified adjudicator having obtained a diploma in adjudication from the RICS. He has conducted a large number of adjudications and has also written regularly on this area of law.

Our advice when referring an adjudication is to ensure that the referring party is fully prepared.

When defending an adjudication our advice is always to consider whether the adjudication should be defended and if so then to ensure that adequate resources are made available very quickly to prepare a defence in what is often no more than 7-10 days from receipt of the referral.

For further information please contact Lewis Cohen on 07956 964466 or email lnc@blasermills.co.uk.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Key things to consider when choosing your Lasting Power of Attorney

When it comes to planning ahead for the future, one important decision you need to make is choosing your Lasting Power of Attorney (LPA). Under UK law, an LPA is an essential legal document that grants someone the authority to make decisions on your behalf should you become unable to do so.

Our Wills, Trusts and Probate Partner, Minesh Thakrar, outlines key things to consider when appointing your LPA.

Before delving into the process, it’s crucial to understand the concept of the Lasting Power of Attorney. There are two types: Property and Financial Affairs LPA, which grants someone authority over your finances, and Health and Welfare LPA, which empowers someone to make decisions regarding your healthcare and personal welfare. UK law specifies that the person chosen as your LPA must be at least 18 years old and have the mental capacity to make informed decisions.

Key things to consider

Trustworthiness and reliability: Your chosen LPA should be someone you trust, as they will have access to your financial and personal information. Consider their ability to act in your best interests.

Availability: Select someone who is local to you, as they may need to visit you regularly, attend meetings on your behalf, or manage your affairs in person. Accessibility is crucial for a smooth decision-making process.

Compatibility: Ensure your LPA understands your values, beliefs, and preferences regarding healthcare and financial matters. They should be able to make decisions that align with your wishes when you cannot express them yourself.

Financial responsibility: If appointing an LPA for property and financial affairs, choose someone with good financial responsibility. They should be capable of managing your assets, paying bills, and making informed financial decisions in your best interests.

Communication skills: Effective communication is vital between you, your LPA, and other parties involved. Select an individual who can effectively convey your wishes and instructions to medical professionals, financial institutions, and family members.

Seeking legal advice

We advise to seek advice from a legal professional when creating an LPA. Solicitors specialising in Wills, Trusts and Probate can offer valuable guidance throughout the process. They will help you complete the appropriate forms, clarify legal terms, and ensure the document is properly executed.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

At Blaser Mills Law we understand the importance of putting the right planning in place for the future. Our team of Wills, Trusts and Probate solicitors are experts in the field and work with clients to find the best solutions for them and their families.

To speak to one of our Wills, Trusts and Probate solicitors about executing a Lasting Power of Attorney, please contact Minesh Thakrar on 01494781366 or mit@blasermills.co.uk

Healthy Co-Parenting: Exploring the Cafcass Positive Co-Parenting 12-Week Programme

Co-parenting can be challenging, especially when conflict between the parents overshadow the wellbeing of the children who often get caught in the middle. Even parents in a close and loving relationship often wish there was “a manual” to help them parent.

Recognising the need to restore focus on the child and promote positive change, Cafcass (Children and Family Court Advisory and Support Service) has developed the Positive Co-Parenting Programme. This 12-week initiative offers structured sessions for parents involved in family proceedings. By improving communication and encouraging empathy, the programme aims to help parents overcome their conflicts, allowing them to prioritise their children’s best interests.

Understanding the programme

The Positive Co-Parenting Programme, administered by Cafcass, is a comprehensive intervention designed to assist families navigating legal proceedings. The programme’s primary objective is to help parents recognise and address the negative impact of their conflict on their children. Through a series of 12 structured sessions, parents are guided to enhance communication, restore empathy, and develop a child-centric approach to co-parenting. Each parent will attend a separate course so the do not attend with their coparent.

Encouraging positive change

The programme fosters positive change by providing parents with the necessary tools and strategies to navigate the complexities of co-parenting. It empowers parents to step into their children’s shoes, gaining a deeper understanding of the emotional and psychological impact their conflicts can have on their well-being. By fostering empathy and perspective-taking, parents can change their behaviours and make more informed decisions that prioritise the needs and best interests of their children.

What can I expect from the sessions?

The 12-week programme consists of structured sessions facilitated by trained professionals who specialise in family dynamics and conflict resolution. These practitioners, identified as Family Court Advisors (FCAs), guide parents through various topics, including effective communication techniques, managing conflict, and understanding the developmental needs of children. The programme utilises evidence-based practices and restorative principles to foster healthy co-parenting relationships.

Restorative practice principles

Restorative practice principles lie at the heart of the Positive Co-Parenting Programme. By encouraging accountability, empathy, and dialogue, these principles help parents understand the impact of their actions on their children and create opportunities for healing and reconciliation. This approach emphasizes the importance of repairing relationships and rebuilding trust to create a supportive co-parenting environment where children can thrive.

Identifying suitable cases

Cafcass plays a crucial role in identifying cases that would benefit from the Positive Co-Parenting Programme. Through careful assessment, experienced professionals determine which families would benefit most from the programme’s intervention. The selection process involves reviewing the dynamics of the case and the parents’ willingness to engage in the programme. Once identified, the case is presented to the judge for consideration, and if agreed upon, the family is allocated to an FCA trained in delivering the programme.

National availability

The Positive Co-Parenting Programme is available nationwide, ensuring accessibility to families across the country. This broad reach allows Cafcass to provide much-needed support and resources to a wide range of families involved in family proceedings.

The Cafcass Positive Co-Parenting 12-Week Programme stands as a beacon of hope for families embroiled in conflict during separation or divorce. By addressing the underlying issues that hinder healthy co-parenting, the programme empowers parents to put the best interests of their children first. The programme is a testament to the commitment of Cafcass in promoting positive co-parenting and nurturing healthy family relationships during challenging times.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

Blaser Mills Law have solicitors who have extensive experience in resolving disputes between parents whether through mediation, solicitor correspondence or court proceedings.

Their priority is to work with you to identify what is in your child’s best interest and help you put in place arrangements that work for them. They can share with you tool that help communication and have Lucinda Holliday on the team who is a qualified Child Inclusive Mediator who can work with your children to enable their vice to be heard as well. Get in touch with Lucinda on 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

Key things to consider when selling your house

Selling a house can be an overwhelming process, requiring careful planning and consideration to ensure a smooth and legally compliant transaction. There are specific laws and regulations that homeowners must adhere to when selling their property.

Jane Hannaway, Partner and Head of Residential Property, outlines the key things to consider when selling your house, to help you navigate through the process successfully.

Prepare your property for viewings
First impressions matter when selling your house. Make sure your property is well-maintained, tidy, and presentable for viewings. Consider de-cluttering and staging your home to showcase its best features. Being flexible with viewing arrangements to accommodate potential buyers’ schedules can increase the likelihood of attracting serious buyers.

Obtain an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC)
Before you put your property on the market, in the majority of cases, you must have a valid Energy Performance Certificate (EPC). This certificate rates your property’s energy efficiency on a scale from A to G, with A being the most efficient. A certificate is valid for 10 years and you can check if yours is still valid via the EPC register. If you need a new EPC you can either ask your estate agent to arrange an EPC or arrange one directly with a provider. It is a legal requirement to have a valid EPC when selling a property and failing to provide one can lead to delays in the selling process. 

Choose an estate agent
It is often useful to get at least two or three estate agents to value your home. Pricing your property appropriately is crucial to attract potential buyers and increases the chances of a successful sale. Personal recommendations are often valuable as to which estate agents to invite to potentially sell your home. Ask questions as to market trends and recent sales in your area – you are about to ask them to help you with the sale of a valuable asset, so it is important to ensure that you feel confident and comfortable with the agency that you instruct.

Prepare the necessary documentation
Gathering all relevant documents related to your property, including title deeds, planning permission documents, building regulations certificates, service records and guarantees for any work done. Having these documents readily available will assist with completing the paperwork for the conveyancing process.

Appoint a solicitor as early as possible
Navigating the legal aspects of selling a property can feel daunting. We would highly recommend engaging a property solicitor as soon as possible once you have decided to market the property. You will then have time to complete the necessary paperwork so that your solicitor can ensure that they then have everything they need to prepare and issue the contract documentation as soon as you do accept an offer. Issuing a comprehensive contract pack in the first instance often leads to fewer enquiries and a faster transaction overall.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
At Blaser Mills Law we have wide experience in all aspects of residential property work. We understand the importance of working proactively to complete transactions as quickly as possible, taking away the stress from what is supposed to be an exciting time in your life. We pride ourselves on our service levels and the communication that we have with our clients, and agents, so that the sale can be as smooth as possible.

To speak to one of our expert property solicitors, contact Jane Hannaway on jeh@blasermills.co.uk.

Mediation: A powerful tool in Dispute Resolution and Litigation

Mediation was first introduced to the United Kingdom in the early 1990s by a small number of construction solicitors who had encountered it in the USA. It was rapidly adopted by the Technology & Construction Court and also by the Family Court. Over the last 20 years it has become a mainstay of litigation in England and Wales and is central to litigation in the construction industry.

The Pre-Action Protocol issued by the Technology & Construction Court is the only protocol which stipulates that the parties must meet further to the exchange of pre-action correspondence to seek to resolve their differences. Whilst the protocol does not specify use of mediation, most solicitors, including this practice, always seek to make the meeting a mediation.

There are a number of mainstream mediation providers of which CEDR is the best known.

It is our experience that many cases settle through mediation and if not at the mediation itself then often shortly afterwards.

There is no right or wrong time to mediate; if there is willingness to meet and agree then a mediation can take place as early as prior to commencement of proceedings and even as late as during the course of a trial.

Mediations are often binary between two litigants to a dispute but can involve multi-party mediation which is particularly successful where there are a number of parties to a claim. Mediation itself is often likened to ‘shuttle diplomacy’ where the two parties meet with the mediator at the beginning of the day and the mediator then ‘shuttles’ backwards and forwards between the parties trying to reach a compromise.

In addition to mediation there are a number of other forms of ADR including Early Neutral Evaluation where senior representatives of the two parties in dispute meet to review the claim between them, often with the assistance of a third party.

Similarly, the existence of Dispute Review Boards has become increasingly common in large contracts where the contract provides the identity of one or more representatives of each party and one or more external advisors who will form a dispute review board to make recommendations or even a finding.

Arbitration is still considered to be a form of ADR, although it is now much more akin to High Court litigation, the difference being that the court will adopt a rigid timetable whereas arbitration can be much more flexible. Arbitration also differs from the court in that there may be one arbitrator appointed by the parties or the parties may each nominate an arbitrator and the two arbitrators each nominate a third arbitrator to form a three person tribunal.

For further information or advice in regards to mediation please contact Lewis Cohen on 07956 964466 or email lnc@blasermills.co.uk.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Blaser Mills Law ranks in the Chambers High Net Worth Guide 2023

The Chambers High Net Worth (HNW) Guide has announced the results of its latest rankings for 2023. The guide ranks solicitors in specialist areas of law within the High Net Worth category.

Recognised as the most commonly used directory in the legal sector, the Chambers HNW Guide has moved up our Wills, Trust and Probate team to Band 2, having ranked previously for seven consecutive years, and sees the team as a ‘Leading Firm’ in Private Wealth Law , with feedback highlighting that we are a “experts best in the field”.

The guide includes client testimonials for the team:

“They are just so professional, excellent communicators, and I definitely recommend them as legal counsel. They are always quick to respond and instil great confidence in clients.”

“Both the support and guidance I was given by the probate and conveyancing teams has been outstanding. The expertise and professionalism has been excellent.”

Jonathan Gallop, Partner and Head of Wills, Trusts and Probate, has ranked for the second consecutive year as a Band 3 Individual in Private Wealth Law. In the guide Jonathan’s private wealth law clients left him glowing feedback: “We felt as though we were in safe hands. Jonathan and his team were very responsive.”

Senior Associate, Sara Rendell, has been ranked as an ‘Associate to Watch’ in Private Wealth Law for the third year running. The guide describes Sara as a “clear, concise and a balanced communicator. She is an expert in the field and is always willing to listen.”

Jonathan commented: “I am delighted that our team has been recognised as leaders in its field by Chambers, assuring our clients that we provide an excellent level of service and specialist legal advice to High Net Worth individuals.”

For any enquiries related to our Wills, Trusts and Probate team contact us on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Part 36 offers – Tactical weaponry or tool for settlement?

Part 36 of the Civil Procedure Rules (“CPR”) sets out a self-contained procedural ‘code’ for offers made in accordance with its provisions, so called ‘Part 36 offers’.

Part 36 offers can be a useful tactical tool in a Claimant’s armory. If a Defendant fails to ‘beat’ a Part 36 offer at trial, automatic cost consequences flow, which entitle a Claimant to an award of costs, far in excess of any cost order that would be made on a standard basis. The consequences of a Part 36 offer begin from the relevant period, which must be at least 21 days from the date of the Part 36 offer.

CPR 36.17(3) provides that a Court must, unless it considers it unjust to do so, order that the Claimant is entitled to costs on the following basis:-

  • interest on the whole or part of any sum of money awarded, at a rate not exceeding 10% above base rate for the period starting with the date on which the relevant period expired;
  • costs (including any recoverable pre-action costs) on the indemnity basis from the date on which the relevant period expired;
  • interest on those costs at a rate not exceeding 10% above base rate; and
  • an additional amount, which shall not exceed £75,000, calculated either as (i) for awards of up to £500,000, 10% of the amount awarded (ii) for awards in excess of £500,000, 10% of the first £500,000 and 5% of any amount above that figure, subject to the limit of £75,000.

In considering whether it would be ‘unjust’ to make such an order, the Court must take into account all of the circumstances of the case including:-

  • the terms of any Part 36 offer;
  • the stage in the proceedings when any Part 36 offer was made, including in particular how long before the trial started the offer was made;
  • the information available to the parties at the time when the Part 36 offer was made;
  • the conduct of the parties with regard to the giving of or refusal to give information for the purposes of enabling the offer to be made or evaluated; and
  • whether the offer was a genuine attempt to settle the proceedings.

The recent case of Yieldpoint Stable Value Fund, LP v Kimura Commodity Trade Finance Fund Ltd [2023] EWHC 1512 (Comm), has put these considerations in the spotlight.

The Claimant sought payment of a debt in the sum of $5,000,000 plus interest. The Claimant made a Part 36 offer to settle the claim for $4,950,000 including interest which was equivalent to 99% of the principle debt or 96% of the value of the total claim including interest.

The Claimant was successful at trial and the Defendant was ordered to pay $5,000,000 plus interest and costs. Whilst the Defendant failed to beat the Claimant’s Part 36 offer, Stephen Housman KC sitting as High Court Judge held that it would be unjust for the Claimant to benefit from the enhancements under CPR 36.17 on the basis that the Claimant’s Part 36 offer was not a genuine attempt to settle, particularly in the context of it being an ‘all or nothing’ case. He found that “an offer which is a cynical attempt to manipulate the Part 36 regime and apply pressure on an adversary is unlikely to be effective for such purposes”.

Comment

There will always be a tactical element to Part 36 offers. However, in recent cases the Court does appear to be more critical of parties taking tactical steps aimed at achieving greater cost recovery, instead of a genuine attempt at settlement. Yieldpoint provides a salient reminder that Part 36 is intended to reward constructive offers of settlement.

The Judge was clear that his decision should not dissuade parties from using the Part 36 mechanism but rather it should be “an encouragement to make offers at a level not so perilously close to the full value of the claim in a case of such adversarial intensity”. 

The legacy puzzle: Aretha Franklin and the implications of not having a Will

In August 2018, music fans around the world mourned the loss of an iconic figure, Aretha Franklin, often referred to as the “Queen of Soul.” However, amidst the heartfelt tributes and celebration of her remarkable career, a significant aspect of her legacy came into focus. A four-year long dispute over two handwritten Wills, found in her couch, that have only just been legally validated. Aretha Franklin’s failure to establish a comprehensive estate plan serves as a reminder of the importance of having a Will in place to protect future generations.

Minesh Thakrar, Partner in the Wills, Trusts and Probate team at Blaser Mills Law, highlights on the consequences of not having a Will in place.

Intestacy laws in the UK
When an individual dies without a Will in the UK, they are said to have died intestate. In such cases, the intestacy laws of the country determine the distribution of the deceased’s assets. These laws provide a prescribed order of inheritance, typically prioritising spouses, civil partners, and close relatives.

Distribution of assets
In the absence of a Will, the distribution of assets can follow a predetermined hierarchy, which may not necessarily align with the deceased’s wishes. Under UK intestacy rules, if a person is survived by a spouse or civil partner but no children, the entire estate generally goes to the spouse or civil partner. However, if the deceased has children, the spouse or civil partner is entitled to a statutory legacy, plus a portion of the remaining estate. The children then receive the remaining balance.

Legal challenges and delays
The absence of a Will can often lead to legal battles and delays in distributing the estate.  Intestate situations may also trigger disputes and disagreements among family members, resulting in prolonged legal proceedings and potential strain on relationships. These challenges can significantly impede the efficient and timely resolution of the estate.

Inadequate provision for loved ones
Not having a Will in place can result in unintended consequences, including inadequate provision for loved ones. The testator  may have had specific intentions regarding the distribution of their assets, including beneficiaries, charitable donations, or other considerations. Without a Will, their wishes are  left unrecorded, and the distribution of their estate follow the standard intestacy laws. This outcome might not necessarily align with their true intentions or desires.

The importance of estate planning
Aretha Franklin’s case highlights the importance of proactive estate planning. Regardless of one’s wealth or status, having a Will in place allows individuals to ensure their assets are distributed according to their specific wishes. Estate planning enables a more orderly and efficient transfer of assets, minimising the chances of legal disputes, family conflicts, and delays in the probate process.

Working with a professional
To avoid the challenges faced by Aretha Franklin’s estate, consulting with a solicitors or estate planning specialists, is crucial. These professionals possess the necessary expertise to guide individuals through the complexities of Wills, trusts, and other legal requirements. By seeking professional assistance, individuals can ensure that their intentions are accurately documented and legally binding, reducing the risk of ambiguity or misinterpretation.

Get in touch with Blaser Mills Law
At Blaser Mills Law we work collaboratively with our clients to create a plan for the future that is tailored to their individual requirements. We know that making a Will is an important moment, so we’ll ensure you clearly understand the process and the implications of any decisions you make. If you’re ready to start considering your Will, you can contact Minesh by calling on 01494 781366 or emailing mit@blasermills.co.uk.

How to deal with insolvency in divorce proceedings

In the current economic environment, more individuals are likely to find that they are unable to pay their debts or will need to take action to manage their debts.

When faced with financial difficulties where debts have become too difficult to service, individual insolvency proceedings might be unavoidable, and an individual might consider entering into an individual voluntary arrangement (IVA) or might be made bankrupt.

Either way, this could have a significant bearing on a financial settlement if that individual is divorcing or separating from another and could make a divorce or separation more stressful and complicated than it would otherwise have been. In some cases, a financial settlement which has already been agreed, might be affected if one of the parties subsequently becomes bankrupt.

A bankrupt’s ability to raise a mortgage to secure a home will be affected and there is inevitably a conflict between the trustees in bankruptcy and the rights of the bankrupt’s family. The trustee in bankruptcy owes duties to the bankruptcy creditors and is under a duty to realise the assets in the bankrupt’s estate as quickly and effectively as possible.  This could be to the detriment of the bankrupt’s spouse / partner and their children.

In financial remedy proceedings, the court has powers to redistribute assets and income between spouses following the breakdown of the relationship in order to ensure that a fair settlement is reached. When trustees in bankruptcy are involved, this inevitably becomes more complicated.

Depending on whose name the family home is in, issues regarding the occupation of the family home and protecting the home from the trustees in bankruptcy are likely to arise.

Timing is often critical and if there is a possibility of insolvency proceedings, immediate advice should be sought so that both parties have a full understanding of the impact of insolvency proceedings on a financial settlement. Likewise, if the finances have recently been agreed and a party subsequently becomes insolvent, advice should be sought.

A solicitor and licensed insolvency practitioner at Blaser Mills Law commented: “The cost of living crisis and the increase in interest rates is likely to put pressure on the finances of a large number of individuals.  Financial pressures are inevitably exacerbated where a couple divorce or separate as it usually leads to additional costs alongside a dislocation in the family and sometimes a reduction in income.  Where individuals are considering taking action to end a relationship, and one of the parties is facing possible insolvency, it is important to take early advice to secure assets and minimise the impact on the insolvent individual’s partner and their children.

Get in touch
Whether you require assistance during a divorce or separation or need to escalate your matter in relation to insolvency, please get in touch with Lucinda Holliday on ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

Terminating a contract under English Law

Terminating a contract can be a legal minefield and can often become the subject of a dispute. This note summaries some of the key considerations that should be made before steps are taken to terminate a contract.   

Are there grounds to terminate the contract?

It is important to determine the grounds on which you have a right to terminate any contract. Generally, termination rights fall into two distinct categories: (i) contractual termination rights and (ii) common law termination rights.

Contractual Termination Rights

A contract may expressly provide for a party’s termination rights.

The basis for termination and steps to be taken under any such contractual  provisions will be a matter of interpretation of that specific clause.

Common provisions include:-

  • Termination upon expiry of a prescribed notice period: it is essential that any notice of termination is provided in accordance with the requirements of the termination provision and that adequate notice is provided.
  • Termination as a result of breach: provisions of this nature can take various forms and common provisions include termination for ‘material’ or ‘serious’ breach or multiple breaches. Whether the right to terminate has been triggered by the act(s) or omission(s) complained of can often become the subject of a dispute. What constitutes a ‘material’ or ‘serious’ breach is matter specific and will be an issue of interpretation taking into account the contract as a whole and the relevant facts of the case.
  • Force majeure: a force majeure clause usually provides for termination if certain, unforeseeable events occur that prevent or delay a party from performing the contract. The scope of any force majeure clause will be subject to the specific drafting of each contract.
  • Insolvency: contracts will often provide for the right of termination in the event of a party becoming insolvent.

Common Law Termination Rights  

  • Repudiatory breach: a repudiatory breach is a breach that is so serious it goes to the heart of the contract and essentially deprives the innocent party of the benefit of the contract. Where such as a breach as occurred, the innocent party has the right to elect whether to terminate the contract or to affirm it and to claim damages. Whether an act or omission constitutes a repudiatory breach can often be a contentious issue and wrongfully terminating a contract without sufficient basis, can itself by a repudiatory breach.
  • Reasonable notice: where a contract does not provide any express provisions on termination, generally it can be terminated on reasonable notice (although there are some exceptions). What is considered reasonable, is to be determined on the facts at the time notice is provided.  
  • End of term of contract: generally where a contract has been put in place for a specific period of time the contract will automatically expire after the time period has run its course unless the contract provides for automatic renewal or the parties agree to extend the term.
  • Frustration: an unforeseen event that prevents one or more of the parties from performing the contract can give rise to an entitlement to terminate. The  law of frustration is complex and the ‘doctrine of frustration’ only operates in very specific, narrow circumstances.

When can you terminate a contract?

There is no standard timeframe for termination of a contract.

Contractual termination rights will often specify a deadline for termination and in such cases, these deadlines are often strict and if not met, a party can lose its right to terminate. It is important to consider the wording of any express termination clause.

Common law rights of termination usually allow a party a reasonable period to terminate and what is ‘reasonable’ will be determined on the facts. However, a party needs to be cautious that it does not inadvertently affirm the contract, or lose its right to terminate, due to delay and/or its continuing performance of the contract. Therefore, in reality, when matters which could lead to termination arise, it is important that a party acts quickly to investigate its position.  

Some contracts will include dispute resolution provisions which provide an escalatory mechanism for resolving disagreements relating to the contract. In some cases these must be complied with before termiatnion can take effect.

What steps need to be taken to terminate?

Whether a party is terminating in accordance with its contractual or common law rights, it will generally be required to give notice of termination. This will usually specify the grounds for termination and the effective date of termination.

The contract may specify the procedure to be followed, this could include provisions on delivery, form of notice, or the length of any notice, and such terms must be complied with strictly, or the notice could be rendered ineffective.  

What are the implications of terminating a contract?

Termination brings a contract to an end and releases the parties from their continuing obligations. Generally, rights that have accrued at the date of termination are enforceable, for example the right to be paid for services rendered under the contract.

However, there are terms that can survive termination and these will usually be expressly provided for in a written contract. Examples often include confidentiality provisions, return of property, intellectual property provisions and dispute resolution clauses.

Can damages be claimed on termination?

An innocent party’s entitlement to damages, derives from the defaulting party’s breach of the contract.

The contractual measure damages provides for an innocent party to be put into the position it would have been had the contract been performed.

The extent to which damages can be claimed will often be dictated by the contract and any exclusion or limitation clauses that have been agreed by the parties. In the absence of any such clauses, a party may be able to claim both direct and indirect losses. 

What commercial considerations that need to be factored into a decision to terminate?

Termination will undoubtedly have commercial impacts for any business. It is important that these are considered before any termination notice is served. Whether termination is a commercially practical decision, will depend on the business in question and the extent to which projects, deadlines and internal and external stakeholder relationships will be impacted by termination.

It is advisable to prepare for termination for example sourcing an alternative supplier/customer and by ensuring that a uniform approach is taken across a business, so that a decision to terminate is upheld and not inadvertently undermined, and the contract affirmed, by one part of the business continuing to act in accordance with the contract.

In some circumstances, it may be advantageous for a business to look at alternative solutions such as suspension, re-negotiation of terms or alternative dispute resolution.

Blaser Mills Law achieves ‘Standard of Excellence’ to make The ESTAS shortlist for 2023

Our Residential Property team has been recognised for delivering outstanding customer service to its clients by making the shortlist for The ESTAS – the biggest award scheme in the UK residential property industry.

The team’s dedication and excellence have resulted in them receiving prestigious awards with The ESTAS over the past two years.

The team has achieved the ESTAS ‘Standard of Excellence’ based on the service ratings they achieved through their clients submitting reviews to the ESTAS platform. The ESTAS team monitors the service ratings over a 12-month period giving a highly accurate overview of the standard of service that Blaser Mills Law provides to its clients.

The ESTAS Awards honour the best agents, conveyancers, and mortgage brokers in the UK. Their strict verification process ensures reviews are genuine, this year’s shortlist has been calculated following the evaluation of 300,000 customer review ratings.

The winners will be announced in October at the annual ESTAS ceremony held in London. The awards will be presented by the UK’s favourite property expert Phil Spencer in front of 1,200 of the UK’s top property professionals.

Jane Hannaway, Partner and Head of Residential Property added: “We are delighted to have been shortlisted for the Standard of Excellence award again. Our continuing commitment to delivering exceptional client services time after time is at the forefront, and we take great pride in upholding our reputation for providing top-quality legal advice. Our team has worked really hard to meet the demands and ensure smooth property transactions, even during incredibly busy periods. It means a lot to receive the recognition”.

For all your conveyancing needs please email our Residential Property team today on enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Does common law marriage exist in the UK? All you need to know

Common law marriage is a concept that refers to a marriage-like relationship between two people who live together for a certain period of time, without getting married or registering their partnership formally. This type of arrangement is recognised in some countries but not in the UK.

Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate in our Family & Divorce team, explores what this means for couples who choose to live together without getting married.

What is common law marriage?
The exact definition of common law marriage can vary depending on the country which it is recognised, it refers to a relationship in which the couple has not formalised their union through marriage or civil partnership.

In some countries, common law marriage is recognised as a legal status that provides certain rights and protections to the couple.

Is common law marriage recognised in the UK?
The law in the UK means that even if a couple have lived together for many years, they do not have the same legal rights and protections as a married couple. Many people think we do have this system, but when it comes to dividing finances, parental rights and even inheritance rights, the law in the UK largely fails to offer protection if there is a split between a cohabiting, unmarried, couple.

What are the implications of this for couples?#
Some of the key areas where unmarried couples are impacted include:

  • Inheritance rights
  • Pension rights
  • Property rights
  • Parental rights
  • Tax breaks and benefits

What can cohabiting couples do to protect themselves?
Couples who choose to live together without getting married do not have the same legal rights and protections as married or civil-partnered couples. However, there are steps that couples can take to protect themselves and their assets. By taking these steps, couples can ensure that they are prepared for any eventuality and that their rights and interests are protected. Some of these steps include:

Cohabitation agreement
A cohabitation agreement can be drawn up to establish the couple’s rights and responsibilities towards each other in the event of separation. It covers finances, property and what will happen to your children if you were to split or if either partner was to become ill or pass away.

Cohabitation agreements are popular with unmarried couples living together, as they cover all aspects of joint life and the complexities a split can have on this and offer protection for both parties and their assets. Cohabitation agreements can go as far as providing protections similar to marriage, such as providing equal shares of assets or access to pensions.

Make a Will
Couples should each make a Will to ensure that their assets are distributed according to their wishes in the event of their death.

Having a will offers you the chance to address what you would like to happen when you are no longer here, and as well as providing protection for unmarried couples, it can also benefit friends and family.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
If you would like to put a cohabitation agreements in place or discuss your matter further with our Family & Divorce team, contact Naim on 01494 781356 or email naq@blasermills.co.uk.  

Blaser Mills Law advises on over £350m of corporate deals

During the 2022/23 financial year, the Corporate team at Blaser Mills Law successfully completed over 30 deals, with a combined connected value in excess of £350m, from its High Wycombe office alone. Despite the challenging economic climate, the team reinforced its strong position in the market, resulting in a considerable surge in deal volume with a number of deals between £35m to £70m.

The team received instructions from clients across diverse sectors, seeking assistance with their transactional matters. This included the shareholders of national insurance firms, international development consultancies, elite sports agencies, as well as companies specialising in audio-visual media, advanced robotics and agritech. Many of these have comprised an international dimension, either due to the multi-national nature of the operations of the target entity or the location of the buyer and/or their financing.

Headed up by Edward Lee (ranked in Band 1 by Chambers UK), the team regularly advises clients on UK and cross border mergers, acquisitions and disposals as well as private equity investments.

The success comes at a time of strategic expansion and investment in the team over recent years, with key hires from large regional and magic circle firms.

During the current financial year, the team aims to become a major force in the regional, national, and international legal markets, having increased their deal volume and size consistently over the past two years.

Edward Lee, Partner and Head of Corporate commented: ‘Blaser Mills Law is rapidly establishing itself as a preferred firm for Corporate transactions within our key regions. The team had a very successful year by delivering high-quality deals across several sectors. Looking ahead, we are confident deal activity will remain high’.

Publishable deals in 2022:
Blaser Mills Law successfully act on the sale of UKGlobal to Aston Lark – Blaser Mills Law
Blaser Mills Law successfully acts on the sale of Collision Management Systems Ltd to SambaSafety – Blaser Mills Law
Corporate team successfully act on the sale of Ansible Motion to AB Dynamics – Blaser Mills Law
Corporate team successfully act on the sale of Audiologic to EAV Group – Blaser Mills Law

Work closely with our corporate lawyers
For advice on your business’s next phase, please contact Edward Lee on 07850 255907 or email epl@blasermills.co.uk.

Collateral warranties – Why?

When it comes to construction contracts, there are often multiple parties involved, each with their own interests and concerns. An important aspect of these contracts is third party rights, which allow individuals or organisations who are not directly involved in the agreement to enforce certain terms or protections.

In this article we look into third party rights in construction contracts, examining the legislation that governs them, the benefits they offer, and the importance of collateral warranties in ensuring their effectiveness.

Whether you are a contractor, subcontractor, or other party involved in the construction process, understanding third party rights is essential for protecting your interests and ensuring a successful project outcome.

What are third party rights?

Third party rights exist to enable a third party who is not a party to a contract to enforce the terms of the contract.

In construction documents, third party rights are often a set of rights expressly enforceable by a third party and set out in a schedule to a professional appointment or building contract.

Third parties who often acquire third party rights are as follows:

  • Funders;
  • Purchasers; and
  • Tenants who occupy the premises after completion.

Which piece of legislation regulates third party rights?

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 (“the Act”) regulates third party rights in a construction context.

The introductory text to the Act confirms that this is an act to make provision for the enforcement of contractual terms by third parties.

Section 1(1) of the Act allows the parties to a contract to grant a third party the right to enforce a term of that contract. Section 1(1) states as follows:

Subject to the provisions of this Act, a person who is not a party to a contract (a “third party”) may in his own right enforce a term of the contract if-

(a) the contract expressly provides that he may, or

(b) subject to subsection (2), the term purports to confer a benefit on him.

However, it should be highlighted that in accordance with subsection (2):

Subsection (1)(b) does not apply if on a proper construction of the contract it appears that the parties did not intend the term to be enforceable by the third party.

Prior to the introduction of the Act, parties relied on collateral warranties to protect third party rights, and indeed, this practice continues.

Whilst third parties can rely on the Act, it is restrictive. The Act does not allow a third party to be put under an obligation to do something (a burden) and only allows a third party to enforce the benefit of a contractual term.

Furthermore, where third party rights are not to be retained within a construction contract, the parties to the contract exclude the Act.

Why are third party rights required?

If a third party, for example a funder, purchaser or tenant involved in a construction project, suffers loss or damage caused by a party involved in the design or construction of a project, third party rights exist to protect their legal rights.

Defective design or workmanship could cause such parties different losses. An employer is likely to have a contract with the party responsible for a defect; however other parties may not have.

If third party rights are excluded, third parties may be able to obtain rights by:

  • Collateral warranties – these can be used to specifically create a contract between a third party and the professional consultants/contractors; or
  • Assigning the benefit of the construction documents to a third party; or
  • Operation of the law of negligence – regardless of the existence of a contract, a duty of care is owed by those parties involved in a construction project and therefore third party claims in negligence are common.

However, there are various reasons why third parties may choose to rely on third party rights within a contract as opposed to relying on collateral warranties, assignments, or the law of negligence. Some of these reasons are as follows:

  • The construction industry is becoming increasingly familiar with third party rights and in particular how to handle the issues that may arise from the inclusion of third party rights within a construction contract.
  • Third party rights can be incorporated into a contract or a professional appointment and therefore the parties do not have to create additional agreements to establish the rights. Effectively, this saves time and money.
  • The law of negligence only allows for direct consequential loss and does not allow for pure economic loss. Therefore, a third party does not gain the same breadth of rights as those arising under a contract.
  • Often there will be a bar on assignment of the benefit of the construction documents to a third party.

What are collateral warranties and why are they needed?

A collateral warranty is a contract in respect of which an individual involved in a construction project warrants to a third party that it has complied with its obligations pursuant to that project.

Parties may choose to use a collateral warranty rather than relying upon the Act, assignments, or the law of negligence because:

  • The construction industry is historically comfortable with collateral warranties.
  • The Act does not allow a third party to be put under a burden. The Third Party Rights Act 1999 allows a third party to enforce the benefit of the contract terms only.
  • A collateral warranty is a separate contract between the parties to the collateral warranty. It may be enforced, and its benefit may be assigned on the terms set out in the collateral warranty.
  • An assignment of the entire benefit of a construction document means that the assignor could not later make a claim under the construction document.
  • An assignment would only assign the benefit of a construction document to one party. Separate collateral warranties can be given to more than one party.

Overall, it is clear that the protection of third party rights in respect of construction projects is crucial for the following reasons:

They provide security – if something goes wrong on a construction project, a party who has suffered a loss will want to be able to claim its losses directly from the person who caused the loss; and

Claims in negligence are less likely to succeed than claims in contract – the law of negligence does not allow claims for pure economic loss, and therefore parties need to be able to rely on a contract.

If you have any queries about any matters then please do not hesitate to contact Lewis Cohen on 07956964466 or email lnc@blasermills.co.uk.

This article is for general information only and does not constitute legal or professional advice.

Is it time to talk about the finances?

Is the current system for the resolution of financial settlements ‘past its sell-by-date?’ Baroness Deech has suggested that it is and has reintroduced the controversial Divorce (Financial Provision) Bill to the House of Lords. There has been an elephant in the room for a while now suggesting that the judicial discretion facilitated by the Matrimonial Causes Act 1973 has branded London as the ‘divorce capital of the world.’ The flexibility awarded by judicial discretion has encouraged several wealthy spouses to seek a divorce in our jurisdiction, in the hope of a more generous settlement.

Former Miss Malaysia, Pauline Chai filed for divorce from her multimillionaire husband in 2013 and was able to have her divorce heard in the UK as she had moved to Berkhamsted. She was successful in obtaining a settlement of £64 million to be paid by her former spouse. This is not an isolated occurrence and Princess Haya similarly filed for divorce in the UK from Sheikh Mohammed of Dubai.

This trend has not gone unnoticed, and Baroness Shackleton has further criticised the law for being ‘hopelessly out of date’ whilst being very vocal about her desire for reform. The Matrimonial Causes Act 1973 is celebrating its 50th birthday this year and it is not a surprise to many that the common perception of a typical family has undoubtedly changed.

Although the main provocation for this reform is the vast amount of judicial discretion that the financial outcome for both parties hinges on, it is worth acknowledging that this discretion is not entirely unfavourable. It shows that the law understands that there are various functioning family dynamics in our modern society. The current state of the law appreciates that there is no one size fits all approach, and the judges are able to use their discretion to reach a financial conclusion that reflects this. However, with flexibility comes a lack of certainty and it is widely accepted that different judges could reach a range of decisions from the same set of facts.

What are the main changes being proposed in the bill?

  • The reduction of spousal maintenance to maximum period of 5 years.

This would bring the English law more in line with the Scottish system which usually provides a maximum of 3 years for these periodical payments. It would also facilitate the court’s intention to establish a clean break as quickly as possible and encourage independence. It should be noted that there is a caveat that the period should only be exceeded if a party would be likely to ‘suffer serious financial hardship’ and that there are no other means of making a provision. However, this does appear to be a high threshold and it is uncertain at this stage what would meet it. Further to this, setting a precedent of five years could be undesirable for parties who have given up their careers to dedicate their time to raising the children and supporting their partner to fulfil their own career aspirations.

  • Making Pre-Nuptial and Post-Nuptial Agreements formally binding providing certain criteria are met.

This proposal may well be welcomed with open arms following the court’s attitude to marital agreements after the case of Radmacher v Granatino that was decided in the UK Supreme Court in 2010. The current state of the law enables pre and post-nuptial agreements to be considered as part of all of the relevant circumstances of the case when the court goes through the Section 25 factors to divide up the assets on a divorce. This landmark case confirmed that ‘the court should give effect to a nuptial agreement that is freely entered into by each party with a full appreciation of its implications unless in the circumstances prevailing it would not be fair to hold the parties to their agreement.’ However, this has not been cemented in statute to date and this bill aims to do just that.

  • Revising the definition of matrimonial property and limiting the powers of the court to make orders to non-matrimonial property.

The bill aims to clearly identify at the outset what should be regarded as matrimonial property and suggests that primarily, only the assets that fit the definition should be divided between the parties. This approach appears to be methodical and will provide more certainty as to what is in the pot and can be subject to division.

The matter is currently with the Law Commission for review and we await the findings of the Scoping Report that is due to be published in September 2024.

For more information on the contents of this article, please contact Lucinda Holliday on 01494 478603 or via email at ljmh@blasermills.co.uk

Blaser Mills Law raises thousands in aid of the Thames Hospice

As part of our Responsible Business initiative, we are committed to making a difference in our local communities. Those in the local area will know about the fantastic work of the Thames Hospice, and in 2022 our staff chose them to be our very worthy charity partner. Through various fundraising activities organised by the firm, we are delighted to announce that we have raised the fantastic sum of £5,339.

About Thames Hospice

Located on the beautiful Bray Lake, Thames Hospice has served the community for more than 35 years, offering world-class palliative and end of life care and support to people aged over 16 years across East Berkshire and South Buckinghamshire. Thames Hospice rely heavily on donations to allow them to operate, making us keen to support this fantastic organisation.

The money raised by us has already paid for 133 hours of one-to-one counselling sessions for bereaved families.

What we got up to

Throughout the year we managed to host some amazing events and activities. These included:

  • Charity golf day
  • 50 Miles in March walk
  • Charity wellbeing and yoga day
  • 350k steps in October

We also enjoyed numerous office fundraisers, including a delicious bake sale!

A thank you to all of those involved!

We would like to thank all our staff and those who joined us at the events, for helping us to fundraise and raise awareness for the amazing work that the Thames Hospice do. Each activity brought plenty of smiles and laughter as well as a great sense of achievement.

We would also like to thank the Thames Hospice for their support throughout the year. The team supported all our events, allowing us to meet some great individuals along the way.

“Everyone we met at Blaser Mills was so keen to get involved and help raise funds.  The golf and yoga days were great opportunities to meet staff and clients and helped to raise awareness in the community about the support we offer to families dealing with a bereavement. Thank you.” Jane Symmons, Major Gifts Associate Director.

To be continued

We look forward to continuing our relationship with Thames Hospice and already have some initiatives planned for the near future.

To find out more about Blaser Mills Law’s Responsible Business initiatives, click here.  

When may a disclosure at work be “protected”?

Issues occur at work and are often of a personal or commercial nature, which are unlikely to be protected.  However, sometimes, they may affect others and possibly be safeguarded.

Certain disclosures of information at work may qualify the worker for protection against resulting detrimental treatment. 

What is a “qualifying disclosure”?

Broadly speaking, a qualifying disclosure is a disclosure of information which, in the reasonable belief of the worker, is made in the public interest and tends to show any of the following types of wrongdoing or failure:

  • Criminal offences.
  • Breach of any legal obligation.
  • Miscarriages of justice.
  • Danger to the health and safety of any individual.
  • Damage to the environment.
  • The deliberate concealing of information about any of the above.

The wrongdoing can be past, present, prospective, or merely alleged.

What is a “disclosure”?

The legislation is unclear about what amounts to a disclosure of information.  However, case law shows that the disclosure can be made in writing or verbally but must convey facts (and not mere allegations of wrongdoing).   

Is the disclosure “in the public interest”?

The relevant test is whether the worker had a reasonable belief that the disclosure was made in the public interest. In practice, this issue is fact sensitive.

When considering whether the worker had a reasonable belief, the Tribunal will consider: the size of the group whose interests the disclosure relates to; the nature of the interests in question; the extent to which those interests are affected by the wrongdoing disclosed; the nature of the alleged wrongdoing disclosed; and the identity of the alleged wrongdoer.    

What is a detriment?

The worker will suffer a detriment if they have been disadvantaged at work in the view of a reasonable worker because they have made a qualifying disclosure.

Interim relief

If the detriment was dismissal, then the aggrieved employee may apply, swiftly, for “Interim Relief”. This is an application which, if successful, will provide the employee with an immediate remedy of “reinstatement” or “re-engagement” or, if the employer disagrees with that, an order for “continuation of the employment contract” to continue their employment (or pay) to the final hearing. 

Our employment law specialists prepare whistleblowing policies, provide associated advice and representation in such claims. For further information or advice please get in touch with our employment team today.

Legal Aid widened to help more families in Complex Child Protection Proceedings

Adam Smith, Senior Associate, discusses the recent changes in non-means and non-merits tested Legal Aid Funding for Public Family Law (Child Care and Child Protection Proceedings).

Last month, the Legal Aid Agency has brought more people into scope of Legal Aid for the first time in a significant period – to cover respondents to freestanding applications for Placement Orders, and applications for final Adoption Orders.

It has always been the case that when a Local Authority Children (Social Services) Department brought an application for a Care or Supervision Order in respect of a child, that child’s parents and anybody with parental responsibility for the child would be entitled to non-means and non-merits tested Legal Aid.  However, this has now been extended to situations where:-

  • The parents are opposing the making of an order that their child should be ‘put up’ for adoption (applications for a Placement Order)
  • They are opposing (or seeking permission to oppose) the making of an Adoption Order itself, when an application is brought by the adoptive parents to make the adoption final. 

Often, Local Authorities applied for Placement Orders and Care Orders at the same time, so legal aid funding could cover both. However, the new funding will cover situations where a child that is already under a Care Order might have their Care Plan changed to become “adoption” later down the line.  It will also give parents one last opportunity to explain to the Court why their child should not be adopted at the point that the final adoption application is made.

This Legal Aid funding always used to be subject to a strict means and merits test but will now be available to anybody, on a non-means and non-merits tested basis.  In short, it does not matter how much money you have or how good or bad the case is, you should be able to get free legal representation if you oppose the application. 

There is a pending increase in Legal Aid funding concerning Special Guardianship as well as for parents who are trying to oppose the making of a Special Guardianship Order.  However, these changes will not come online until May.

If you would like to discuss whether your case may be eligible for non-means and non-merit tested Legal Aid, under the new rules or the old ones, then please do contact Adam Smith on ats@blasermills.co.uk, 01923 725013 to explore your options.

You can read the Legal Aid Agency update here.

Blaser Mills Law welcomes new Construction partner

Blaser Mills Law is delighted to welcome Lewis Cohen as Partner in the Dispute Resolution team. With over 25 years of experience in the field of Construction & Engineering, Lewis brings extensive expertise and a proven track record of success to the firm.

Lewis acts for a range of commercial developers, residential homeowners, main contractors, and specialist sub-contractors as well as a number of consultants including architects, engineers and interior designers. Having previously worked in City firms, his clients are predominantly based in London and the Home Counties.

Lewis trained as a specialist litigator undertaking High Court Litigation, Adjudication, Mediation, and International Arbitration. He obtained an MSC from Kings College London in Construction Law and Arbitration and a Diploma in Adjudication from the RICS. He is also recognised as a specialist in the field of Construction Insolvency.

In his new role at Blaser Mills Law, Lewis will be responsible for leading a specialist unit to advise on all matters related to Construction & Engineering. He is comfortable drafting and negotiating contracts and is often called upon to troubleshoot difficult projects.

Lewis’s broad range of experience and deep knowledge of the industry will allow us to better service the requirements of our clients.  

Jonathan Lilley, Executive Chairman and Head of Property Litigation commented: “Lewis is well known to the firm, having acted alongside us for clients over a number of years. His knowledge and experience in the Construction industry is second to none and his appointment brings additional strength in depth to our property litigation team”.

Lewis Cohen added: “I am thrilled to join Blaser Mills Law and look forward to working alongside the excellent team to expand the department further”.

Blaser Mills Law very much welcomes Lewis, and we look forward to him making a positive contribution to the partnership.

If you would like to speak with Lewis on any Construction matters, please get in touch on 07956 964466 or email lnc@blasermills.co.uk.

Restrictive covenants: Distinction between ‘dealing’ and ‘solicitation’

Restrictive covenants in employment contracts are included for business protection.  An employer holds certain legitimate business interests, and the confidentiality clauses of the contract may not provide adequate protection for those interests.

Such terms will only be enforceable if they provide no more than reasonable protection for the specified legitimate business interest.

Today it is more typical to include a form of non-dealing requirement, in the hope or expectation of preventing the departing employing from any form of business dealings with specified customers, colleagues or suppliers.   Although, such a requirement may sometimes be hard to enforce due to those reasonableness principles.

A non-solicitation requirement is typically included, seeking to prevent the former employee from encouraging those people and businesses to follow them in their new pursuit.

There is sometimes confusion about whether a non-solicitation obligation may bite if the customer, colleague or supplier first contacts the former employee.   In this regard, the case authority of Croesus Financial Services Ltd v Bradshaw and another [2013] EWHC (QB) provides helpful clarity (at paragraph 102):

102.  It is often assumed that there is no solicitation where it is the customer who first contacts the ex-employee. From his evidence, this seems to have been the basis on which Matthew Bradshaw proceeded. However, this is not necessarily the case and although the question who made the first contact is relevant, all the circumstances surrounding that contact must be considered, each case depending on its own facts. There is no general rule that wherever a customer initiates contact, an individual can respond and even go so far as making a presentation without breaching a prohibition on solicitation as Ms Stone submitted. Rather, these are questions of fact and degree. There is obviously a distinction to be drawn between solicitation and dealing with; accordingly, a critical element that distinguishes the two is that solicitation requires persuasion or encouragement of clients to transfer their business.

Our employment law specialists regularly advise on restrictive covenants, in the context of their drafting and enforcement.

Break clauses in commercial property leases

What is it?

In simple terms, it is a “get-out” card for the party exercising it. A means of exiting the lease prior to the official end of the term. If exercised correctly, the lease is broken and both parties walk away, free of their obligations under the lease.

Who does it benefit?

It benefits the party exercising it as they no longer need to continue to fulfill their obligations under the lease for the duration of the term. Particularly useful, for example, where a tenant is no longer able to pay the rent due to poor business. In such a scenario, they may exit early by terminating the lease on the break date (discussed further below) as opposed to being continually obliged to pay rent for the duration of the term of the lease.

Conversely, it could benefit a landlord in an instance where they have been offered a much higher rent by a new and financially more viable tenant, who wishes to take the premises sooner than the end date of the existing tenancy. The landlord may then exercise its right to break the lease on the break date thereby taking back possession of its property sooner than the end date, so that it can let it out at a higher rate, to a more financially viable tenant.

How does it come into play?

Best practice is to negotiate such a clause when negotiating other terms of the lease. It can be applicable to only the landlord, only the tenant or both parties. It can come into play at any stage of the lease term as agreed between the parties and there can be more than one break.

Often, conditions are attached to a break clause where this is exercisable by the tenant, such as, all rents must be up-to-date and the tenant must provide vacant possession upon breaking. Care must be taken when reviewing such conditions whether acting for the landlord or tenant.

These conditions should not be taken lightly and should always be reviewed by an expert as some conditions may be drafted deliberately widely, leaving the complying party in a vulnerable position where compliance can be subjective. For example, a condition may be that the tenant must have complied with “all its obligations under the lease”. A landlord not wanting the tenant to break may rely on this condition and refuse to allow the tenant to break due to it not having complied with the clause that states “the windows to be cleaned as often as necessary”. Whether or not a window is clean is subjective but this shows how something as simple as cleaning a window, can become the deciding factor as to whether or not a tenant may effectively exercise their right to break.

Types of Break Clauses

A break clause may sometimes be exercised at any time after a certain date.  This is often referred to as “rolling break”.

Quite often, a break may only be exercised on a fixed date or dates.  This is often referred to as a “fixed break”. 

Implications of getting it wrong

Careful consideration should be given when drafting and/or reviewing such clauses as an error can lead to a break clause being invalid resulting in the party being unable to exit at the desired sooner date.

It is also imperative, that a notice to exercise a break clause is drafted correctly and served in the correct time and manner, in order for it to be validly served.

The case of Siemens Hearing Instruments Ltd v Friends Life Ltd [2014] 2 P&CR 5 illustrates just how important it is to word the break notice in the required explicit form.  In this case, the Court held that the break notice served, was invalid as it failed to express the exact wording of the break clause and should have explicitly stated that it was served under section 4(2) of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954.

Today’s market

Given the uncertainty in today’s property market, it may be more essential that ever before to ensure you’ve got this clause right.  Exiting at precisely the right time may determine whether or not your business will survive!

What is a Declaration of Trust and do I need one?

With house prices and interest rates at an ultimate high, individuals and couples are looking for alternative arrangements when it comes to purchasing a property. For many, this will include buying with partners or friends, whilst others may seek financial support from parents and relatives.

What is a Declaration of Trust?
A declaration of trust is a legally binding document that records the financial arrangements between joint property owners and anyone else with financial interest in the property.

A declaration of trust is usually made at the time of buying the property. Once this document is in place, all parties will know exactly where they stand if the property is sold, or if one person wants to be bought out in the future.

If there is no declaration of trust in place, it becomes difficult to tell who is entitled to what and can often cause stressful situations, damage to relationships and potentially costly litigation.

When is a Declaration of Trust required?
A declaration of trust can be required in various circumstances, for example:
If you’ve bought a property with someone else: For couples that buy a property together, a declaration of trust can clearly set out everyone’s financial contribution. In the event of the property being sold, a relationship breaking down, or the death of one of the parties, the entitlement and share of equity is clearly defined.
If you’ve received financial help: If the ‘Bank of Mum and Dad’ or any other individual has supported the purchase of the property, they may eventually want their investment back. This can be clearly recorded.

What should be included?
As every situation is different, a qualified solicitor will help to tailor the declaration of trust to your requirements.

The document should include the following details:

• How much each party has financially contributed to the deposit.
• If there is a mortgage, how much each party will be contributing to the monthly payments and other outgoings.
• If the property is rented out, how the rent should be divided.
• If the property is sold, how the net proceeds should be divided.
• An agreed way of valuing the property.

Can I change the Declaration of Trust once it’s in place?
As your situation changes you may need to update your declaration of trust. This could be done via a deed of variation which refers to the existing declaration and adds the new clauses you need.

Note: Consent will be required from all parties involved.

What happens if you get married?
Many cohabiting couples will get married. Whilst your declaration of trust will usually still stand, in the event of a divorce the provisions of the Matrimonial Causes Act 1973 will apply. We would recommend considering a pre-nuptial or post-nuptial agreement to capture the details of what should happen if you were to separate or divorce. You should also review your Will.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
Declarations of trust can seem complicated, but it is an extremely useful way of protecting funds and providing certainty in the future. At Blaser Mills Law we have extensive experience with all types of trusts and will help you decide on the most efficient and secure planning for your estate.

For further information or advice, please contact the Wills, Trusts, and Probate team at Blaser Mills Law on: 01494 781362 or by email at privateclient@blasermills.co.uk.

No more week: Coercive control and the law

The 5-12th March 2023 marks ‘No More Week’. The campaign seeks to unite and strengthen a diverse community of members of the public and organisations nationwide to actively take a stand against domestic abuse and sexual violence. Domestic abuse isn’t always physical and can often come in the form of coercive control.

What is coercive control?
Coercive control is when a person you are connected with, continues to behave in a way which makes you feel controlled, isolated or frightened. Coercive control can be difficult to recognise and sadly can often lead to physical violence. It’s also a criminal offence under the Section 76 Serious Crime Act 2015.

The following types of behaviours are common examples of coercive control (not exhaustive):

  • Isolating you from your support system
  • Monitoring your activity throughout the day
  • Controlling financial spend and assets
  • Denying you freedom and autonomy
  • Gaslighting
  • Any form of assault or threatening behaviour
  • Controlling aspects of your health
  • Humiliation and intimidation
  • Threatening your children
  • Sexual coercion

How our Family & Divorce team can help

If allegations of coercive control arise as part of the proceedings, the victim and abuser may find they have to deal with family and criminal courts. These types of cases often involve both family and criminal lawyers as some behaviour can be classed as a criminal offence.

Our family lawyers can help you to break free from the coercive control and regain your independence and can assist you in securing legal protection against an abusive partner. They have experience of litigating with people who exhibit tendencies of coercive control or narcissistic personality disorder (NPD) and can support you through this process effectively because of this.

Our team will approach your case in confidence and help to minimise any further distress in what is already a difficult situation. To speak to a member of the team in confidence please call Lucinda Holliday on 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk

Free confidential support in the UK

Safe Spaces are open in Boots, TSB Banks, Superdrug pharmacies, Morrisons & Well pharmacies & many independent pharmacies across the UK. If you’re experiencing domestic abuse, you can use Safe Spaces to call a helpline, support service or loved one.

Refuge’s National Domestic Abuse Helpline : 0808 2000 247

The Men’s Advice Line run by Respect is a confidential helpline specifically for male victims: 0808 801 0327

UKSAYSNOMORE | Together we can end DV & SA

EMI options and board discretion: HMRC guidance

HM Revenue and Customs (‘HMRC’) published guidance on the inclusion and use of board discretion in Enterprise Management Incentive (‘EMI’) share option plans. If board discretion provisions are not carefully drafted, these may affect tax treatment of EMI options. Our Corporate & Commercial team summarises the key points which are of particular importance to our growth clients.

In the context of a share plan, the exercise of discretion usually involves the board of directors using their judgement to come to a decision. For instance, this may include deciding to treat a departing employee as a ‘good leaver’ or deciding to increase the number of vested shares on an exit (known as an ‘acceleration’).

To avoid adverse tax consequences, board discretion must be clearly set out when the option is granted. HMRC treats any amendment to an EMI option agreement or use of discretion to create a new right of exercise, introduce a new board discretion, or change the exercise date, as the grant of a new option – depending on the circumstances, this may lead to the loss of some or all EMI tax benefits unless any improvements to the employee’s rights are limited.

A decision by a company’s board to exercise discretion may result in the share option being treated as released and regranted. This may impact tax benefits that the EMI Scheme is designed to deliver.

EMI regulations set out three ‘fundamental’ terms which are set out in a written EMI option agreement (‘Terms’):

  • the number of shares under option;
  • the exercise price per share; and
  • when the option may be exercised.

An exercise of a board discretion that results in an amendment to any of the Terms is likely to result in the option being treated as released and regranted and the tax benefits lost – unless the amendment has ‘minimal’ effect.

The following provides a brief overview of HMRC’s guidance.

  • for ‘exit-only plans’ (such as an IPO, sale or other change of control), there may be a loss in tax benefits where there is a general board discretion i.e., the discretion is not tied to any particular event and there is a general ability for the directors to determine an option is exercisable at any time and under any circumstances that the board chooses;
  • for ‘non-exit only’ plans, provided that the board’s discretion is not to bring forward the option exercise date determined at the outset and there are adequate provisions in place, if the board chooses to accelerate the extent to which an option may be exercised (i.e. its vesting) this should not affect the option’s tax treatment; or
  • for ‘non-exit only plus performance condition’ plans, to vary or waive a performance condition should not affect the option’s tax treatment, provided there are adequate good leaver provisions set out from the outset and this is done in appropriate circumstances only.

HMRC will treat any amendment to an EMI option agreement or use of discretion to create a new right of exercise, introduce a new board discretion, or change the exercise date, as the grant of a new option (which, depending on the circumstances, could lead to the loss of some or all EMI tax advantages) unless any improvements to the employee’s rights are limited.

If there is uncertainty, professional advice should be sought when directors exercise a discretion in an EMI share option plan.

Divorce and financial settlement tax considerations

When a relationship breaks down there is an enormous impact on the individuals involved. For many people, the priority is the children or how they are going to be able to afford to put a roof over their heads after the separation.

When caught up in such significant change, it is easy to overlook some of the less obvious effects of the relationship breakdown which could have a substantial financial impact. Although most of us are aware that “the only two certainties in life are death and taxes” often tax issues relating to the breakdown of the relationship are overlooked.

When considering options for settlement it is vital that you understand the tax implications of the options available to you. Money drawn from a business is likely to incur tax liabilities as will the encashment of shares and some investments. In many cases couples who own second homes together or individually need to decide whether these should be sold or transferred from one or another to allow them to rehouse. As with any disposal, there are likely to be capital gains tax implications for selling a property or transferring it. These need to be considered when looking at a divorce settlement or when leaving a cohabiting relationship.

Even the sale or transfer of the family home can have tax implications, particularly if one of the owners has left the family home for some time and regardless of whether they have bought another home. Although tax might be due on the transfer of assets, there is relief that might be available in some cases and
you need to be aware of this. The timing of the transfer or sale of the property can also be critical.

The current rules regarding taxation are due to change as a result of the proposed new revisions which will be introduced in the Finance Bill 2022/2023. These changes are due to take effect in April 2023 which could benefit individuals but again, timing is essential.

Although solicitors are not tax experts, it is important that your solicitor highlights any tax issues and refers you to specialist tax advisers, if they feel it is necessary, so that you are not adversely affected by tax and that any tax liabilities are considered in a financial settlement.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

The Family & Divorce team at Blaser Mills Law can highlight these issues and can signpost you to experts who can provide additional support if needed. For further information or advice please get please do not hesitate to contact Lucinda Holliday on 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

The European Super League

The European Super League – Part 2

Introduction

The idea of a super league competition in Europe has been floated around in one guise or another since 1968. However, in April 2021 a new European Super League (“ESL”) was announced but almost immediately collapsed amidst widespread condemnation from rival clubs, domestic leagues, and European politicians. Six English Premier League teams signed up to the ESL — Arsenal, Chelsea, Liverpool, Manchester City, Manchester United and Tottenham Hotspur.

Fast forward to 2023, the ESL has reared its head again this time with a new look proposal being announced by A22 Sports Management.

New Proposals

A22 Sports Management (“A22”), which is the company created by Barcelona, Real Madrid and Juventus to sponsor and push through legislation for the ESL, has released its 10-point principles for the competition.

Under the revamped system, the new Super League (“SL”) will consist of the following:

  • Up to 80 teams
  • Multi-divisional format
  • No permanent members
  • Minimum of 14 matches per season

It has been reported that A22 has consulted with 50 clubs across Europe since October 2022 and, as a result, has formed 10 principles that underpin plans for the new look SL.[1]

The new proposal consists of 60 to 80 teams, with no permanent members (in contrast to the 2021 concept) and will instead be based on sporting performance, avoiding the controversial closed league system as was highly criticised under the previous concept. The clubs would continue to play in their respective domestic leagues, however, would also compete in the SL for a minimum of 14 times per season. [2]

A22 have been at the forefront of the challenge to UEFA and FIFA’s right to block the formation of the ESL and, in doing so, also sanction the clubs who join the breakaway league. They (A22) have suggested that the governing bodies are abusing a dominant position under EU competition law.

Legal Position

The European Court of Justice (“ECJ”) is expected to issue its final decision on the case later this year. In December, however, the Advocate General, Athanasios Rantos (“Rantos”), provided a non-binding opinion on the case, which states that the regulations permitting the international governing bodies to prevent the establishment of new leagues must comply with EU law.[3] He added that sports governing bodies such as UEFA do not infringe EU competition rules by putting in place pre-authorisation systems ensuring all competitions respect common overarching standards.

The essentially closed character of the ESL made it incompatible with the principles of sporting merit and open competitions as enshrined in UEFA’s statutes. The ESL must have known what would lie ahead, as it took the step of initiating proceedings against FIFA and UEFA before a Madrid Court in parallel to the announcement of the project. The purpose of these proceedings was to avoid such constraints and prevent any potential disciplinary actions against the founding clubs.

Rantos’ opinion clearly hints at the legitimate, necessary, and proportionate character of UEFA’s procedure, and of its response in the face of the ESL project announcement.

Conclusion

Rantos’ opinion marks the last step of the preliminary ruling proceedings before the ECJ delivers its judgment answering the questions referred by the Madrid Court.

The new SL is undoubtedly a direct competitor to UEFA; even more so now as the proposed format is extremely similar to the new format of the Champions League that is scheduled to start during the 2024/25 season.

It goes without saying that the outcome of the ECJ case is eagerly anticipated and will undoubtedly have huge implications on the progression of the new SL.


[1] European Super League: Fresh plans for 80-team competition announced by chief executive Bernd Reichart | Football News | Sky Sports

[2] The Super League’s return explained: How it would work, the response — and what happens next – The Athletic

[3] European Super League: Fresh plans for 80-team competition announced by chief executive Bernd Reichart | Football News | Sky Sports

Football Governance: Independent Regulator

The plan for a regulator, recommended by a fan-led review (the “Review”) last year, has been confirmed by the UK government. Preventing historic clubs from going out of business is one of the aims, as well as giving fans greater input and a new owners’ and directors’ test.

This White Paper builds on those recommendations and outlines a comprehensive plan to introduce an independent regulator (“Regulator”) for English football clubs. In theory, it will be a Regulator that is free from the vested and conflicting interests that have hindered progress in the past, and one that makes sure football works for its fans and communities.

The main purposes of the proposed Regulator will be:

  • Stopping English clubs from joining closed-shop competitions, which are judged to harm the domestic game.
  • Preventing a repeat of financial failings seen at numerous clubs, notably the collapses of Bury and Macclesfield.
  • Introducing a more stringent owners’ and directors’ test to protect clubs and fans.
  • Giving fans the power to stop owners from changing a club’s name, badge and traditional kit colours.
  • Ensuring a fair distribution of money filters down the English football pyramid from the Premier League.

Issues

In short, the government believes there is an unacceptably high and growing risk of financial failure among football clubs throughout English men’s professional football. This, and the risk of breakaway competitions, threatens the stability of the football pyramid. Many clubs lack resilience against financial ‘shocks’, as Chelsea and Derby have highlighted.

Furthermore, breakaway competitions represent another potential shock to the market. Proposals like the European Super League would exclusively benefit a small number of clubs at the expense of others.

Intervention

Fans

The government believes that clubs play a pivotal role in many communities. Which is true. Fans of these clubs have deep emotional and social connections to their club. In economic terms, this means when their club ceases to exist, they will not substitute for an alternative ‘supplier’.

Communities

Football clubs are community assets with cultural heritage value. In addition to the direct and indirect economic benefits they deliver to local areas, they benefit the local and wider society.

Government

The Football Creditors Rule also affects HMRC. HMRC estimates that administrations at EFL clubs have contributed to the UK Government being unable to collect nearly £30 million in unpaid taxes since 2019.

Football clubs are more community and heritage assets than typical businesses, with fans rather than consumers. As such, football clubs should not be left to fail. However, if football continues on its current trajectory there is a material risk of further and extensive financial failures.

Industry self-regulation

Many problems in football are not new. However, despite repeated calls for reform, neither clubs nor leagues have taken the necessary actions to transform. As such, the government is of the view that football alone warrants intervention.

Independent regulator

Several options were considered, but none were considered independent of influence or that reforms would be guaranteed long-term. In contrast, the UK government believes that there has been widespread public support for a Regulator, including from fans and football finance experts. The UK government has also heard from football investors, club owners, and representatives of the EFL and National League who all support a new statutory independent regulator.

The government will seek to introduce the Regulator to reform the culture of governance in English football clubs and mitigate the risk of clubs being entirely lost to fans and communities. It would have three secondary duties, to have regard to:

  1. Domestic competition,
  2. International competitiveness, and
  3. Investment. This would ensure it balances these objectives when striving for its primary purpose.

Furthermore, the government believes regulated clubs should bear the cost of regulation. Therefore, the Regulator would be funded by a levy on clubs proportionate to their revenue.

Scope

The Regulator will consider the top 5 tiers of the English men’s football pyramid. It’s unclear where the Regulator will be housed (i.e. government department or a football body). Nevertheless, the government believes that football has shown itself incapable of sufficient reform and of taking the necessary decisions for the good of the whole pyramid. The governance arrangements mean football has the wrong incentives and is therefore unlikely to deliver the protections the game needs.

Framework

The Regulator would set detailed Specific Licence Conditions to clubs, under each Threshold Condition as set out below:

  1. Appropriate resources – The club must have adequate financial and non-financial resources and controls in place, to meet committed spending and foreseeable risks.
  • Fit and proper custodians – Persons at a club deemed to exercise significant decision-making influence must be fit and proper custodians.
  • Fan interests – The club must have appropriate provisions for considering the interests of fans on key decisions, and issues of club heritage, on an ongoing basis.
  • Approved competitions – The club must agree to only compete in leagues and competitions that are approved by the Regulator based on predetermined criteria

While the four Threshold Conditions above would be set in legislation, there will be detailed requirements underlying each called Specific Licence Conditions which would be determined by the Regulator. Clubs would have to comply with these Specific Licence Conditions in order to meet the overarching Threshold Condition.

Four Pillars

There are 4 proposed pillars and foundations for reform, these being:

  1. Financial regulation

Clubs would be required to demonstrate good basic financial practices and have appropriate financial resources or ‘buffers’ to enable the club to meet cash flows in the event of a financial shock, and to be able to protect the core assets and value of the club – such as the stadium.

This regulation would be delivered through the Regulator’s licensing system under the first Threshold Condition of ‘Appropriate Resources’. The Regulator will also want to see that clubs can demonstrate and have in place good contingency/scenario planning, multi-year forecasting, monitoring, and reporting procedures.

  • Corporate governance

The Review found poor internal governance at clubs allowed owners to act unilaterally, pursuing short-term interests with little accountability or scrutiny. The Regulator should seek to improve corporate governance through the creation of a compulsory ‘Football Club Corporate Governance Code’. Compliance with the code would be enforced through the ‘Appropriate resources’ Threshold Condition.

The Football Club Corporate Governance Code would draw on established corporate governance principles applied in other industries. The Football Club Corporate Governance Code would adopt a tiered approach to accommodate the vast difference in scale and resources of the clubs across the pyramid. Each tier would have a different level of requirements.

The government believes corporate governance will not be an unnecessary burden. Rather, corporate governance is an opportunity for clubs, helping them to achieve better business outcomes, risk management and transparency for fans. There will be a requirement for clubs to report and publish on corporate governance annually.

  • Owners and Directors’ Tests

The Review found examples of unsuitable custodians, including owners with long histories of business bankruptcies, owners with serious criminal convictions, owners later imprisoned for crimes including money laundering, and directors recruited without a proper, transparent appointment process.

To address these shortcomings, the Regulator would establish new owners’ and directors’ tests consisting of three key elements:

  • a fitness and propriety test (owners and directors),
  • enhanced due diligence of source of wealth (owners); and
  • a requirement for robust financial plans (owners)

The Regulator would establish and implement new tests for owners and directors, which would be enforced through the ‘Fit and proper custodians’ Threshold Condition.

Tests would consist of three key elements:

  1. fitness and propriety test (owners and directors);
  2. enhanced due diligence of source of wealth (owners); and
  3. a requirement for robust financial plans (owners).
  • Fan engagement and club heritage

The Regulator would set a minimum standard of fan engagement as part of its licensing regime through the ‘Fan interests’ Threshold Condition, in line with the aims of the Review. This would require clubs to have a framework in place to regularly meet a representative group of fans to discuss key strategic matters at the club, and other issues of interest to supporters (including club heritage).

Clubs will need to satisfy the Regulator that they have appropriate and proportionate provisions for considering the interests of fans on key decisions and issues of club heritage. Clubs will need to show they are regularly consulting a representative group of fans on key strategic matters at the club, and other issues of interest to supporters (including club heritage).

Financial distributions

English football clubs have been highly successful in growing their income. Combined revenues across the top four men’s leagues. Despite this, analysis of the financial health of English clubs indicates that a large number of clubs struggle to remain financially viable without the help of external owner funding.

A football-led solution to solving distributional issues remains the strongly preferred outcome both now, and for the future. Both the Premier League and EFL agree that a greater quantum of cash needs to flow through the pyramid, alongside cost controls, in order to achieve the financial sustainability that is so urgently needed.

The Regulator will undertake a periodic assessment of how the industry is working and the health of finances. Any Regulator intervention would only come after the market has been given adequate opportunity to reach a settlement. This could potentially involve an arbitral process whereby the Regulator would set out the terms of the process, including the issues that any financing would need to address.

Conclusion

The government is due to go through a process of targeted engagement and consultation with key tenets identified in the White Paper. Targeted consultation will take place shortly, following the publication of the White Paper. Alongside this, the government is to continue to draw on advice from legal, regulatory and industry experts.

On one hand, the White Paper should be applauded for attempting to tackle the endemic failings within professional football in England once and for all. Given the recent financial issues facing Premier League clubs such as Man City and Chelsea, as well as EFL clubs such as Derby County, Bury and Macclesfield, it is clear that stakeholders who currently administer and run professional football clubs in England have made a poor job of doing so.

The Review offered a unique opportunity to understand the views and concerns of stakeholders across football and beyond. However, the White Paper and its contents will be viewed with hostility by many stakeholders within the game given the scale and scope of the proposed reforms. These same stakeholders will be required to implement the proposed changes. Ultimately, the Regulator has been designed to deliver a shift in culture that puts fans back at the heart of the game. Only time will tell whether this shift can be achieved.  

The Government’s White Paper can be viewed here.

UEFA’s sustainability rules

Here’s everything you need to know about UEFA’s new financial sustainability rules, including their objectives, key pillars, and implementation timeline. The regulations represent a major reform of UEFA’s finance regulations since they were first introduced in 2010, previously knowns as UEFA’s Financial Fair Play (FFP).

As the name suggests, the key objective of the new regulations is to achieve financial sustainability, through three key pillars:

  1. Solvency
  2. Stability; and
  3. Cost control.

The new rules include the following:  

  • No overdue payment rule; and
  • Football earnings rule; and
  • Squad cost rule.

The regulations came into force in June 2022, with gradual implementation over three years to allow clubs time to adapt.

UEFA’s club licensing and financial regulations project, which has been ongoing since 2010, has successfully improved the financial stability of European clubs at all levels. However, the COVID-19 pandemic has negatively impacted club finances, necessitating new regulations to promote financial sustainability in the evolving global football industry.

The new regulations aim to ensure that clubs maintain stability and solvency with a focus on strengthening balance sheets and promoting better cost control. The regulations were developed through consultation with various stakeholders, including national associations, the European Club Association, FIFPro, supporters, the European Commission, the European Parliament, and the Council of Europe.

The no overdue payables rule

The no overdue payables rule promotes solvency and protects the integrity of competitions by requiring clubs to settle payables to football clubs, employees, social/tax authorities, and UEFA by specific deadlines. Clubs with overdue payments may face sanctions.

The football earnings rule

The football earnings rule encourages clubs to build equity and invest in infrastructure and youth development by requiring them to cover the costs of relevant investments with existing equity or contributions. The acceptable deviation has been increased from €30 million (under the, now, old FFP) to €60 million over three years, with the potential for further increases for financially healthy clubs.

The squad cost rule

The squad cost rule restricts spending on player and coach wages, transfers, and agent fees to 70% of club revenues, with gradual implementation of up to 90% in 2023/2024, 80% in 2024/2025, and 70% in 2025/2026. Breaches to the regulations may result in sanctions, with strengthened overdue payable sanctions and progressive squad cost rule sanctions based on severity and the number of breaches.

Welsh Rugby Union in pay related dispute

Many commentators have been surprised by the relatively poor performance of the Welsh national rugby team in the 2023 Six nations tournament so far. It would seem that the players have been distracted by off-field matters.  The continuing row between the Welsh Rugby Union (“WRU”) and the Welsh Rugby Players Association (“WRPA”) would appear to have spilled onto the pitch itself.

Brief background

In December 2022, the WRU announced a verbal agreement between the Professional Rugby Board (“PRB”) and the WRPA. This agreement outlines the financial plan for the four regions within Welsh Rugby (Cardiff, Dragons, Ospreys, and Scarlets).

These four regions have been supported by the WRU in a bid to promote Welsh rugby and ultimately create a successful structure that will maintain the development of Welsh players.

In 2014, the WRU introduced the Rugby Services Agreement (“RSA”) which distributed £8.7 million per region, guaranteed to be used towards Welsh qualifying players amongst access to loans to develop facilities and a £500k signing fee. [1]

National Dual Contract,

The WRU announced the new national dual contract where the union would commit to paying 60% of a player’s salary, and the region contributing 40% in return for the player providing his services to the national team at a minimum of 13 times per season (subject to selection).

The RSA was superseded by the professional rugby agreement, which increased the annual fee received by the regions to circa £20 million in 2019. This was then renewed in 2021, meaning it is due to expire at the end of the 2022/23 season.

Nevertheless, that expiry is creating significant issues for the regions as they are unable to budget for next season, despite the verbal agreement previously announced. With no budget in place among the regions, they are unable to offer new contracts to players whose contracts are set to expiry at the end of this season. Not surprisingly, this is prompting some Welsh players to look at playing options abroad.

Issue – 60 Cap Rule

However, the issue with players opting to play abroad means they risk not being eligible to play for the national team due to the 60-cap rule. This rule kicks in when a player moves abroad and, as a consequence, a player will only be eligible for selection by the Welsh national team if he has 60 caps or more.

The new framework is being disputed by the WRPA due to its focus on rectifying the governing body’s collective aim of financial sustainability. This means that the regions are set to receive a significantly reduced annual fee as well as introducing a salary cap similar to that seen in England and across Europe. Thus, creating potential reduced salaries for players of the regions who are coming to the end of their current contract which could lead to players being enticed to explore options further afield from Welsh Rugby.

Player walkout

This uncertainty has created disruption within the Welsh Six Nations camp, as players walked out of a planned WRU sponsors dinner and, as of writing, a deadline of 22 February 2023 has been set by the Welsh players as to whether they will play against England at the Principality Stadium on Saturday 25 February 2023.

The WRU is at a crossroads whereby the success of Welsh rugby is being assessed against that of sustainability. While sustainability is at the forefront of rugby amongst the other home nations, due to the financial difficulties experienced by Worcester Warriors and Wasps, the new framework seems to be at the expense of success.


[1] Dragon News : NEW RUGBY SERVICES AGREEMENT ANNOUNCED (dragonsrugby.wales)

Good Faith: Update on the Interpretation of a Contractual Duty of Good Faith

In the recent case of Re Compound Photonics Group Ltd; Faulkner v Vollin Holdings Ltd [2022] EWCA Civ 1371, the Court of Appeal has provided clarification on the meaning of a contractual duty of good faith, in the context of an unfair prejudice petition.

The Issue for Determination
The issue before the Court of Appeal was whether the High Court had been correct to find that two minority shareholders had been unfairly prejudiced when their appointed directors had been removed from office in breach of an express good faith provision in the shareholders’ agreement.

At first instance, the High Court had found that a contractual obligation to act in good faith, was based upon the principles set out in Unwin v Bond [2020] EWHC 1768, which the High Court considered to offer a settled definition of what constituted good faith.

Court of Appeal Decision
The Court of Appeal unanimously allowed the appeal.

Snowden LJ confirmed that a duty of good faith, in general, encompassed a duty to act honestly and a duty to not act in bad faith. However, any further interpretation of ‘good faith’ should be determined by the specific context and facts of each case. Snowden LJ cast doubt on whether it was appropriate to apply concepts from other cases, including Unwin in a formulaic way.

On these facts, the Court found that the duty of good faith did not amount to an obligation prohibiting the shareholders to vote in favour of removing the directors.

Comment
Re Compound presents a significant departure from Unwin. Following Re Compound the position appears to be that the scope of a good faith obligation is really a question of touch and feel. That said, Re Compound does make clear that to show ‘good faith’ will always require (i) honesty and (ii) an absence of bad faith. It appears clear that the Court will favour a narrower definition of good faith.

When entering into any agreement which includes a good faith obligation, parties need to be aware that the scope of this obligation is far from clear and could be subject to change depending on the factual context. Practitioners should take care to consider the scope of a good faith provision in the context of each case, and whether it provides adequate protection in light of the narrow interpretation favoured by the Court in this case. In our view, the Court is likely to continue to adopt narrow definition of good faith and parties should take care not to view good faith provisions as ‘catch-all’ provisions which function as a sort of ‘get out of jail free card’. Any such approach is unlikely to be treated favourably by a Court.

If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

The cost of living crisis – how to support your employees

The increased cost of living has had various effects on the labour market which employers should be mindful of. Older employees are now delaying their retirement plans meaning employers can benefit from more experienced individuals for longer. As a result of this employers will need to make sure they are adequately supporting their older employees.

Additionally, the cost-of-living crisis will be mentally distressing for many, particularly those with caring responsibilities and those from lower socio-economic backgrounds. Below, we discuss some key points to be aware of and how you can support your employees during this time.

Delayed retirement

The cost-of-living crisis has caused 2.5 million pre-retirees to delay their retirement with 1.7 million of those expecting to have to keep working indefinitely, according to a recent study conducted by Opinium Research[1].  The study of 2,003 UK adults aged 55 and over found that nearly two thirds (64%) of those who are planning to push back their retirement state they are unable to afford the loss of income.

This could be beneficial to employers struggling with recruitment as there are now more experienced workers remaining longer in the job market. However, employers should also be keen to ensure that they support the physical and mental health of their older employees. This could mean reviewing health care benefits and pension plans and updating menopause policies, for example.

How to support your vulnerable employees

Many employees will find their increased cost of living very distressing. Particularly for those with childcare needs and other caring responsibilities, finances will be tight. If employees are stressed, this is likely to negatively impact their quality of work and general wellbeing in their role. From both an ethical and commercial perspective, it will be important to support your employees during this time where possible. Below are some examples of how you can do this as an employer:

  • Ensure that you are paying your workers and employees a fair living wage.
  • Review your reward strategy which could include introducing a financial hardship fund. If introduced, this fund should be accompanied by a clear policy setting out how the fund will work in practice. Employers should seek legal advice for drafting this policy.
  • Review your benefits package. Smaller measures such as help with travel costs could be introduced if not already in place.

Undoubtedly, the cost-of-living crisis will also have a financial impact on employers, not just individuals. Therefore, if you are not in a position to offer financial help, below are some examples of non-financial support to be considered:

  • Build your communication strategy to encourage a dialogue between managers and employees about finances.
  • Train your managers to ensure they provide the right support to staff through the cost-of-living crisis, particularly in relation to mental wellbeing.
  • Offer more work flexibility e.g. improved remote working options for those with caring responsibilities.

Other considerations

Certain other considerations should be borne in mind. For example, some employees may be looking to undertake second jobs to cover their increased living costs. Employers should review their staff employment contracts to see which, if any, of their employees are contractually entitled to take on a second job. If this is contractually permitted or you nonetheless allow your employee to take a second job, employers should be aware of various legal implications of doing so. For example, under the Working Time Regulations 1998, employees must not be required to work more than 48 hours per week unless they specifically opt-out of this provision. It will be important to check how any additional work may affect this and seek legal advice where appropriate.

Supporting employees from lower socio-economic backgrounds

With those from a lower socio-economic background suffering some of the worst effects of the cost-of-living crisis, now may be a good time for employers to consider how they can support these employees both in the short term and also in relation to long-term career progression.

In a recent study conducted by KPMG, the company found that socioeconomic background has the strongest effect on an individual’s career progression, compared to other diversity characteristics.[2] The study found that individuals from lower socio-economic backgrounds took on average 19% longer to progress to the next grade, when compared to those from higher socio-economic backgrounds.

To continue combatting these difficulties, KPMG has committed to pursuing the following goals:

  • Reviewing the company’s approach to work allocation.
  • Enhancing data collection relating to progression of the company’s talent.
  • Tackling the bottleneck through piloting a new promotion readiness programme.

Whilst many companies have improved their diversity and inclusion policies and initiatives in recent years, the socioeconomic backgrounds of prospective and continuing employees are often neglected. Although this is not currently a protected characteristic for the purposes of the Equality Act 2010, the UN Special Rapporteur on extreme poverty and human rights called for ‘povertyism’ to be included in anti-discrimination law in an address to the UN General Assembly in October 2022. We are unlikely to see changes to the law anytime soon however the cost-of-living crisis may encourage more discussion on the topic. Employers should take this opportunity to review their approach to socio-economic diversity.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

Our Employment team is highly experienced in handling enquiries across the spectrum of Employment Law.  In particular, our team is adept at drafting policies, reviewing and drafting employment contracts, assisting with grievances and providing general employment advice to employers.


[1] 2.5 million plan to delay retirement due to cost-of-living crisis | Legal & General (legalandgeneral.com)

[2] Social class is the biggest barrier – KPMG United Kingdom

Catch Me If You Can: Service of Proceedings by NFT – An Update

A New Standard for Crypto Asset Disputes?

In D’Aloia v Person Unknown & Others [2022] EWHC 1723 (Ch), the High Court, for the first time, granted permission for proceedings to be served by non-fungible token (“NFT”) and email. In our article

Catch Me If You Can: Service of Proceedings by NFT – Blaser Mills Law we noted that it remained unsettled law whether service by NFT alone would be permissible.

In the recent case of Osbourne v Persons Unknown and another [2023] EWHC 39 (KB), the High Court has now clarified the position and, for the first time, permitted service of proceedings by NFT alone. 

The Decision in Osbourne

Osbourne concerned a claim brought in relation to the hacking of a digital wallet containing two NFTS, representing unique digital works of art, which were transferred out of the claimant’s wallet. The claimant instructed a digital forensic investigator to trace the NFTs, each of which had been transferred multiple times through various intermediary wallets.

One NFT had ultimately been transferred to an identifiable individual in South Africa, for whom an email address had been obtained (“the Identified Defendant”). However, the second NFT had been transferred to a wallet of a person unknown (“the Unidentified Defendant”).

The Court granted the claimant permission to serve proceedings on the Unidentified Defendant exclusively by NFT, on the basis that there was no other method available to the claimant. In line with the principles established D’Aloia the claimant was given permission to serve proceedings by both NFT and email on the Identified Defendant.

The Court further granted permission for the documents which were to be served via NFT, to be redacted, to protect private data, on the basis that they would be publicly accessible on the blockchain, on the proviso that the Defendants would be given unredacted versions.

Jurisdictional Gateways

In considering the jurisdictional gateways of Practice Direction 6B (as contained in the Civil Procedure Rules) in determining the application for service out, the Court noted the difficulties in applying gateways 11 and 15 to cases involving crypto-asset hacking and made the following observations:-

  1. Gateway 11 (claim relating to property within the jurisdiction) and gateway 15(b) (constructive trust, where the claim relates to assets within the jurisdiction): the Court raised two queries (i) whether England and Wales remained the situs of the NFTs in circumstances where they had been transferred to the wallet of person(s) unknown, who may have been domiciled outside the jurisdiction and (ii) when the NFT has to be located in the jurisdiction of England and Wales for these gateways to apply? It was suggested that the NFT, would need to have been within the jurisdiction when the application for permission to serve out is made, rather than when the cause of action arose. However, ultimately, the Court found that these were issues to be determined in due course in a  contested and fully argued case.
  • Gateway 15(a) (constructive trust where the claim arises out of acts committed or events occurring within the jurisdiction): there is a question of construction of gateway 15(a) and specifically, which acts or events need to occur or be committed in England and Wales for the gateway to apply. This was again not determined and will, no doubt, be the subject of further litigation.
  • Gateway 15 (claim against the defendant as constructive trustee where the claim is governed by English law): this was the gateway that was applied in these circumstances. It was strongly arguable that the constructive trust that was created when NFTs were transferred from the claimant’s wallet was governed by English law and consequently, that the question of whether the Identified Defendant and Unidentified Defendant in turn became constructive trustees when they received the NFTS, was also governed by English law.

Comment

The High Court continues to show a willingness to modernise legal mechanisms established long before the development of crypto assets, to ensure that England remains a key legal centre for disputes of this nature. The Court’s approach to the jurisdictional gateways considered in this case, demonstrates that this framework may also be ripe for modernisation in the face of an ever-changing technological landscape.

Whilst it has now been established that exclusive service by NFT is permissible in circumstances where there is no other method available to a claimant, it is yet to be seen whether the Court would permit exclusive service by NFT where other means of service are available to a claimant. Indeed, in this case, the Identified Claimant was served by NFT and email.

In the short term, at least,  it seems unlikely that the Court would look to expand the scope of exclusive service by NFT further, to permit exclusive service of NFT in any circumstances.

However, if crypto assets become more mainstream because, for example, stable coins gain widespread acceptance, then we would anticipate the use of service by NFT becoming widespread or even the norm for claims involving that type of asset.

If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

Manchester City accused of breaching over 100 Premier League rules

The Premier League has announced that it has referred a number of alleged breaches of Premier League rules by Manchester City Football Club (“City or Club”) spanning over a period of 14 years, since 2009, to an independent commission (“Commission”). Specifically, the Premier League (“PL”) has charged the Club with alleged breaches (“Charges”) of 115 of its financial rules (the “Rules”) following a four-year investigation.

Background

The PL announced on its website on 6 February 2023, (without warning), that it, “has referred a number of alleged breaches of [our] rules [by City] to a commission”.  The charges relate to nine seasons from 2009/10 to 2017/18. The alleged breaches are a result of a 4-year investigation by the PL into the financial affairs of City.

This article looks at the Charges facing City and the possible sanctions facing the Club should the Commission find that the Rules have been breached.     

The Charges

As mentioned, the PL has charged City with alleged breaches of the Rules on no less than 115 occasions over 14 seasons from 2009-10 to the present campaign in 2022-23. This can be further broken down into 5 distinct groups:

Group 1 (50 breaches) – Acting in Good Faith  

The alleged breaches in this group relate to the requirement to provide “in the utmost good faith”, accurate financial information that gives a true and fair view of City’s financial position. There is particular emphasis on the reporting of revenue (including sponsorship revenue) which the Club received, as well as its operating costs and related parties.

Group 2 (24 breaches) – Player and Manager Remuneration  

This group relates to providing details of manager and player remuneration. The PL allege that breaches of the Rules took place requiring a member club to include full details of manager and player remuneration in its relevant contracts.

Specifically, the Rules require clubs to have any employment contract with a manager or player to be evidenced in writing and ensure that the said contract is registered with the league secretary. It must also include the standard clauses set out in the Premier League Handbook. It is alleged that City has breached both Rules in some form or another.

Group 3 (5 breaches) – UEFA Financial Fair Regulations

The PL must ensure that its members (the clubs) comply with all regulations set out by UEFA, specifically, the regulations concerning Financial Fair Play (“FFP”). In 2020, UEFA imposed a ban on City (a 2-year competition ban) after having found them (the Club) guilty of breaching club Licensing and Financial Fair Play Regulations, instead, they were only on the receiving end of a £10 million fine.

However, it was later overturned by CAS on appeal, which ruled that some of the alleged offences were timed barred.

Unfortunately, the PL has no such rules that would allow breaches to be time barred and, as such, this would not be a defence that City can rely on during this investigation. The alleged breaches are said to have taken place during the seasons 2013/14 – 2017/18.

Group 4 (6 breaches) – Profitability and Sustainability

The PL has alleged that City has breached rules related to its Profitability and Sustainability regulations throughout 2015 to 2018. The PL requires clubs to submit annual accounts to the league secretary before 1st March each season along with copies of its director’s report and auditor’s report.

Group 5 (30 breaches) – Cooperation with the Premier League

The breaches in this group are alleged to have taken place from 2018/19 season to the present season (2022/23). Further, it is alleged that City breached the Rules requiring member clubs to cooperate with and assist the PL with its investigations”, including, “by providing documents and information to the PL in the utmost good faith”. In short, it is alleged that City have been engaging in conduct with the intention of circumnavigating the Rules.

Potential Sanctions

Unlimited Fine

Rule W.51 of the PL handbook states that the Commission may impose a fine, unlimited in amount. This is a similar sanction to those that have been utilised by UEFA in its policing of FFP throughout Europe.

Suspension

Moreover, where the respondent is a club, as is the case here, the PL can suspend it from playing any league matches. However, this is unlikely to happen given the logistics of such suspension, nevertheless, it is an option open to the Commission.

Points Deduction

The Commission could deduct points from the Club. However, it is not difficult to foresee the issues and problems arising from such a move, particularly, when looking at which campaign this could and would be applied to.

There is guidance to an extent in this area in that Juventus, previous league champions in Italy, were recently handed a 15-point deduction as a result of breaching Italian regulations.

Expulsion

The PL could also expel the Club from the league. It can only be assumed that this style of punishment is only reserved for exceptional circumstances however, it is not unimaginable in the event that it is found proven that City breached all or most of the rules it stands accused of.  

Any order it thinks fit

The Rules permit the Commission to impose any such sanction that it sees fit in the circumstances. This could come in various combinations and forms, for example, automatic relegation could be a possibility, a transfer ban, or a combination of both.

It is also open to the Commission to take retrospective action whereby it decides to strip the Club of its success throughout seasons where the breaches occurred.

Conclusion

Although the hearing is to be conducted in private, there will be much speculation over the coming months and throughout the hearing as to the potential outcomes. Nevertheless, should the Commission find that City have breached the Rules there will, no doubt, be moves from other PL clubs to have the record books updated and trophies reallocated.

Moreover, some clubs may seek financial recompense for missing out on European competition. In addition, UEFA may look to come calling on City’s door again and furthermore, there may be a clamour for the PL to make an example of City, thereby discouraging other clubs to adopt the same tactics.

It’s no coincidence that the PL’s announcement has come just before the Government’s long awaited white paper for a football regulator is due to be made public. The PL must be seen to be keeping its house in order.   


The Tricks of Termination

The recent case of Peregrine Aviation Bravo v Laudamotion GmbH [2023] EWHC 48 (Comm) (“Peregrine”) provides a salient reminder of the importance of a properly drafted termination notice.

It is pretty well settled law that a party terminating a contract can rely on any ground of termination available to them, even if not specified in its notice of termination. A very common example of this is where a party terminates on the express basis of a material breach of the relevant contract, but then subsequently seeks to assert that the contract was also terminated for repudiatory breach. The case of Peregrine suggests that this may no longer be an effective option for a party seeking to terminate a contract, because it may find itself precluded from claiming losses flowing from the originally unspecified ground of termination.

During the Covid-19 pandemic, a dispute arose as to whether Laudamotion, a subsidiary of Ryanair, was obliged to accept delivery of four Airbus A320 aircraft leased by the Claimants. The Claimants sought to terminate the aircraft leases for ‘Events of Default’ under the leases, and brought proceedings against Laudamotion to recover their losses. The Claimants’ termination notice referred to a right to terminate for non-acceptance of delivery and “certain additional Events of Default and breaches”.

The High Court provided obiter commentary on the impact of failing to expressly state the basis of a specific termination right in a termination notice. As a matter of interpretation of the leases, damages for termination were only due if the leases were terminated for a valid Event of Default, the relevant Event of Default here being a suspension of payment. However, the Court found that there was no evidence that it was a suspension of payment that prompted the Claimants to terminate the leases. The suspension of payments had been retrospectively identified as a ground for termination and it had not been expressly relied upon in the termination notice. Therefore, irrespective of whether it was a valid ground for termination, it could not be said that a suspension of payment, caused the losses that the Claimants sought to recover under the contract and as a result, compensation was not payable.

This case does not impact upon a party’s entitlement to defend a claim for wrongful termination of contract on the  basis of a valid ground, not specified in a termination notice. However, it does cast doubt upon a party’s ability to recover losses ‘caused’ by that unspecified ground. As the comments are obiter, it is yet to be seen what impact this could have, but it seems to us an area that is ripe for further judicial input and will be, no doubt, the subject of future litigation. 

In our experience, too often, termination notices are not given sufficient consideration and can be perceived to be nothing more than a simple administrative step. This case serves as a stark reminder of the importance of a properly drafted termination notice and the need to consider and, where appropriate, specify all possible avenues for termination.

If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

Sports immigration routes

Sports – Immigration routes

Any UK employer (including professional football clubs) seeking to employ an overseas national who is not a settled worker and who does not otherwise have immigration permission to work in the UK, will need to apply to the Home Office for a sponsor licence. 

Following a successful application for a sponsor licence, a UK football club would then need to comply with the relevant UK Immigration Rules when looking to recruit a player or coach from the EU or elsewhere overseas. In addition, the player or coach would require a governing body endorsement (GBE) from the Football Association in order to gain entry clearance and thereafter employment with a UK football club.

The International Sportsperson visa is for elite sportspersons and qualified sports coaches who are recognised as being at the highest level of their sport internationally. The individual in question will need to be sponsored on a short or long-term contract and have been endorsed by the FA via a GBE.

International Sportsperson visas are available for a period of 12 months or more. We advise clubs on their GBE scoring technology to help streamline international player recruitment for football clubs, providing an important solution for clubs post-Brexit.

Business immigration

Immigration route – Football Players

Once the sponsor licence has been obtained, then a sporting organisation can then look to bring in athletes from overseas.

The main immigration routes available to football players are:

  • Standard Visitor
  • International Sportsperson
  • Permitted Paid Engagement

Anyone coming to undertake/work in sporting activities in the UK, will normally need an International Sportsperson visa. The individual will need to be sponsored on a short or long-term contract and have been endorsed (a GBE) by an appropriate UK sport governing body – i.e. The FA. An example of the most common route- International Sportsperson – is set out below.

International Sportsperson

The International Sportsperson visa is designed for elite sportspersons and qualified sports coaches over the age of 16 who are internationally recognised as being at the highest level of their sport internationally. Applicants need to be sponsored on a short or long-term contract and have been endorsed by an appropriate UK sport governing body.

Your sponsor will be a UK-based sporting body, sports club, events organiser or other organiser operating in the sporting sector and will hold a sports sponsor licence. Agents and overseas-based sports clubs and organisations cannot sponsor workers on the International Sportsperson route

International Sportsperson visas are available for a period of either 12 months or less, or for a period exceeding 12 months. If your International Sportsperson visa application is successful, you will be permitted to work in the job you have been sponsored for. Supplementary employment and study will also be permitted.

Your partner and any children under the age of 18 may accompany you as your dependents. International Sportspersons who have, at any point in the last 5 years, been granted leave as an International Sportsperson for a period exceeding 12 months, can apply for settlement (indefinite leave to remain) in the UK after 5 years’ continuous residence in the UK.

International Sportsperson Visa Processing Times

Most International Sportsperson visa applications are decided within 3 weeks.  It may be possible to secure a faster decision if the visa application centre offers a priority service.

Most applications to extend stay as an International Sportsperson are decided within 8 weeks.

Sponsor Licence Applications

Generally, most football clubs operating in the Premier League and the Championship will have obtained a sponsor licence already. However, each licence type has its own specific requirements. Clubs should note that most EU, EEA and Swiss nationals arriving in the UK since 31 December 2020 now need to be sponsored in order to work in the UK.

A sponsor licence grants permission to a UK club to recruit players and coaches from outside the UK to work for them.

Clubs will need a sponsor licence in order to employ most overseas players and coaches, and this includes both non-EU nationals and most citizens of the EU, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

We have experience in international and domestic regulation of football and on various matters involving stakeholders in the game.

We also advise football clubs, agents, and individual players and their families on all aspects of immigration to the UK. Our experience allows us to quickly assess eligibility and to spot issues before they develop into problems.

We are here to help with personal immigration matters including the International Sportsperson visa, Standard Partner/EEA Nationals & Family visas and more. We are also able to assist if you require any advice or help with obtaining a sponsor licence, maintaining a sponsor licence as well as complying with your sponsor duties.

Get in touch with us today on 020 3814 2020 or email enquiries@blasermills.co.uk.

Welsh FA latest to implement equal pay

The Welsh Football Association (‘WFA’) has recently announced that they will implement an equal pay policy for both men’s and women’s football teams.

This will apply to professional contracts at club and academy level, as well as performance-related pay. This comes at a time with women’s football is growing in popularity and recognition, but often undervalued in terms of pay and resources. The changes will help to create a more level playing field for both genders and is a huge step forward for the representation of women in sport.

The WFA has stated that they will provide equal opportunities for both genders in terms of resources – such as marketing and media exposure.

The men’s team agreed to a 25% pay cut to enable a 25% rise for the women’s team, thus ensuring parity when representing Wales.

Both teams released a joint statement in support of the decision, emphasising the value placed on the Together Stronger ethos of collaboration across all Welsh teams – both on and off the pitch.

England and Ireland both implemented equal pay policies for their men’s and women’s teams in 2020 and 2021 respectively.

Furthermore, Scotland’s women’s team recently launched legal action against the Scottish FA for equal pay and treatment claims, demanding a contract stipulating equal pay and improved resources for their teams.

This equal pay policy is an historic moment for Welsh football as it serves as an important reminder that sports equality is possible and achievable. Moreover, it sets a precedent for other sports associations to follow.

Juventus star wins landmark maternity case before FIFA

Sara Björk Gunnarsdóttir (‘Sara’) is an Icelandic footballer currently playing for Juventus in Italy and is also the captain of the Icelandic national team. In May 2022, FIFA ordered her then club, Olympique Lyonnais (‘Lyon’) in France to pay her unpaid salaries of more than €82,000 (£72,000) as a consequence of back dated maternity pay.

In what has been described as a “wake-up call for all clubs”, this landmark case saw FIFA’s regulations take precedence over French law and helps guarantee the rights of female football players during pregnancy.  

This article looks at the background and facts of the dispute, FIFA’s new maternity policy, and how this was utilised by Sara to achieve her stunning victory.

Background

Early in March 2021, Sara fell pregnant. However, this special moment was immediately consumed by anxiety and fear. Her first thoughts were how she was going to break this news to her then club.

Sara kept matters quiet for the first few weeks and only informed Lyon’s club doctor. Matters changed when Sara could not play in a crucial match against arch-rivals, Paris Saint-Germain after having acute morning sickness the previous day.  

Sara met with Lyon’s club director to arrange the next steps. She was advised to stop playing at this point and, as Covid-19 was still sweeping France at this point, she was worried how this could affect her pregnancy. She wanted to fly back to Iceland for the remainder of the process, to be close to her partner and family. The club agreed and signed off her absence.

However, once back in Iceland, Sara realised that Lyon were not paying her salary in line with FIFA’s maternity policy for women’s football. In fact, Sara only received a fraction of her monthly salary, and this continued into the following month. 

Nevertheless, she continued to press Lyon to pay her salaries. However, after months passing with no resolution, Sara filed a claim before the Football Tribunal of FIFA’s Dispute Resolution Chamber on 10 September 2021.

FIFA: Women’s Football

FIFA introduced a new maternity policy in January 2021. Under this policy:

“A female player is entitled to maternity leave, defined as a minimum period of 14 weeks’ paid absence – with at least eight weeks after birth – during the term of the contract, paid at the equivalent of two thirds of her contracted salary.”

Art 18 of FIFA’s new maternity policy, also states that:

“No female player should ever suffer a disadvantage of any sort on the basis of her pregnancy. As a consequence, the unilateral termination of a female player’s contract on the grounds of her becoming pregnant will be considered a termination without just cause.”

FIFA – Dispute Resolution Chamber

Sara’s position

It was asserted (by Sara’s legal representatives) that:

“…the FIFA [Regulations] are clear and provide for full remuneration, unless more favourable conditions would apply under domestic rules.”

Current French maternity provisions are less favourable and, as a consequence, it was argued that FIFA Regulations should apply in this instance. It was further argued that in line with the “spirit” of the Regulations:  

“…the pregnancy and maternity dispositions were implemented to protect female players in such pivotal and central moment of their lives not only as professional footballers but also as individuals”.

Sara asserted that this matter fell under Art 18 of FIFA’s Regulations of the Status and Transfer of Players (‘Regulations’), specifically art. 18quater par. 4 b) which states when a player becomes pregnant, she has the right, during the term of her contract, to:

“provide services to the club in an alternate manner, should her treating practitioner deem that it is not safe for her to continue her sporting services, or should she choose not to exercise her right to continue to continue providing sporting services. In such a case, the player shall be entitled to receive her full remuneration, until such time as she utilises maternity leave”.

Sara’s legal representatives asserted that the parties agreed she could travel back to Iceland, taken into consideration the outburst of COVID-19 cases within the team and that Lyon never “display[ed] any opposition”.

By refusing to follow the Regulations, Lyon had discriminated against her. Sara’s legal team stressed that “maternity should never constitute a source of discrimination in employment, including in that of receiving salaries”, the latter being an “essential step to ensuring gender equality”.

It was stated that Sara had only received a small percentage of her monthly salaries and her employment contract with Lyon was governed by French law under the collective bargaining agreement applicable to female players equally ensured full remuneration for 90 days following the beginning of Sara’s leave.

Lyon’s position

Lyon maintained the FFT did not have jurisdiction to hear the dispute. Lyon declared the employment contract between the parties referred explicitly to the French labour Court to the extent that:

“The labour court shall have exclusive jurisdiction, regardless of the amount of the claim, to hear the disputes referred to in this chapter. Any agreement to the contrary is deemed unwritten (…).” (free translation from French)”.

Lyon further claimed, “that there is not a single reference in the contract to the DRC [FIFA’s Dispute Resolution Chamber] or any other arbitral institution”.

It was also submitted by Lyon that it had done everything in its power to allow Sara to return to Iceland while benefiting from the social security allowance.

Furthermore, given that Sara did not make any request concerning the possibility of continuing to carry out her services in an alternate matter, and in view of her insistence to return to Iceland as soon as possible to be near her relatives for the monitoring of her pregnancy, the prerequisites of the Regulations were clearly not fulfilled.

FIFA’s Decision

Firstly, the DRC Chamber (the ‘Chamber’) considered whether it was competent to deal with this case. It noted that the employment contract did not contain any explicit jurisdiction clause in favour of the respective labour court. The Chamber recalled its long-standing jurisprudence that a choice of jurisdiction by means of which the parties agree to decline the competence of FIFA must be clear, exclusive, and unequivocal.

Turning towards the dispute itself, the Chamber acknowledged that the crucial element of this dispute lay in the application and interpretation of art. 18quater par. 4 lit. a) and lit. b) of the Regulations, concerning the player’s entitlement to remuneration during her pregnancy.

The Chamber acknowledged that the maternity provision – in general – enshrined the duty of care of the employer with the main objective to provide protection for the pregnancy of a player.

It was also acknowledged by Lyon that Sara would not provide sporting services during her pregnancy.  

The Chamber equally acknowledged that Lyon had never mentioned the possibility of Sara continuing to work in an alternate way. The Chamber concluded that Lyon failed to address any possibilities regarding Sara’s alternative employment during her pregnancy, and Sara had made herself available for alternate services by means of her letter to Lyon in August 2021.

Therefore, the Chamber decided that Lyon was liable to pay Sara the amounts claimed as outstanding under the contract. FIFA also stated in its judgement that Lyon had 45 days (from the decision), to pay Sara, otherwise the club would be given a transfer ban.

The decision of the DRC can be viewed in full here.

Thinking of selling your house in the New Year?

January is usually a time of change, we all start making plans for all those things we hope to achieve across the year.

What better time could there be to decide if the house you are in is the home you want to see yourself or your family in before next year? Jane Hannaway, Partner & Head of Residential Property looks at why January is a good time to start preparing to sell.

The market
Traditionally the housing market takes a small decline from October through to December, before a rush of property is added in the spring. This is thought to be due to people not wanting to move in the lead-up to the festive season, but it is also very understandable that the thought of trying to transfer all of your valuable possessions from one house to another on a cold winter’s day is not one to warm many hearts.

Fast forward to January, people start looking again at taking that first step or the next step on the property ladder.  If you’re looking to sell within the year, now is the time to start putting those plans into action. The sooner you get your property on the market, the sooner you can instruct a conveyancing solicitor who can begin to prepare all the basic documents you will need to sell your home, helping to speed up the process.

Spring sales
The vast majority of homeowners who choose to sell do so in the spring, leading to a saturated market full of competition for those looking to sell.  It becomes a buyers’ market which can lead to deflation in the price you can hope to achieve.  If you have a valuation you aim to sell at or even need to meet to make a move worthwhile, this could take longer during this period.

There is also more chance of being stuck in a property chain when the market is busier, extending your selling process as there will be buyers before you. The conveyancing process for a buyer is typically longer since there are more steps involved. Selling in the early part of the year allows your property to be seen before others join the market making it far easier for your property to achieve its potential, and it is likely you will be earlier in the chain. As the market becomes more saturated, the time it takes for conveyancing also becomes longer, meaning you could wait months before you get your new property.

Getting ready to sell
Selecting your conveyancing solicitors early on can help you find the right team for you, making it easier along the way to have open communication. As a seller, conveyancing has fewer steps but instructing a solicitor when you decide to list your house allows the paperwork to start early and hopefully prevents delays when a buyer is found.

A big part of moving home is being ready for that big move day. So why not take advantage of the colder weather and that natural tendency to want to stay indoors to declutter? Clearing out those things you no longer want or need helps you make things easier when it comes to moving and will have the added advantage of making the presentation of your home for sale so much easier too.

New year, new property
The sooner you begin finding and instructing a conveyancing team, the smoother the process is likely to go. Plus, getting your home ready is a perfect New Year’s resolution!

Get in touch with Blaser Mills Law
If you are ready to speak to the Residential Property team, get in touch with Jane on 020 3814 2020 or email jeh@blasermills.co.uk.

Family Mediation Week: The benefits of mediation

This week, 16-20th January, marks Family Mediation Week, an opportunity to raise awareness of family mediation and the benefits it may bring to separating families.

Family mediation is a process in which an independent and professionally trained mediator helps separating couples resolve any challenges and disputes faced when parting ways. The mediator will help you to work out arrangements for things such as housing, children, assets and finances.

Mediation involves an initial assessment meeting where the mediator will see you on your own to discuss the process and find out what you are hoping to achieve and for you to consider whether mediation will be appropriate in your case. There will then be a series of face-to-face discussions between you and your partner, which are facilitated by a mediator. The mediator will help you and your partner make decisions in a constructive and confidential setting, making sure all disputes are resolved with as little conflict as possible.

If you do not feel comfortable with face-to- face mediation, the mediator will offer video mediation or shuttle mediation – where you will each be in a separate room and the mediator will shuttle between you.

What are the benefits?

There are several benefits to the mediation process, some of which are set out below:

Cost effective: Mediation tends to be more cost-effective than involving solicitors. Even if you do not come up with a complete agreement in mediation, the mediator should help you narrow the issues that are being disputed.

Confidential: Disputes resolved through mediation and not in court are completely confidential for both parties involved.

Faster outcome: Mediation generally takes less time to complete, allowing for an earlier solution than through the legal or court route.

More control: Mediation increases the control both parties have over the resolution. Both parties are involved in negotiating their own agreement and no settlement can be imposed upon you.

It improves communication: The mediation process helps both parties to focus on communicating effectively and relieves the pressure and stress that court disputes may bring.

Flexible: The process is informal and there are no formal rules and evidence required although the mediators at Blaser Mills Law will explain the advantages of full financial disclosure.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

By focusing on clear and open communication, family mediation has the potential to get you and your partner on the same page. We will support you every step of the way.

Lucinda Holliday

With over 10 years of experience in mediation, Lucinda Holliday qualified as a mediator in 2011 and became accredited in 2018.  Lucinda went on to qualify as a child inclusive mediation in 2020 which means she can facilitate your children being heard in the mediation process when relevant.

She is an expert in her field with expertise in dissolution, divorce, and separation and the associated financial issues and children matters that might occur as a result of the breakdown of a relationship.

To speak to Lucinda further about family mediation services call 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

FIFA launches new worldwide football agent regulations

FIFA’s Football Agent Regulations (the “FFAR”) were approved by the FIFA Council on 16 December 2022 and came into force this week. 

There are major implications for football agents, including:

  1. The (re)introduction of an examination
  2. A licensing system
  3. A cap on agents’ fees
  4. Limits on multiple representation.

The FFAR will have major ramifications for all those involved in football worldwide and, as such, it is important that all stakeholders are fully aware of what these changes entail.

The enforcement will fall into two tranches with a transition period in between the first and second date.

  • 9 January 2023 – The provisions regarding becoming a football agent, including the requirement for agents to pass an exam and obtain a licence, will enter into force on this date.
  • 1 October 2023 – The remaining regulations come into force on this date and this includes the obligation to only use licensed football agents, the cap on agents’ fees and limits on multiple representation.

The Blaser Mills Sports Law team are here to assist those effected by these widespread change.

Sponsor Licences: How can a business secure more skilled workers?

Sponsored licence application: What route can I take as an employer?

The UK job market is experiencing a significant labour shortage at the moment; particularly in the skilled sector. As a consequence of Brexit, the Government changed the UK’s Immigration Rules, making it easier for UK based organisations to bring in skilled migrant workers from the EU and beyond. Following an initial implementation phase, these new rules are fully operational and any UK employer will now need to apply to the Home Office for a sponsor licence when looking to employ an overseas national who is not a settled worker, and who does not otherwise have immigration permission to work in the UK.     

The type of sponsor licence application you will need to make will depend on the immigration route that the overseas worker is seeking to be sponsored to work on. Our team has a wealth of experience in this area and has assisted many UK employers in obtaining the right sponsor licence. We recently advised a major UK restaurant chain in obtaining a sponsor licence to allow it to bring in nearly 200 skilled Chefs and Sous Chefs from overseas.  

Here are some of the possible routes available.

Business immigration

Sponsor Licence Applications

If you are an employer seeking to employ an overseas national who is not a settled worker and who does not otherwise have immigration permission to work for you in the UK, you will need to apply to the Home Office for a sponsor licence

The type of sponsor licence application you will need to make will depend on the immigration route that the overseas worker is seeking to be sponsored to work on.  Each licence type has its own specific requirements. Employers should note that most EU, EEA and Swiss nationals arriving in the UK since 31 December 2020 now need to be sponsored in order to work in the UK.

A sponsor licence grants permission to a UK business to employ workers from outside the UK to work for them, in their business.

You will need a sponsor licence in order to employ most overseas workers, including Skilled Workers and UK Expansion Workers. This includes both non-EU nationals and also most citizens of the EU, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland who arrived in the UK after 31 December 2020.

In order to secure a sponsorship licence you will need to submit an application to the Home Office and pay an application fee.

Businesses of all sizes, operating in all sectors, can apply for a sponsor licence, providing they are able to satisfy the business eligibility and job suitability requirements for the category of sponsor licence they are applying for.

We also assist with sponsor licence renewals and certificates of sponsorship.

Key points for UK employers

The key points for UK employers are:

  • UK businesses need sponsor licences to sponsor workers from overseas and this includes both non-EU nationals and also most citizens of the EU, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
  • Rebranding of visas so there are similar (but different) intra company transfer visa and sole representative routes
  • There are no changes to the skilled worker visa

Examples of the various routes under the global business mobility (GBM) route are set out below

The GBM visa route

The new GBM visa is in part a re-branding exercise of existing work and business visa routes but with the addition of a new visa routes for workers being seconded to work in the UK.

The five elements of the GBM visa route are:

  • Senior or specialist worker visa route – this replaced the intra company transfer visa and is designed for senior managers or specialist employees who are being transferred to a UK branch of an overseas company. There is a minimum salary threshold for this route or one hundred percent of the going rate for the job, whichever is higher. Applicants do not need to meet the English language requirement. However, senior or specialist worker applicants need to be currently working for an overseas business or organisation that is transferring their employment on a temporary basis to a UK based company that is linked by common ownership or control, or by a joint venture on which they are sponsored to work. 

The visa applicant must have worked outside the UK for the linked business for a cumulative period of at least twelve months, unless the worker is earning a specified sum per year or more. The senior or specialist worker route does not lead to settlement in the UK.

  •  Graduate trainee visa route – this replaces the graduate trainee intra company transfer visa and is intended for those on graduate trainee schemes who will spend part of their graduate training in the UK.
  • UK expansion worker – this somewhat nebulous title is the route that replaces the sole representative visa and is designed for senior employees of overseas businesses who are tasked with setting up a new branch or subsidiary company in the UK of the overseas parent company.
  • Service supplier route – this route replaces the contractual service supplier and independent professional route under the current temporary worker international agreement route. It is designed for contractual service suppliers employed by an overseas service provider or for self-employed independent professionals who work and are based overseas but who need to carry out an assignment in the UK and the assignment covers services covered by one of the international trade commitments of the UK.
  • Secondment worker – this is the new route and is intended for use by workers being seconded to the UK by an overseas based employer company as part of a high value contract or investment being undertaken by the employer.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

We are here to help and assist if you require any advice or help with obtaining a sponsor licence, maintaining a sponsor licence as well as complying with your sponsor duties. We also assist with personal immigration matters including short and long term visas including the Skilled Worker visa, Partner/EEA Nationals & Family visas. 

New Year divorce spike: Protecting your finances

The beginning of a New Year brings new opportunities and a chance to make a fresh start. For some, this may involve taking the first, often painful steps towards a new life and divorcing their partner. Law firms across the UK usually see a vast increase in divorce cases rising in the months of January and February.

The most common and overlooked mistake made by many is not protecting your finances and safeguarding your future. Protecting your money in divorce can be made much easier by having the right information and strategies in place.

Naim Qureshi, Senior Associate in the Family & Divorce team, outlines key things to consider.

Know the value of your assets
Make sure you understand and do not guess the value of things such as your home, vehicles, and other assets. Outlining these before the divorce process begins will help to move things along and will allow you to understand how much money truly exists between you and your ex-spouse.  Pensions are also a commonly overlooked asset where professional advice is vital particularly given that pensions are frequently the biggest asset in a marriage.

Additionally, there are potentially tax consequences on divorce and dividing the assets and this should be considered at the earliest opportunity.

You may also hold joint assets such as businesses which makes things complex and will require detailed legal advice.

Never hide your assets
This is a mistake made by many and can often backfire. If you hide your assets you could be faced with a monetary fine and can lose credibility with the court. Being honest from the beginning will help you in protecting your finances.

Update your beneficiaries
It is common to have your partner named as your beneficiary on things like insurance policies, wills and trusts. Make sure to update these in advance to protect your money from going to someone that you no longer want in the future.

Time is of the essence
The longer the gap between the Decree Absolute or what is now known as the Final Order and the financial settlement, the more complicated it becomes to resolve. In some circumstances things can change like the sudden death of an ex-spouse.

If finances aren’t resolved it can quickly turn into a very complex case. Your claims against their estate will become weakened and any pension entitlement may fall through.

Talk to a professional
A family and divorce lawyer and a specialist independent financial adviser (IFA) can offer advice on how to best safeguard your money throughout your divorce process and offer some guidance along the way.

How Blaser Mills Law can help
Our team of family and divorce lawyers have the experience and skills required to ensure you achieve the best outcome.

Blaser Mills Law has an extensive network of third-party professionals such as psychotherapists, IFAs, and accountants that can be referred upon request. In addition, the team has two mediators which can help to work out child and financial arrangements following a separation, often this can be a far more cost-effective process although it may not be right for everyone.

We are offering a free 30 minute confidential consultation (*subject to availability*) to discuss your circumstances and explain how we can help, please do not hesitate to contact Naim Qureshi on 01494 781 356 or email naq@blasermills.co.uk.

New Year, new Will

With Christmas over, it’s that time of year when we begin to make our New Year’s resolutions. Making a Will never seems to be at the forefront of people’s minds and without a doubt, this is one of the most important resolutions you could make for 2023. It’s an essential way to protect your and your family’s future.

The most recent Probate Research Report by IRN Wills titled UK Wills & Probate Market 2020: Consumer Research Report, has found that fewer than 4 in 10 adults in the UK have made a Will. Meaning over half of the UK population will die intestate.

Carol Dalziel in the Wills, Trusts, and Probate team outlines some of the top reasons for making a Will.

1. It allows you to choose how your estate will be distributed
This is the most important reason to make sure you have a Will and why most of our clients come to see us. If you fail to make a Will your estate will be distributed according to the rules of intestacy.

2. It allows you to appoint the guardian(s) of a minor
Within your Will you can appoint a guardian or guardians for your children who are aged below 18, or who are adults but unable to manage their own affairs. It’s often very tricky to think about but you will want to make sure your children are cared for in the event of your death.

3. It gives protection to your partner if you are not married
The law does not recognise ‘common law’ marriage. This means if you are not married and you die without leaving a Will, your partner will not receive anything.

Estate administration is the process of handling all the deceased person’s legal and tax affairs after they’ve died. In short, this means dealing with their assets, debts, and taxes before distributing their inheritance to the beneficiaries.

4. It allows you to appoint an executor
When you make a Will, you can decide who you would like to carry out the administration of your estate after you die. This can be a difficult task and it is important that those who are called upon to be an executor are both willing and capable.

If you feel there isn’t anyone who could take on this role for you, you can appoint a professional executor to act on your behalf.

5. It provides peace of mind for you and your family
When all is said and done, a Will provides peace of mind for all of those involved. Your estate will be secure, and your beneficiaries will be protected. It’s also a great way to make sure your final wishes are carried out without the need for any disputes or second-guessing by loved ones who will miss you.

Get in touch with Blaser Mills Law
If you’re ready to make a Will or would like to review your current Will, contact Carol Dalziel on 01494 781362.

Exporting to the EU- Understanding tariff exemptions

It is no exaggeration to say that day to day operations for UK businesses that export to or import from the EU has changed enormously in the last few years. Since the UK’s exit from the EU, the task of moving goods across the border has become more involved and costly for UK exporters.

It is therefore important to know where and how the trade agreement between the UK and EU can save cost for businesses. The tariff exemptions under the UK-EU Trade and Cooperation Agreement (the “TCA”) provide one such cost saving, provided that the TCA’s requirements are met.

Under the TCA, import tariffs will not be charged on goods that are traded between the UK and the EU, so long as goods passing to the EU can be shown to have originated in the UK (or vice versa). Customs checks must still be carried out, but the monetary tariffs can be charged at zero.

It is critical therefore for businesses to know if, under the rules, their goods for export have originated in the UK – known as “originating” products. In some cases this is very straightforward, such as stone extracted from UK quarries or meat from animals born and raised in the UK. Things becomes more complex when a product is manufactured in the UK from multiple components. Some of the raw materials or pre-assembled parts may originate from the UK, others may come from overseas (known as “non-originating” items).

For example, in the automotive industry, car components from abroad might be assembled in the UK to produce a finished vehicle. The rules governing whether any product is originating or non-originating are known as the Rules of Origin (“RoO”). The RoO touch upon every aspect of manufacture and sale of a product, including how to assess origin for packing materials and fuel used in manufacture.  

Typically, an importer is responsible for paying tariffs. Where a business is looking to export a product that contains non-originating elements though, responsibility is flipped so that the exporter is responsible for ensuing compliance with the RoO.

The RoO do include a means by which non-originating products (or their components) can be transformed into originating products and subject to the zero tariff. The main two examples of how this can occur are:

  • Where the product being exported has been sufficiently transformed (for example, by manufacturing process); or
  • Where the value or weight of the non-originating material/parts falls below the threshold specified in the TCA.

As an example, if a non-originating raw material such as steel was manufactured into car parts in the UK, this may qualify as sufficient production to transform the non-originating steel into UK-originating parts.  If car parts were shipped from overseas to the UK for assembly into a vehicle, this might amount to sufficient production depending on the facts. The exporter might also be able to demonstrate that the weight of all non-originating components in the vehicle comprised less than a set amount of the net weight (excluding packaging) of the final vehicle.

This is often between 10% and 50% of the value or net weight of the finished product, depending on the product type. The RoO also include detailed rules for each specific product type, specifying whether certain components, for example screws or insulation wires, might be excluded from any of these calculations.

It is always worth remembering though that tariffs may still be payable under the TCA in certain circumstances even if the RoO are met, for example if the parties have breached customs legislation.

Navigating the RoO can be a daunting task. Blaser Mills Law can provide advice on the application of the RoO and the legal steps UK businesses should take in their commercial contracts to protect themselves when exporting their products to the EU.

For further information or advice please get in touch with Becky on rac@blasermills.co.uk or call 01494 932614.

Catch Me If You Can: Service of Proceedings by NFT

In the landmark decision of D’Aloia v Person Unknown & Others [2022] EWHC 1723 (Ch), the English High Court has, for the first time, granted permission for proceedings to be served by non-fungible token (“NFT”).

The case was brought by the victim of a scam who had been conned into transferring cryptocurrency to wallets operated by fraudsters, whose identities were unknown. The claimant sought, amongst other things, permission to effect alternative service of proceedings on the persons unknown by (i) email, which is now considered relatively mainstream and has generally been permitted for a number of decades and (ii) NFT in the form of an ‘airdrop’ into the wallets used to perpetrate the fraud, which would embed the service in the blockchain. 

The Court granted alternative service of the proceedings by email and NFT. In respect of service by NFT, Mr Justice Trower went as far as saying “There can be no objection to it; rather it is likely to lead to a greater prospect of those who are behind the [fraud] being put on notice of the making of this order, and the commencement of these proceedings”.

It remains unsettled whether service by NFT alone would be permissible. Whilst the Court was not asked to consider this issue, Mr Justice Trower did note that “I do not think it is appropriate… to make an order for service by alternative means in circumstances in which it would be sufficient, without serving by email as well.” However, given that in most instances a fraud would have been preceded by some form of correspondence/contact, there will likely be rare instances where a postal address or email address for service is unavailable, even if the identity of those behind the address is unknown.

It is notable that this decision was preceded by a judgment of the New York Court which permitted service of a freezing notice by NFT against an unknown defendant in a case concerning the theft of cryptocurrency.

D’Aloia is one of a number of decisions over the course of the last two years, in which the English High Court has shown a willingness to embrace crypto assets and modernise legal mechanisms established long before the development of this technology to ensure that England remains a key legal centre for disputes of this nature (for example see our articles: Crypto Assets – No Longer a Safe Haven for Fraudsters, Crypto Currencies: Too Volatile to Provide Security).

It will be interesting to see how the use of NFTs in legal proceedings evolves, given the benefits associated with blockchain recognition as referred to the Court in this case. For example, we could foresee a particular benefit in NFTs being incorporated into the electronic signing of Court related documents.

 If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

High conflict personality divorces are on the rise

I was recently discussing the effect of divorce with a close friend of mine who is a GP. I commented on the impact of separation and divorce on a client’s physical well-being and he pointed out that one question found in almost every health insurance application is ‘have you divorced or separated in the last two years?’. He claimed that the link between mental and physical health is indisputable.

Separating and divorcing is traumatic at the best of times. Your relationship is breaking down, your financial stability is threatened, your home might be taken away from you and perhaps most importantly you will also need to consider child arrangements.

Even in an amicable divorce, the consequences are huge but when a divorce involves a high-conflict personality the effects can be devastating. Although it’s convenient to use labels such as narcissistic personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, or coercive control, the impact is often the same.

Some researchers estimate that 15-30% of marriages end due to a high-conflict, and the rest end in a low-conflict divorce.

Managing the process of divorce or separation if one (or both) party has such a personality is challenging. Specific strategies need to be adopted to minimise the impact on both parties and most importantly on the children.

I regularly read articles that suggest that when divorcing a person with a high-conflict personality, the objective of that person is not necessarily the best financial settlement or the best solution for their children. Their wish is often simply to annihilate the other.

This makes managing the process significantly more complex than just dealing with the legal aspects of the relationship breakdown. Whilst not requiring a qualification in psychotherapy, your lawyer needs a full understanding of the impact of a relationship breakdown involving a high-conflict personality.

Joint accounts will be closed without consent, credit cards will be cancelled, and children will be taken away without the others’ consent or alienated. The tactics of an individual with a high-conflict personality are numerous and destructive. All these need to be pre-empted and dealt with effectively.

Understanding the impact of dealing with such a person inevitably makes the process easier for our clients although it is unlikely that it will ever be referred to as easy.

Get in touch with Lucinda

Lucinda Holliday works closely with a team of psychotherapists and counsellors and has extensive experience and training on how to deal with high-conflict personalities in separation/divorce.

Lucinda is also local to Marlow and is located at the Blaser Mills Law office in Liston Court.

For a confidential chat with Lucinda, you can contact her directly on 01494 478 603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

What is the probate process and how long does it take?

Dealing with the death of a family member or close friend is always difficult for those involved, having to deal with the daunting task of probate doesn’t make the circumstances any easier.

Whether you are appointed as the executor or administrator in the Will there are some steps you will need to follow. Karen Woodison, Partner in the Wills, Trusts & Probate team at Blaser Mills Law outlines key steps in the probate process.

1. Identify if there is a Will
If there is a Will in place, it will tell you who the executors are and who should be dealing with the estate. It will also outline any wishes and who is to benefit from the estate. If there is no Will there is an intestacy. You will need to look at the intestacy rules to figure out who should deal with the estate and those who will benefit from it.

2. Outline the assets and liabilities
Once you have confirmed who is dealing with the estate the next steps will be to gather information on all the assets and liabilities that are left behind by the deceased.

3. Apply for probate
The next step is to apply for probate. This involves completing an Inheritance Tax (IHT) Return and making an application to the probate registry and HMRC.

4. Collect all assets and pay any debt
Once you have obtained the grant of probate you will need to distribute the assets, prior to doing this you will need to settle any liabilities.

5. Distribute the estate
Make sure all of those who are noted in the Will receive their share of the estate. This task may be as simple as transferring money or may require a more complex process when involving land or property.

How long does the probate process take?
Provided there are no complications it usually takes between four to eight weeks to get a grant of probate after you’ve submitted the application. Once granted, the amount of time it takes to complete will depend on the complexity of the estate.

What are the biggest causes of a delayed application?
There can be various reasons why your probate process might be delayed, here are some of the most common:

Missing documents – Some applications are delayed due to missing documents that are required for granting probate. Send out all documents at the same time to reduce the risk of delays.

Missing IHT information IHT is administered by the HMRC the IHT421 form will need to be sent to process the application.

Missing or tampered Wills The process can also be delayed if there is a missing Will or one that has been tampered with. Tampering with a will can be seen as fraud.

Although each probate process follows the same general framework, no two probate matters unfold in the same way. In some instances, seeking help from a professional solicitor is the best solution to put your mind at ease.

Get in touch
At Blaser Mills Law we always offer a quality of service and breadth of expertise that allows our clients to face their challenges with confidence. To speak to one of our Wills, Trusts and Probate solicitors about a probate matter please contact Karen on 01494 781362 or email klw@blasermills.co.uk.

Ronaldo v Manchester United FC – Employer and Employee Relationship

Manchester United (‘Man Utd or the club’) player, Cristiano Ronaldo (‘Ronaldo or the player’), has been a fantastic player for Man Utd over the years and his transfer to the club was seen as the second coming for the club and fans. However, following his comments in his interview with Piers Morgan on Piers Morgan Uncensored, after taking legal advice, Man Utd have since announced that Ronaldo is to leave club with immediate effect.

Man Utd announced in an official statement that Ronaldo’s exit was “mutually agreed”. As a consequence, it is reported that Man Utd have saved around £15.5 million in salary by terminating Ronaldo’s employment contract early.

Nevertheless, Man Utd would have had to weigh up whether the club could bring or defend a claim for compensation before FIFA or an English court further down the track for the residual value of Ronaldo’s employment contract.

This article looks at the possible legal issues and considerations faced by both parties before a mutual agreement was finally reached.  

Standard Form Contract – Express Terms

The first port of call for the club and its legal advisors would, in all likelihood, be the employment contract between the parties. 

In this context (taking any other image rights/commercial contracts aside), Ronaldo would have signed a Premier League standard form employment contract (‘Standard Form Contract’). The express terms set out in the Standard Form Contract includes clause 3.2, which states:

“The Player agrees that he shall not:

3.2.5 – knowingly or recklessly do, write or say anything or omit to do anything which is likely to bring the Club or the game of football into disrepute, cause the Player or the Club to be in breach of the Rules or cause damage to the Club or its officers or employees or any match official”.

Clause 10 of the Standard Form Contract then deals with termination of employment by the club. Specifically, it states:

“10.1 The Club shall be entitled to terminate the employment of the Player by 14 days’ notice in writing to the Player if the Player:

               10.1.1    shall be guilty of Gross Misconduct;

               10.1.2    shall fail to heed any final written warning given under the provisions of Part1 of Schedule 1 hereto.”

Gross Misconduct is defined in the Standard Form Contract:

“Gross Misconduct” shall mean serious or persistent conduct behaviour activity or omission by the Player involving one or more of the following:

(a) theft or fraud;

(b) deliberate and serious damage to the Club’s property;

(c) use or possession of or trafficking in a Prohibited Substance;

(d) incapacity through alcohol affecting the Player’s performance as a player;

(e)breach of or failure to comply with of any of the terms of this contract,

or such other similar or equivalent serious or persistent conduct behaviour activity or omission by the Player which the Board reasonably considers to amount to gross misconduct;

Implied terms

The above sets out the written or ‘express’ terms of the Standard Form Contract.

To the extent Man Utd would not have been adequately protected by the express terms agreed with Ronaldo, it may also be able to rely on certain terms which are implied by law into an employment contract. A breach of an implied term may be enforced by an employer as if the term was included expressly in the contract.

Further, Man Utd could have been assisted by the implied duty of mutual trust and confidence, the duty (on Ronaldo) to be ready and willing to work and/or the duty to obey lawful and reasonable orders.

Contractual and Statutory Rights

In the circumstances, the club will have considered whether Ronaldo’s conduct amounted to misconduct.

A further or alternative route for the club would have been to consider whether his actions justified his dismissal for the potentially fair reason of ‘some other substantial reason’ or a breakdown in trust and confidence and reputational risk.

The employment contract would have been governed by and construed in accordance with English law and the parties submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the English Courts.

FIFA – The Football Tribunal

In this context, FIFA’s Football Tribunal is also competent to hear “employment-related disputes between a club and a player of an international dimension”. In this case, we have an employment related matter between an English club and a Portuguese player.

Specifically, FIFA introduced provisions and principles of contract and employment law such that a contract may be terminated with just cause without penalty of any kind and, the principle that compensation should be paid whenever a contract is terminated without just cause.

Terminating a contract with just cause

Art. 14 of FIFA’s Regulations on the Status and Transfer of Players (‘RSTP’) states:

“A contract may be terminated by either party without consequences of any kind (either payment of compensation or imposition of sporting sanctions) where there is just cause.”

However, it then goes on to state at art 14.2, that:

“Any abusive conduct of a party aiming at forcing the counterparty to terminate or change the terms of the contract shall entitle the counterparty (a player or a club) to terminate the contract with just cause”.

FIFA’s Regulations do not provide a defined list of “just causes”. It is impossible to capture all potential conduct that might be considered just cause for the premature and unilateral termination of a contract in these circumstances. In short though, a contract may only be terminated prior to the expiry of the agreed term where there is a valid reason to do so.

As far as FIFA is concerned, when assessing whether a valid reason existed for a unilateral contract termination, the following principles should be applied, while considering the specific circumstances of each individual matter:

  • Only a sufficiently serious breach of contractual obligations by one party to the contract qualifies as just cause for the other party to terminate the contract.
  • In principle, the breach is considered sufficiently serious when there are objective circumstances that would render it unreasonable to expect the employment relationship between the parties to continue, such as a serious breach of trust.
  • The termination of a contract should always be an action of last resort
Terminating a contract without just cause

The consequences of terminating an employment contract are that the party in breach of the contract will (in almost all cases) be required to pay compensation.

However, if a party terminates a contract without just cause, or seriously breaches its contractual obligations to such an extent that the counterparty (either the club or the player) has just cause to terminate the contract, the party at fault must normally pay compensation, and unless otherwise provided for in the contract, compensation for the breach shall be calculated with due consideration for the law of the country.

In this case, the party in breach would be expected to pay the remuneration and other benefits due to the player under the existing contract. This would be the residual value of the employment contract that was terminated early.

As mentioned previously, one would be looking at compensation of anything up to c. £15.5 million. However, this would be offset by the value of any new contract that Ronaldo may have secured by the time of FIFA’s decision.

Issue – Mitigation

The duty to mitigate is a common law principle under English law that requires an employee to minimise their losses, or the damage they have suffered, after being terminated. This means that an employee must make reasonable attempts to find new employment.

Whilst FIFA regulations do not place such an obligation on a party to mitigate losses, this is taken into account when calculating the compensation due to a player if their contract is terminated unilaterally and without just cause by the club (or with just cause by the player). FIFA’s regulations make a distinction between whether the player has signed a new contract or remains unemployed.

In this respect, Ronaldo would surely have secured employment with another club willing to pay the same (or more) salary by the time any FIFA proceedings would have ended. Therefore his losses would, in theory, be nil or very close to that.

Conclusion

As it turns out, the parties came to a mutual agreement that will remain confidential. 

However, it’s no coincidence that Ronaldo sought to end to his time at Man Utd just as the World Cup started and the January 2023 transfer window opens. In doing so, Ronaldo would (through his advisors) have considered the issues in bringing a claim (either by Man Utd or the player himself) before FIFA or an English court).

Man Utd will feel very aggrieved that its star player sought to criticise the club and its staff in such a manner. Similarly, the club will have considered its legal position – which many will argue was a good one – and Man Utd would have felt confident in bringing or defending any claim before FIFA or the English courts.

Nonetheless, there is a bigger picture to consider here to the extent that the Glazer family announced (on the same day that it announced that Ronaldo had left by mutual consent) that the club is up for sale. Man Utd’s share price rose almost 17% immediately after the announcement. 

The prospect of protracted (and very public) legal proceedings with the club’s star player would no doubt have weighed heavily on the minds of the owners when considering their legal position.

In the end, a draw was probably the best result here.    

Bryan Castillo withdrawn from Ecuador squad over fears of his nationality and eligibility

The FIFA Men’s World Cup commenced on Sunday 20 November 2022 as the host nation, Qatar, faced Ecuador in the opening fixture.

However, the Ecuadorian Football Association (FEF) was involved in a legal dispute to ensure that its men’s A national team (Ecuador) is legitimately entitled to take part in this tournament.  The FEF has faced allegations from the Chilean Football Association (FFC) and the Peruvian Football Federation (FPF) that they fielded an ineligible player, Byron Castillo (Castiwllo), throughout their qualifying campaign in the lead-up to the World Cup finals.  

This article looks at the background to the dispute as well as FIFA’s response, and the final ruling from the Court of Arbitration for Sport settling this matter. It concludes by looking at where this leaves FIFA and football in general.

Background

Ecuador finished in fourth place (the final automatic qualification spot) in the South American World Cup Qualifying group with 26 points from 18 qualification matches – thus securing a place in the FIFA World Cup Finals for the fourth time in its history.

During these 18 matches, Ecuador fielded Castillo on 8 occasions – winning 15 points out of their 26 points accumulated. Castillo played on both occasions when Ecuador took 4 points from Chile during the qualifying campaign.

Castillo made his debut for Ecuador’s men’s A senior national team in September 2021, having previously played on 14 occasions for their under-17 national team and once for the under ’20s.

Nevertheless, the Chilean FA (FFC) claimed that Castillo was a Colombian national and had documentary evidence including falsification of a birth certificate and a passport by Castillo.

As a consequence, the FFC and the Peruvian FA (FPF) submitted a claim to FIFA’s Disciplinary Committee stating that the FEF had fielded an ineligible player – Castillo. Following this, an investigative procedure was commenced on 11 May 2022 by FIFA and one month later, FIFA announced:

“After analysing the submissions of all parties concerned and considering all elements brought before it, the FIFA Disciplinary Committee has decided to close the proceedings initiated against the Ecuadorian FA [Ecuador].”[1]

Nevertheless, this decision remained subject to appeal before the FIFA Appeal Committee and the FFC insisted that the FEF had knowingly misled officials by allowing Castillo to play for Ecuador throughout the qualifying campaign. 

To support this stance, the FFC submitted evidence stretching back to 2015 showing that Ecuadorian football club, Emelec, had returned Castillo to his parent club (Norte América) after one month (without playing any games for Emelec) when it had discovered that Castillo’s paperwork was non-compliant with their due diligence process.[2]

Such evidence included a reference to an internal FEF investigation into a series of fabricated documents that were discovered among the files submitted to the FEF in 2018[3]. Norte América was suspended by the FEF for breaching league regulations relating to the sponsoring of and benefitting from players’ falsified documents.

In fact, Castillo actually admitted to the FEF that he was born in Columbia in 1995. Such admission was a result of an investigation in 2018 by the FEF during an interview with the player.[4]

Allegations and FIFA’s Regulations

The FFC claimed that the FEF had aided in this fabrication or, at the very least, had knowledge that Castillo was using falsified identification documentation (i.e. a birth certificate) which would have been used to gain Ecuadorian citizenship. It followed then that, in the event that the original documentation were to be accessed, it would remove Castillo’s eligibility to represent Ecuador.

It is reported that Castillo’s original Colombian birth certificate has been validated by the Colombian birth registry and ministry for foreign relations, whereas the supposed Ecuadorian documentation has not be verified by the Ecuador’s civil register.[5]

The FFC and the FPF appealed to FIFA’s Disciplinary Committee (Disciplinary Committee) in early April 2022 with the hope that this would see Ecuador replaced by either Chile or Peru in the Qatar 2022 FIFA World Cup Finals. The Disciplinary Committee was asked to investigate:

the possible falsification of documents granting Ecuadorian nationality to the player” as well as “…possible ineligibility of the said player to participate in eight qualifying matches of the national team of the Ecuadorian Football Association (the Ecuadorian FA) in the preliminary competition.[6] 

The first issue (falsification of documents) falls under Article 21 of FIFA’s Disciplinary Code (Code), which states:

“1. Anyone who, in football-related activities, forges a document, falsifies an authentic document or uses a forged or falsified document will be sanctioned with a fine and a ban of at least six matches or for a specific period of no less than 12 months.

2. An association or a club may be held liable for an act of forgery or falsification by one of its officials and/or players.”

The second issue to (eligibility to represent Ecuador) falls under FIFA Rules Governing Eligibility to Play for Representative Teams.[7]  These regulations outline the specific eligibility conditions for international players, including the rules on being entitled to represent more than one association and the acquisition of a new nationality.[8]  If an association is found to have breached the eligibility regulations, Article 22 of the Code states:

If a player is fielded in a match despite being ineligible, the team to which the player belongs will be sanctioned by forfeiting the match and paying a minimum fine of CHF 6,000. The player may also be sanctioned.

Decisions of the FDC and Appeal Committee

The Disciplinary Committee dismissed all charges against the FEF and closed the proceeding in June 2022.

Nevertheless, on 1July 2022, the FFC officially appealed the decision to FIFA’s Appeals Committee (Appeal Committee) and urged FIFA to hear the appeal as quickly as possible so that any sanction could apply prior to the start of the World Cup in Qatar.

On 16September 2022, the Appeal Committee announced its decision, stating that the documents submitted by the FEF and Castillo were acceptable to the extent that Castillo holds:

“Permanent Ecuadorian nationality in accordance with article 5 paragraph 1 of the FIFA Regulations Governing the Application of the Statutes.”[9]

The extent of this provision essentially transfers the burden of deciding eligibility from FIFA to the application of local law within Member Associations. The Appeal Committee referred to Article 5 paragraph 1 of the eligibility regulations, which states:

“Any person holding the nationality of a country is eligible to play for the representative teams of the Association of his country. The Executive Committee shall decide on the conditions of eligibility for any Player who assumes a new nationality and for whom par. 3 of this article does not apply, or for any Player who would, in principle, be eligible to play for the teams of more than one Association due to his nationality”[10]

The Appeal Committee dismissed the appeal and confirmed the first-instance FDC decision stating that:  

“a person holding the nationality of a country, is eligible to play for the representative teams of the Association of his country”.

Nevertheless, Eduardo Carlezzo, who has represented the FFC throughout the proceedings, stated that:

“The Chilean FA confirms it will be appealing the decision to the Court of Arbitration for Sport as soon as it has received the full written reasons for the decision from FIFA.”[11]

The Court of Arbitration for Sport (CAS) accepted the appeal and heard the case over two days in early November 2022. A decision was published by CAS a few days later on 8 November 2022.[12]

Decision of CAS

On the 8 November 2022, and just 12 days before the start of the World Cup in Qatar, CAS released its decision following the joint appeal made by the FFC and the FPF.

CAS partially upheld the appeal, with their media release[13] stating the following:

On eligibility:-

The [Ecuadorian FA] did not violate Article 22 of the FIFA Disciplinary Code because the Player was eligible to participate in the preliminary competition to the FIFA World Cup Qatar 2022. Since the nationality of a player with a national association is determined by national laws (subject to time limits in case of a change of sporting nationality, which was not the case here), Byron Castillo was eligible to play for the [Ecuadorian FA] in the preliminary round of the FIFA World Cup Qatar 2022 considering that the Ecuadorian authorities acknowledged Byron Castillo as an Ecuadorian national.

On falsification of documents:-

The [Ecuadorian FA] violated Article 21 of the FIFA Disciplinary Code for the use of a document containing false information. For cases of falsification, FIFA rules do not refer to national law. Therefore, there is no need to defer to any determination made by the Ecuadorian judicial authorities on the falsification of the Player’s passport for FIFA to deem the document falsified under Article 21. In the present case, while the Player’s Ecuadorian passport was indeed authentic, some information provided therein was false. In particular, the Panel was comfortably satisfied that the Player’s date and place of birth were incorrect since the Player was actually born in Tumaco, Colombia, on 25 June 1995. As a result, the Panel deemed it necessary to hold the [Ecuadorian FA] liable for an act of falsification under Article 21, para. 2 of the FIFA Disciplinary Code, even if the [Ecuadorian FA] was not the author of the falsified document but only the user.

On sanction:-

The appropriate sanction for the aforementioned breach is a 3-point deduction in the next edition of the preliminary competition to the FIFA World Cup and a fine of CHF 100’000. The Panel considered that no violation of the rules on eligibility has occurred and that there were a series of extenuating circumstances, among them, that the [Ecuadorian FA] started a disciplinary proceeding against the Player which was halted by a decision of the Ecuadorian judiciary. The Panel determined that the 3-point deduction should not be imposed in the present preliminary competition to the FIFA World Cup, but rather in the next edition, considering that the Player was eligible to play in the preliminary competition to the FIFA World Cup Qatar 2022 and that such competition has not been affected by the aforementioned rule violation by the FEF.

Conclusion

The timing of the CAS’ decision has been a major factor in the sanction awarded to both Castillo and the FEF. The removal of Ecuador so close to the start of the 2022 World Cup finals would have caused huge upheaval and would also have drawn further criticism to an organisation (FIFA) that has been embroiled in controversy since it announced its intention to hold the 2022 tournament in Qatar. 

Nonetheless, recognition that documents were fabricated is undeniable. This fabrication was admitted by Castillo in 2019 and the FEF had full knowledge of this admission. Against this backdrop however, Castillo then played in Ecuador’s qualifying campaign and has played a significant role in their qualification for Qatar 2022.

Furthermore, despite the CAS decision giving the FEF a green light to play Castillo at the World Cup finals, he has not been selected in the 26-man squad to go to Qatar. The FEF’s reasons for Castillo’s 11th hour withdrawal was to avoid any “unfair sanctions” from his participation in the tournament.[14]

Castillo’s withdrawal from the Ecuador squad following on so closely from the CAS appeal decision (contradicting FIFA’s earlier determination) creates further speculation and confusion as to the integrity of FIFA and the FEF selection process in the qualifying campaign.


[1] ‘FIFA Disciplinary Committee Passes Decision on Eligibility of Byron David Castillo Segura’ (Fifa.com, 2022) accessed 4 October 2022, Available at: https://www.fifa.com/legal/media-releases/fifa-disciplinary-committee-passes-decision-on-eligibility-of-byron-david-castillo-segura

[2] FIFA statement on complaint made by Chilean Football Association (2022), Accessed: 10 November 2022, Available at: https://www.fifa.com/legal/media-releases/fifa-statement-on-complaint-made-by-chilean-football-association.

[3] Matt Hughes, Ecuador face being kicked out of the World Cup as Sportsmail reveal new evidence of fake passports, multiple identities and an apparent cover-up… with audio and documents confirming Byron Castillo WAS born in Colombia, Mailonline.co.uk, 12th September 2022, Accessed on 17th November 2022, Available at: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/sport/sportsnews/article-11203773/Ecuador-face-kicked-World-Cup-new-evidence-Byron-Castillo-Colombian.html

[4] Matt Cannon, The shocking audio in which Bryon Castillo reveals his true identity, marca.com, 13th September 2022, Accessed on: 17/11/2022, Available at: https://www.marca.com/en/world-cup/2022/09/13/6320c26846163f299e8b456c.html

[5] Givemesport, 2022 WORLD CUP: COULD ECUADOR BE KICKED OUT AND WHAT DOES IT MEAN FOR ENGLAND? Onefootball.com, 13th September 2022, Accessed on 17th November 2022, Available at: https://onefootball.com/en/news/2022-world-cup-could-ecuador-be-kicked-out-and-what-does-it-mean-for-england-35829885

 [7] Regulations Governing the Application –https://digitalhub.fifa.com/m/3815fa68bd9f4ad8/original/FIFA_Statutes_2022-EN.pdf

[8] Jonathan Collins, ‘A Guide To FIFA’s Eligibility Regulations For International Football’, lawinsport.com, 8 Feb 2021, last accessed 17 Nov 2022, https://www.lawinsport.com/topics/item/a-guide-to-fifa-s-eligibility-regulations-for-international-football

[9] ‘FIFA Appeal Committee Passes Decision on Eligibility of Player Byron David Castillo Segura’ (Fifa.com2022) https://www.fifa.com/legal/media-releases/fifa-appeal-committee-passes-decision-on-eligibility-of-player-byron-david accessed 4 October 2022

[10] FIFA STATUTES, Regulations Governing the Application of the Statutes https://digitalhub.fifa.com/m/5eb2b45e547ff39f/original/ndfxogwkoukoe4dm3uk0-pdf.pdf

[11] D’Urso J, ‘Chile Lose FIFA Appeal to Replace Ecuador at Qatar World Cup but Case Set to Continue’ (The Athletic16 September 2022) Accessed 4 October 2022, Available at: https://theathletic.com/3600519/2022/09/16/chile-ecuador-fifa-castillo-world-cup/?redirected=1

[12] CAS Media Release (tas-cas.org)

[13] CAS Media Release (tas-cas.org)

[14] AFP – Agence France Presse, Ecuador Leave Castillo Out Of World Cup Squad After ‘Unfair Sanctions, barrons.com, accessed on 17th November 2022, Available at: https://www.barrons.com/news/ecuador-leave-castillo-out-of-world-cup-squad-after-unfair-sanctions-01668534309

Christmas Kick-off: FIFA World Cup may bring tidings of joy for retailers and suppliers

The FIFA World Cup is kicking off in Qatar on 20 November with the final being set for just a week before Christmas. The World Cup historically takes place during the summer, however, due to heat concerns in the host country, has been rescheduled for the cooler winter on this occasion.

Such unique timing, overlapping both Black Friday and Cyber Monday in the run-up to Christmas, may well bring tidings of joy for retail businesses in the U.K., with Qatar, calculated by Bloomberg to make $20 billion off the event, not being the only giftee this holiday season.  

It’s beginning to look a lot like Christmas  

Both Currys, British electrical retailer, and John Lewis, British department store chain, have revealed that they’re anticipating surges in TV sales in the coming months, as well as in other areas of technology such as projectors and sound systems, with the two biggest drivers of TV sales (Christmas and the World Cup) culminating in an England match on Black Friday. 

Big sales are also expected in groceries, with both celebrations of Christmas and football focusing largely on food and drink. Waitrose, British supermarket chain, confirms that their Christmas food lines are designed with both festive and football audiences in mind, and has brought festive food and drink sales forward (the chain revealed their Christmas range in August) to manage increased sales.  

Retailers and suppliers should be preparing for demand, therefore, ensuring supply contracts are negotiated, agreed and in place as soon as possible, as well as reviewing any already in place.   

Indemnity clauses  

A contentious part of most supply contract negotiations is the indemnity clause.  

An indemnity is a promise by one party (the indemnifying party) to reimburse the other party (the indemnified party) for its financial losses if a trigger event occurs. The promise is made when the parties agree that it would be unfair for the indemnified party to bear the resulting losses.  

Indemnity clauses should be tailored to the specific supply contract, and both parties should consider the following when drafting:  

  • Trigger  

The event that triggers payment must be clear. This is usually an event over which the paying party has control, so that it is fair for the liability to sit with them. The indemnifying party may want to negotiate excluding events outside of their control, or for which they are not to blame. For example, an act of God, or a loss caused by the other party’s negligence.   

  • Loss 

The loss needs to be quantifiable. A well-negotiated indemnity should balance both parties’ interests. For example, the indemnifying party may want the loss to be covered by their insurance, and the indemnified party may want to cover a specific loss in full.   Sometimes, the amount to be paid cannot be known until the indemnified party’s liability is assessed in court (e.g., where the indemnity uses the word ‘claims’, ‘damages’ or ‘judgment’. 

  • Causation  

Often, the indemnifying party’s duty is to pay for loss directly and solely caused by the trigger. A wider or narrower casual link may be negotiated, however. For example, “in connection with”, may be interpreted as the widest causal link between trigger and loss. The contract may also state that the loss has to be ‘foreseeable’.  

  • Mitigation 

If the indemnity relates to reimbursement of damages (e.g., for breach of contract) the protected party usually has a duty to mitigate their losses. However, indemnities can be drafted to avoid this duty to mitigate. 

  • Proof of loss 

The indemnified party must prove what payment is due under the contract. This normally involves providing the fact and amount of the loss specified in the indemnity. Express wording can be negotiated, however, to depart from this. For example, the parties may negotiate that the indemnified party’s statement of the amount due will bind both parties.   

  • Exclusion of other claims 

A party might indemnify another against loss arising from the indemnifying party’s breach of contract. The indemnifying party may also be liable to pay damages for that breach of contract. The contract should state whether the indemnified party may pursue only one claim, or both claims in the alternative, although there will be no double recovery.  

  • Capping liability 

The parties to a contract may agree a ‘limitation of liability’ clause which limits their maximum potential liability to the other party. The parties need to decide whether the indemnity is included under this cap or not. It is common for liability under indemnities to be uncapped. 

Because indemnities are very onerous clauses, they are ‘strictly interpreted’ by the courts. This means that there is less leeway if the indemnity is poorly worded, and it is important to get it right. 

Don’t get caught in the cold  

For help and advice on supply contracts, to include indemnity clauses, please contact our commercial team by calling on 020 3814 2020, emailing us at enquiries@blasermills.co.uk, or filling in our contact form

*Please note that this article does not constitute as legal advice and should not be taken as such* 

Blaser Mills Law shortlisted for CICM British Credit Awards 2023

The British Credit Awards recognise the achievements of the most deserving individuals, teams and organisations in the international credit industry.

We are delighted to announce that we have been shortlisted for the CICM British Credit Awards 2023.

Our Commercial Recoveries, Litigation & Insolvency team has been named as finalists in the ‘Legal Provider of the Year Award’. A category aimed at legal providers that offer the highest quality service and appropriate solutions to its clients.

“We are very pleased to be shortlisted for the award and to be recognised within the industry reflects on the hard work and dedication from our team”.

Winners will be announced on the 2 February 2023 at the Royal Lancaster of London.

Estate planning

We all want to make sure that our loved ones are taken care of when we are no longer around. Estate planning is making sure your wealth is passed on to the people you care about in the most efficient way possible.

Our Wills, Trusts and Probate team outlines all you need to know if you are considering making gifts in order to reduce your estate’s future Inheritance Tax (“IHT”) bill.

What gifts can I make?
A gift can be anything that has value such as money, shares, property or possessions.

Exempt beneficiaries: Gifts to exempt beneficiaries such as spouses, civil partners and charities will not be subject to IHT provided that certain conditions are met.
Annual “gift allowance”: You can give away up to £3,000 free of IHT per tax year within certain parameters.
Small gifts and wedding/civil partnership gifts: You can also make as many small gifts up to £250 free of IHT to anyone provided that you have not used another allowance already in the tax year on the same person. Wedding/civil partnership gifts can be made free of IHT depending on your relationship with the recipient.
Gifts out of surplus income: Gifts made from your surplus income are not subject to IHT provided that specific conditions are met.

7 year rule
Gifts that do not qualify for an exemption are subject to the 7 year rule. This means that no IHT is due on gifts if you continue to live for 7 years after making the gifts (although gifts to trusts may incur IHT). If you die within 7 years of making a gift and there is IHT to pay, the amount of IHT will depend on when the gift was made and is reduced on a sliding scale from 3 to 7 years.

Make sure to keep a record!
The person who will be responsible for dealing with your estate on death will need to work out what gifts were made so it is important to keep a note of any gifts made.

What about if I transfer my house to my children?
This is a complex area and can create adverse tax consequences if not dealt with correctly. You should take tax advice from a solicitor before doing this.

Wills and Trusts
It is important to review your Will to ensure that it reflects your wishes and has been drafted tax efficiently.

Trusts are a useful IHT planning tool and can be used to reduce future generations’ IHT bills. Trusts also have other key advantages such as protecting your assets from potential creditors and children’s future spouses, as well as preserving your assets for vulnerable beneficiaries.

Other tax implications
Expert advice from a solicitor should be taken on any other tax implications which might arise from making a gift, such as capital gains tax.

How Blaser Mills Law can help

Blaser Mills Law works with families over time as their close advisers, helping to ensure that their wealth is passed seamlessly from one generation to the next.

By showing our clients how assets can be structured to protect them for the future, we can maximise the financial benefits for our clients and help them to avoid unpleasant surprises and conflict that can arise when dealing with succession.

The team will ensure that you have the right structures in place, giving you peace of mind for the future.

Residential Property team wins multiple awards at The ESTAS

We are delighted to announce that our Residential Property team has won three awards at The ESTAS Customer Service Awards 2022.

The team have won the following awards:

  • Bronze & Silver – Best Conveyancer in the South Region
  • Gold – Best in County Buckinghamshire

Now in their 19th year the awards recognise the conveyancers, agents and brokers for customer service based on ratings from clients who have been through the whole moving experience. This year’s results were calculated from over 200,000 customer review ratings.

Alexandra Kirk, Partner & Head of Residential Property commented:  “We are absolutely thrilled to be recognised in this year’s ESTAS. It means so much to us as we know it’s our customers who have judged our performance.  We take our levels of customer service very seriously because we know clients have a choice.  We have always been very proud of the personal service and this proves we are delivering what we promise.”

The firm would like to congratulate everyone in the Residential Property team and thank them for all of their hard work.

Menopause and divorce: Can my marriage be saved?

October marks World Menopause Month and with the subject no longer being swept under the carpet we are encouraged to have conversations that help to break
down the barriers and taboos surrounding menopause.

Menopause can be challenging, both physically and emotionally, which can often lead to tension within a relationship that may result in a breakdown or even divorce
in some cases.

The ONS statistics (Divorce in England and Wales: 2020) suggest that 60% of all divorce petitions are started by women and that 40% of those petitions
are initiated by women aged 45-55, who are likely to be going through menopause.


Dealing with the breakdown of a relationship or divorce can be stressful at the best of times, additional menopause symptoms can put a huge strain on the
relationship especially when the perception is that the other half isn’t as understanding as you’d hoped.

Could relationships be better protected if women and their partners understood how menopause works its way into all aspects of a woman’s life?

Lucinda Holliday in the Family & Divorce team at Blaser Mills Law offers some advice and best practice.

Educate: It’s important both you and your partner understand the symptoms of menopause, how long they can potentially last, and why these changes are happening
to your body. Educating on the subject will help to understand emotions better and hopefully break some barriers.

Communicate: This is the most powerful tool in your box. Take your time and have those important conversations about needs, expectations, and satisfactions.

Speak to others: Sometimes speaking to a third party such as family, friends, solicitors, or therapists can help to see things more clearly. It can also provide you with the additional support you might need.

Self–reflection: It’s important to understand where your feelings are coming from. Is it linked to your menopause and are your feelings temporary? Or are they here to stay and has the relationship actually broken down irretrievably?

Problem solve – together: Outline what the key issues are and as a couple come up with solutions of how you can improve them. Never fear change and compromise.
Take your time in making decisions: A significant change in hormones can lead to some hasty decision-making. Take your time with any decisions that may come your way.

Are there any other options?
Divorce can be a huge and overwhelming decision. You can try some alternative solutions such as:

Mediation: Mediation is a process in which an independent and professionally trained mediator helps couples resolve any challenges and disputes that you may arise
when separating. Lucinda has over 10 years of experience in Mediation and can discuss this route further.

Therapy: Although speaking to a therapist may be daunting it can be very useful for people that struggle to understand the changes taking place help to start those
difficult conversations. Blaser Mills Law has an extensive network of professionals that can be recommended to you.

Get in touch with Blaser Mills Law
To speak to the Family & Divorce team at Blaser Mills Law on divorce and menopause or to discuss mediation further please contact Lucinda on 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.

Service of Third Party Information Claims Out of the Jurisdiction – Important CPR Update

Often in a fraud claim, the identity of the individual/entity that perpetrated the fraud, or the location of misappropriated assets, is usually unknown. You are typically reliant on third parties to provide information about the possible wrongdoers, to put you in a position to start a claim to recover the relevant assets.

The English Court has a number of remedies to help with this common problem, namely Norwich Pharmacal (“NPO”) and Bankers Trust (“BTO”) orders. Broadly, NPOs and BTOs allow a potential claimant to find out information about possible fraudsters from other third parties who may have become enmeshed in the fraud, e.g., banks or other payment processing businesses.

Much fraud is now of an international nature, particularly where crypto assets are concerned. This briefing note focuses on recent changes to English Civil Procedure Rules (“CPR”) designed to make it easier for defrauded parties to get the information they need from foreign third parties (e.g. foreign banks) to identify fraudsters and seek to recover from them.

Updates were made to the CPR on 1 October 2022, following the 149th Practice Direction Update. This included amendments to Practice Direction 6B (“the PD”) , which deals with service out of the jurisdiction of England and Wales. Paragraph 3.1 of the PD outlines the circumstances in which a claimant may serve a claim form out of the jurisdiction with the permission of the Court. The recent amendments provide a new ‘gateway’ to seek service out of the jurisdiction in respect of ‘information orders against non-parties’.

Paragraph 3.1(25) of the PD now provides that:-      

“The claimant may serve a claim form out of the jurisdiction with the permission of the court under rule 6.36 where…

(25) A claim or application is made for disclosure in order to obtain information—

(a) regarding:

(i) the true identity of a defendant or a potential defendant; and/or

(ii) what has become of the property of a claimant or applicant; and

(b) the claim or application is made for the purpose of proceedings already commenced or which, subject to the content of the information received, are intended to be commenced either by service in England and Wales or pursuant  to CPR rule 6.32, 6.33 or 6.36.”

Prior to this amendment, the only basis upon which to seek information of this nature, was to commence an application for a NPO or BTO. However, in the absence of any binding authority, and on the basis of first instance authority precluding service out of an NPO application but permitting service out of a BTO application, the Court has often shown reluctance to grant permission for service out of, in particular, NPO applications and has generally taken quite an inconsistent approach in deciding whether to grant permission to serve out NPO and BTO applications.    

Paragraph 3.1(25) not only provides much needed clarification of a prospective claimant’s ability to serve an application for an information order out of the jurisdiction, but goes a step further in confirming that a potential claimant is entitled to serve a part 8 claim for disclosure of information, without the need to commence part 7 proceedings against persons unknown. This is of real practical significance, because it means that a potential claimant is not saddled with a potentially significant court fee at the outset of a fraud claim, when nothing is really known about the prospects of successful recovery.

Whilst the updates to the PD do not remove the need for a party to seek permission from the Court, to serve out of the jurisdiction, they do remove a significant hurdle for potential claimants in establishing a clear basis upon which to seek permission to serve an information order out of the jurisdiction. This can only assist in providing victims of fraud, an opportunity to seek recourse, at more proportionate cost and underscores why the Courts of England and Wales remain an attractive forum for fraud disputes.

NPO Guide

If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

Blaser Mills Law receives outstanding feedback from Chambers Student 2023

Chambers Student Guide (sister publication of Chambers) has released its annual review of law firms who offer traineeships.

The publications are considered the bible for students and graduates seeking law firm training contracts. They offer an unbiased, independent advice on the type of training contract, culture and working environment.

The trainees take part in a survey and are guaranteed anonymity to give them confidence to speak frankly about the firm, ensuring the write ups are as accurate as possible.

We are delighted to share the highlights of our 2023 results with you.

The firm
Starting strong Chambers Student 2023 said: “You may think that competition in the legal market is less fierce in the Home Counties than in the capital, but we can assure you that there’s no shortage of firms vying to be top dog. Our interviewees placed Blaser Mills up there among the best of them”

Chambers UK went on to comment further about the firm: “Chambers UK praises Blaser Mills’ personal legal services work in particular at the moment: the firm gains rankings for its family, personal injury and crime expertise (the latter of which is rated in the top tier for the area). Chambers High Net Worth, meanwhile, gives kudos to Blaser Mills’ private wealth law know-how, which includes tax planning and Court of Protection work in the region. On the commercial side, it’s Blaser Mills’ real estate practice that currently shines the brightest”.

Trainee life
Our trainees have left us a glowing reference in particular highlighting what the culture is like at Blaser Mills Law:
“Trainees told us that they “genuinely like each other!” … “we are just friends for real. We gather for lunch and we’re playing badminton tonight – we try and get new people to come along, too.” This is all part of the Blaser Mills experience of “learning to be a little family.” We heard that people are unanimously “very supportive and looking to help each other,” with trainees receiving mentorship from lawyers who are usually a few years post-qualification: “We can speak to them about anything and usually meet with them for a coffee once or twice during a seat to catch up.” Senior partners were rated for their support: “They’re brilliant. They come around to say hi. They always have an open door, and you can have a chat and a laugh with them. In the coffee room we can crack jokes and be open. It’s very welcoming and warm”.

Diversity & Inclusion
The outstanding work our Responsible Business Director, Tracy Jones, carries out has had some fantastic feedback:  “developing the firm, making a lot of changes and going in the right direction.” An emphasis on diversity and inclusion is one of these changes – “it’s getting there. We’ve got a D&I forum and we’ve had talks with partners and people are receptive and proactive.” Overall, Blaser Mills was rated as boasting an “inclusive and comfortable environment.”

Female sources were also happy to report that: “there are many women in the partnership and senior roles, which is appealing.” Another interviewee added: “The firm is really good with its diversity and inclusion training, along with its mental health training.” 

We would like to thank all of our trainees for taking part in the research and to Chambers Student for our write up.

You can read the full Chambers Student 2023 review here: https://www.chambersstudent.co.uk/blaser-mills-law/true-picture/6014/1

Corporate team successfully act on the sale of Audiologic to EAV Group

The Blaser Mills Law Corporate team are delighted to have been instructed by the shareholders of Audiologic in the successful sale of the business to EAV Group.

Audiologic is an award winning UK distributor which specialises in supplying AV products and solutions for professional installers and system integrators.

The acquisition comes after a shared vision to deliver consultative sales and service led competences. Both Audiologic and the EAV Group offer dedicated training academies, marketing expertise and excellent relationship management with manufacturers, integrators, and dealers.

The Acquisition is a natural next step to strengthen the ability for Audiologic to develop and grow.

Commenting on Blaser Mills Law’s role in the transaction, Audiologic’s Matt Boland and Simon Stall Say: “We want to thank the Corporate team at Blaser Mills Law for all of their help over the last few months. The team has done a fantastic job and helped us get to where we need to be, with a great result”.

Edward Lee, Partner and Head of Corporate added: “We were delighted to have worked with the Audiologic shareholders in their sale to the EAV Group, they were great clients to have and the deal is one that will take the brand to the next level and reflects all the hard work of its shareholders to get it to this point”.   

Alongside Blaser Mills Law, the shareholders of Audiologic were advised by BCMS, a specialist M&A advisor.

“Greenwashing” in advertising: Boohoo, Kardashians and how to promote your green credentials

During New York Fashion Week September 2022, Kourtney Kardashian, American media personality and socialite, launched two ‘sustainability-focused’ capsule collections with Boohoo as their new Sustainability Ambassador, in what was quickly criticised as a greenwashing stunt by the fashion company.

“Greenwashing” is the term used to describe false, misleading, overstated or unsubstantiated advertising claims made by a company about the environmental impact of their products or behaviours. Proven cases of greenwashing can amount to a breach of English consumer protection laws, which provide security to the consumer against mis-selling when purchasing a product.

Boohoo was named as one of the least sustainable fashion brands by the UK Parliament’s Environmental Audit Committee in 2019. The appointment of Kardashian and the associated products launch are widely considered to be case of a recognised unsustainable business seeking to greenwash its customers. There is a strong case to argue that Kardashian was an unsubstantiated choice for a Sustainability Ambassador given her highly publicised lifestyle which includes the use of private jets and supercars.

Furthermore, while 41 of the 45 products included in the new range may contain a percentage of recycled fibres, the collection itself makes up less than 0.1% of products available on the Boohoo website. At its core, the company’s output comprises “fast fashion”, a practice that produces over 92 million tonnes of waste each year.  

The Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) is currently exploring the sustainability claims made to UK consumers by Boohoo (as well as by ASOS and George at Asda) about their fashion products as part of its ongoing investigations into potential greenwashing.  

The investigation includes looking at the use by Boohoo and others of statements and language that creates the impression that products are more environmentally sustainable than they actually are.

CMA’s chief executive, Sarah Cardell, said: “People who want to ‘buy green’ should be able to do so confident that they aren’t being misled.”

How to make compliant green claims

Advertising is regulated by a combination of legislation and self-regulation. The main legislation controlling the claims made in advertising and prohibiting misleading information is the Consumer Protection from Unfair Trading Regulations 2008.

In September 2021, the CMA published its Green Claims Code (Code) and accompanying guidance, to help companies understand and comply with consumer protection law when making environmental claims.

The Code sets out six principles specifying that environmental claims must:

  1. Be truthful and accurate;
  2. Be clear and unambiguous;
  3. Not omit or hide material information;
  4. Only make fair and meaningful comparisons;
  5. Consider the full lifecycle of the product or their service, and;
  6. Be substantiated.

More information

For more information, or for help and advice on a range of company commercial matters, including consumer facing terms and conditions, please contact our commercial team by calling on 020 3814 2020, emailing us at enquiries@blasermills.co.uk, or filling in our contact form.

*Please note that this article does not constitute as legal advice and should not be taken as such*

Jasmine Allen wins Best Businesswoman Awards 2022

The Best Businesswomen Awards have announced their winners for 2022 at a Gala Awards held at the Hilton Wembley.

We are delighted to announce that Jasmine Allen, Consultant Solicitor from our Wills, Trusts and Probate team (also known as The LPA Solicitor), has won two Silver Awards the “Best Businesswoman in Legal Services” & “Best Customer Service ” categories.

Despite another challenging twelve months, the tenacity and resilience of female entrepreneurs shone through. All winners, selected by a panel of business experts, demonstrated a flair for entrepreneurship, business acumen and an abundance of sheer determination. 

The Best Businesswomen Awards are designed to recognise the achievement of female owned businesses and charities across a wide range of business categories and are open to any female business owners.

Debbie Gilbert, the organiser of The Best Businesswomen Awards, said: ‘Owning a business brings incredible challenges. Our awards are designed to showcase female entrepreneurs and recognise their achievements. The judge’s selection process is rigorous and to win is a major achievement. Winners were selected for their business expertise, innovation, and high levels of customer care. Our winners are shining examples of outstanding entrepreneurs who have proved their success to our judges and have shown they have the ingredients worthy of being recognised and rewarded.”

Jasmine Allen commented: “It was fantastic to be surrounded by so many incredible female entrepreneurs at the Awards Gala and I am delighted to have received these awards.  Client care is always at the forefront of everything I do, so to be recognised for the level of service I give to my clients really does mean the world to me, and I am so grateful to receive such acknowledgement as a businesswoman in the legal industry.”

The team at Blaser Mills Law would like to congratulate Jasmine on her achievement.

Legal 500 Future Lawyers: Outstanding results and award win for work-life balance

The Legal 500 Future Lawyers (sister publication of the Legal 500 and previously known as Lex100) has released its annual review of law firms that offer training contracts. The publication is highly recognised amongst students and graduates who seek a career in law.

Legal 500 Future Lawyers offers unbiased, independent advice on the type of training contract, culture, and working environment that each participating law firm offers. The survey trainees undertake is completely confidential which allows them to speak openly and honestly about their current workplace.

Future Lawyers – Winner of work-life balance.

We are delighted to announce that we have won an award in the Future Lawyers rankings for Work-life Balance.

The results

Feedback

Legal 500 Future Lawyers commented: ‘A training contract at ‘ambitious, growing firm’ Blaser Mills Law offers seats in personal and business-oriented practice areas, making it perfect for those looking for a well-rounded experience’.

What our current trainees have to say

Some of the best things about the firm included: ‘Work/life balance and colleagues’, ‘I’ve recently been working out of the firm’s shiny new Marlow office and it’s an absolute joy. I feel very lucky to be able to work in such a stunning location. Oh, and we have an office dog, Bailey!’, ‘everyone is friendly and approachable’, ‘the quality of work is great, with lots of variation and challenges’

Some of their best moments: ‘Realising that I definitely want to qualify into employment law and working towards this’, ‘working on my own client matter from start to finish (with supervision) and getting the best outcome for the client’, ‘being offered a NQ position’, ‘taking on my own property transactions’

The survey allows us to continue to strive and make improvements to our employee satisfaction on a yearly basis. For full feedback please visit The Legal 500 Future Lawyers website.

Corporate team successfully act on the sale of Ansible Motion to AB Dynamics

The Blaser Mills Law Corporate team are delighted to have been instructed by the shareholders of Ansible Motion Limited in the successful sale of the business to AB Dynamics plc.

Ansible Motion is a leading provider of advanced simulators to the global automotive market. The acquisition comes at an exciting time of significant growth for the business.

The acquisition by AB Dynamics will form part of the Group’s simulation portfolio supplying advanced products and services to the automotive and motorsport industries. Both Ansible Motion and AB Dynamics share a common vision and will be joining forces to better serve their automotive customers worldwide, with a broader and deeper offering.

The Corporate team were pleased to have received praise following the conclusion of the matter. Kia Cammaerts, Technical Director, at Ansible Motion, commented: “Blaser Mills Law acted for the shareholders of Ansible Motion on the sale of the business to AB Dynamics. The team were a pleasure to work with and hold some of the best corporate lawyers I have dealt with in my professional career so far, their contribution was critical to the success of the sale process”.

Partner and Head of Corporate, Edward Lee added: “We are delighted to have acted on this strategic transaction that further assists client delivery to the industry globally. It is always pleasing to receive fantastic feedback from clients, and Ansible Motion’s shareholders were a pleasure to work with”.

Blaser Mills Law achieves exceptional recognition in the Legal 5002023 rankings

With 10 practice areas ranked, 24 lawyers recommended, 2 ‘Rising Stars’, 1 ‘Next Generation Partner’ and 2 ‘Leading Individuals’, we are delighted to announce our Legal 500 rankings for 2023.

Legal 500 is a world-renowned law firm rankings publication who, through in-depth, objective research, identifies and ranks the best lawyers and law firms.

You can visit our Legal 500 firm page for more details on each of our rankings and see below for what our lawyers have been recommended for.

Employment

Our employment team continues to hold its strong Tier 1 ranking.

James Simpson (Leading Individual and Recommended): ‘James Simpson is experienced in executive dismissals, restructurings and TUPE issues.

Noel Deans (Practice Head & recommended): ‘Heads the employment practice with an excellent reputation in contentious matters’.

Wills, Trusts and Probate

The wills, trusts and probate team continues to hold its Tier 1 ranking.

‘I have used Blaser Mills Law for over 20 years. It has always been essential for me to feel confident in my dealings with matters such as this and the team at Blaser Mills have always been professional yet friendly. Communication via the phone, email or personal visits have always been dealt with efficiently. Time has been given for discussion and reflection. I have in fact recommended the firm to others’.

Jonathan Gallop (Next Generation Partner & Recommended): ‘I have mainly instructed Jonathan Gallop on private client matters – wills, probate and lasting powers of attorney. I have found him to be very responsive and thoughtful in his approach’.

Minesh Thakrar (Recommended): ‘Minesh Thakrar was very professional and extremely helpful…went the extra mile to complete all transactions needed’.

Sara Rendell (Recommended): ‘Sara Rendell is an excellent communicator and clear and precise in her reading of client requirements’.

Karen Woodison (Recommended).

Commercial Litigation

Our Commercial Litigation team continues to hold its Tier 2 ranking.

‘An excellent Team that provides a City of London service, while being approachable and unstuffy.’

Jonathan Lilley (Recommended): ‘Jon Lilley is cool and calm under fire. He keeps his focus on achieving good results for clients. Sees through the bluff and bluster which some opponents employ. Sensible, practical and a natural solution-finder. And if an obvious solution cannot be found, he’ll fashion one’.

Sangita Manek (Recommended): ‘Acts for blue chip commercial clients on matters involving mediation and commercial contracts’.

Alka Kharbanda (Practice head & recommended): ‘I dealt with Alka Kharbanda on a complex case. They were very helpful, gave good advice to the family I was dealing with and were quick to respond to email queries. They manage to settle a case quickly and wrote several excellent letters that ensured the other side settled quickly but were pragmatic with it’.

Jackie Ray (Recommended).

Family & Divorce

Our family & divorce team have retained their excellent Tier 2 ranking.

Lucinda Holliday (Practice head & recommended): ‘My dealings were with Lucinda Holliday. She was clear and concise. I was confident from the first meeting that she would look after my case to the best of her knowledge and my interests were always at the forefront. She explained the process and followed everything up efficiently’. ‘The team have a strong collaboration and ensure that between them the work is completed to a high level’

Naim Qureshi (Leading Individual & Recommended): ‘Naim Qureshi is a true professional providing sound advice at all times. Naim is knowledgeable, always providing exemplary advice and support throughout and is a pleasure to work with. He is undoubtedly someone I would recommend’.

Javita Malhotra (Rising Stars& Recommended): ‘Javita Malhotra looked after my business impeccably. I was confident of a good outcome from my first contact with her’.

Sarah Scriven (Rising Star & recommended).

Personal Injury

Our personal injury team continues to rank in a strong position of Tier 2.

‘Andrew Castle and Victoria Harvey are outstanding. Both are very much at the top of their game. They both have excellent knowledge of their cases. Both also fully understand the importance of negotiating well at the right time’.

Andrew Castle (Recommended): ‘Andrew Castle was always happy to take a call, explain anything I didn’t understand and he provided a completely personal experience for me. When my case was passed over to Andrew I thought I would be left in the dark but Andrew worked so hard to get an amazing result’.

Victoria Harvey (Practice Head & recommended).

Debt Recovery

Our Debt Recovery team has increased its ranking from Tier 3 to Tier 2.

Jackie Ray (Practice head & recommended): ‘We have worked with Jackie Ray over the past 33 years and she is always meticulous in her approach to every matter. She has achieved excellent results in the field of debt recovery’.

Daria Stepien (Recommended): ‘Daria Stepien often represents clients in various commercial disputes at trial or as a mediator’.

Real Estate & Infrastructure

Our Real Estate & Infrastructure team continues to rank in Tier 3.

Carlos Pierce heads up the Real Estate & Infrastructure team …‘The Amersham-based office is led by Louise Benning who specialises in residential development with expertise in option agreements, unilateral undertakings and site assembly. David Michaels is experienced in property finance and handles building construction and housing association matters. ‘Communication and the ability to get things or make things happen on time and thinking outside of the box to overcome problems are stand out features.’

David Michaels (Recommended): ‘Very good and dedicated.’

Simone Ganley: (Recommended): ‘Simone Ganley is a delight to deal with, her advice is always directional and to-the-point. She understands how to guide clients who may have prior experience with property matters, but is equally adept when supporting those who require more comprehensive guidance. Simone also delivers the wider Blaser Mills offering in a very neat, targeted way, identifying areas where clients may need to consider wider issues or engage with colleagues. From a relationship perspective, she makes Blaser Mills very easy to use.’

Telecoms

Carlos Pierce (Recommended) and Tina Middleton (Recommended) are highly experienced in telecoms.’

Contentious Trusts and Probate

A new submission from the private litigation department has ranked them at Tier 4.

Alka Kharbanda (Practice Head & recommended): ‘empathetic, patient, highly professional and her equally empathetic and helpful assistant’.

Sangita Manek (Recommended): ‘Sangita Manek was professional and focused on the task in hand. She paid direct attention to the details and facts. She kept me concentrated on the facts and not getting caught up in emotion and distractions. She explained the law and processes in detail so that I understood exactly what I needed to do and where I stood. It took the stress and emotion out of the situation. At the same time, she was empathetic and worked to make sure the advice and work was kept within my financial boundaries. Sangita gave me proper professional advice which brought the sad situation to a close.’

Child Care team acts in reported case – Hertfordshire County Council-v- Mother & Ors

Blaser Mills Law Child Care team acts in reported case – Hertfordshire County Council-v- Mother & Ors

Denise Herman, Partner and Head of the Child Care team, acted for the successful father in a case where a child suffered serious head injuries, which were originally thought to be non-accidental.

The case involved complex medical evidence being substantially challenged at a fact-finding hearing lasting over a week. At the conclusion of the expert evidence, the Local Authority reconsidered their position and sought to withdraw their application. This was refused by the judge after hearing on behalf of the parents why they should be fully exonerated in respect of the allegations they faced. The Court had to evaluate the quality of the work of some of the experts, as well as whether their identities should be published. The Court found the child’s injuries were entirely accidental and completely exonerated both parents of causing their children any harm.

Blaser Mills Law instructed Sally Stone KC and Sue Quinn and worked closely with them to achieve this exceptional result for the Father.

Full details of the case can be found here:  https://www.judiciary.uk/judgments/hertfordshire-county-council-v-mother-ors-fact-finding/

Blaser Mills Law expands its Sports team

We are delighted to welcome Josh Easterbook into the Sports department.

Josh is currently undertaking a training contract with Blaser Mills Law and will work closely alongside David.

Josh graduated in 2020 with a 1st Class BA (Hons) in Sports Law and Business and continued to further expand his knowledge in Sports Law through completing a Master of Laws (LLM) in Sports Law and Practice at De Montfort University.

While completing his further education, he spent 3 years at Wycombe Wanderers Football Club within the commercial department, starting off as Commercial and Legal Executive. He oversaw the process of the selling of the club’s commercial inventory through to the drafting of the commercial agreement which accompanied the sale, liaising with governing bodies ensuring the club adhered to all relevant commercial regulations.

He supported the General Counsel and the Owners in various commercial disputes throughout his time at the club, and towards the latter end, became head of the commercial department before leaving the club to pursue a more legal orientated role.

At the start of the 2021 football season, he joined First Access Sports, a sports agency based in the Knightsbridge, working as a paralegal. His role was to support the in-house General Counsel with all matters within the department, including; preparing representation agreements for potential new clients; reviewing and analysing agreements between clients, the agency and clubs; and advising on commercial matters involving the agency and its clients.

We are excited to have Josh on board and very much look forward to working with him.

Blaser Mills Law team named finalists at the Lending Awards 2022

We are pleased to announce that our Commercial Recoveries & Insolvency team has been named as finalists in the ‘Best Legal and Advisory Service’ category at the Lending Awards 2022.

The Lending Awards is an awards programme distinguishing and rewarding individuals, teams and businesses across Alternative Lending, Commercial Finance, and Mortgage Industries, The Lending Awards celebrates and rewards excellence across the entire lending market.

The team is very pleased to be shortlisted for this award.

Winners of the awards will be announced on the 1 November 2022.

Adam Smith shortlisted for Young Solicitor of the Year at the Family Law Awards 2022

We are delighted to announce that Adam Smith, Senior Associate in the Child Care department, has been shortlisted for the ‘Family Law Young Solicitor of the Year’ award at the Lexis Nexis Family Law Awards 2022.

The Family Law Awards brings the family law community together celebrating excellence, networking and recognising its vital contribution to society.  Now in its twelfth year, the Family Law Awards were launched in 2011 to recognise the important work of family lawyers, and celebrate their many successes and outstanding achievements.

Adam commented: “I was very honoured to have been shortlisted for this award. I am very pleased to be representing the position of young, legally aided public family lawyers in a field of extremely able solicitors from across family law disciplines”.

The winners will be announced on the 28 November at the Park Plaza Westminster Bridge in London.

Blaser Mills Law welcomes new Residential Property Partner

We are delighted to welcome Jane Hannaway to Blaser Mills Law. Jane will be joining our Residential Property team as Partner.

With over 14 years of experience Jane specialises in handling High Net Worth property cases. She has previously acted for a range of buyers, sellers, lenders and developers as well as investors and international clients.

Her strong business development drive has led to a fantastic reputation amongst her clients in and around Buckinghamshire.

Alexandra Kirk, Partner and Head of Residential Property commented: “We are pleased to announce Jane’s appointment as part of the team’s ongoing growth and expansion. Her wealth of experience will be a huge attribute to the department as we continue to provide an excellent service to our clients”.

Jane Hannaway added “ I am very excited to join Blaser Mills Law given its reputation, culture, and drive for growth. I look forward to working alongside the excellent team in expanding the department further”.

Blaser Mills Law very much welcomes Jane and we look forward to her making a positive contribution to the partnership.

Does silence speak volumes? An overview case of Barton V Morris [2023]

In the recent Supreme Court decision of Barton v Morris [2023] UKSC 3, the Court has explored the scope of implied terms in a contractual relationship and their interplay with claims for unjust enrichment.

The Issue in Dispute

Foxpace Limited (“Foxpace”), the defendant seller of a property, orally agreed to pay the claimant, Mr Barton, a fee of £1.2 million (the “Introduction Fee”) if he introduced a buyer to Foxpace and the property sold for £6.5 million. Western UK (Acton) Limited (“Western”), introduced by Mr Barton, initially agreed to purchase the property for £6.55 million but after issues came to light, negotiated a reduced purchase price of £6 million, which Foxpace claimed did not trigger the obligation to pay the Introduction Fee. The Supreme Court was asked to determine a simple question: was Foxpace liable to pay reasonable remuneration to Mr Barton in these circumstances?

The Previous Decisions

High Court

At first instance, the High Court found that there was a binding oral agreement. However, since the agreement did not make provision for what would happen if the property was sold to Western for less than £6.5 million, there was no contractual obligation on Foxpace to pay anything to Mr Barton. Further, Mr Barton was precluded from bringing a claim in unjust enrichment, because it would undermine the contractual terms agreed between the parties.

Court of Appeal

An appeal by Mr Barton was unanimously allowed by the Court of Appeal. They held that the silence of the contract as to what would happen if the sale to Western was for less than £6.5 million, meant that it did not preclude a claim in unjust enrichment. Foxpace would be unjustly enriched if it took the benefit of the introduction to Western, without paying Mr Barton a reasonable fee in the sum of £435,000. In the alternative, it was an implied term of the contract that a reasonable fee would be paid if Western purchased the property for less than £6.5 million.

The Majority Decision of the Supreme Court

Foxpace appealed the decision of the Court of Appeal. By a 3-2 majority the Supreme Court allowed the appeal on the following basis:-

Express Terms of the Contract

The express terms of an oral contract are to be divined from the evidence and are a question of fact. It was not an express term of the agreement that Mr Barton would be paid a fee if the property was sold to Western for less than £6.5 million.

Implied Term of the Contract

The Court considered whether a term should be implied into the contract to give ‘business efficacy’ to the contract i.e. because it is necessary and/or because any such term would be so obvious ‘it goes without saying’ in line with the ‘officious bystander’ test, per the principles set out in the leading case of Marks and Spencer plc v BNP Paribas Securities Services Trust Co (Jersey) Ltd [2015] UKSC 72.

Contradiction of Express Terms

The Supreme Court found that an implied term that Mr Barton would be a paid a reasonable fee if Western bought the property for less than £6.5 million could not be implied into the contract. It would contradict the express terms of the contract under which Foxpace was obliged to pay Mr Barton £1.2 million if the property sold for at least £6.5 million. It did not matter that the parties had not used the words “if, and only if” in their negotiations, the effect of the contract was that Mr Barton was only entitled to payment if the agreed trigger for payment occurred, namely a sale price of £6.5 million.

Business Efficacy

Pursuant to the express terms of the contract, a small reduction in the sale price, could result in Mr Barton being entirely deprived of the fee. Whilst it might be necessary to imply a term that Foxpace would not “play a dirty trick” by agreeing a reduced price to avoid liability to pay the £1.2 million referral fee, it was not necessary to go further and imply a term that Mr Barton is entitled to a reasonable fee if the sale completed for less than £6.5 million.

A contract cannot be rendered ‘bizarre’ or ‘uncommercial’ simply because a party contracts for a higher-than-normal payment on the fulfilment of a condition and is prepared to take the commensurate risk of a lower payment if that condition is not fulfilled. In fact, Lady Rose found that it would have been “strange” and uncommercial if Foxpace had agreed terms based on a “one-way bet” for Mr Barton. There would have been no benefit for Foxpace if Mr Barton should receive a reasonable fee regardless of the sale price.  

Statute

The Supreme Court rejected Mr Barton’s submission that an implied term for Mr Barton to be paid a reasonable fee for his service, could be implied by statute pursuant to s.15 of the Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982. It had no application as consideration was determined by the contract. It was also doubtful whether the contract constituted a ‘relevant contract’ for the purposes of the Act as it was a unilateral contract pursuant to which Mr Barton’s making of the introduction brought the contract into existence.

Implied Term Incident of Kind of Contract

It was also found that the term sought to be implied by Mr Barton, could not be implied as an ‘incident of this kind of contract’. Mr Barton sought to rely on various estate agency cases. However, the Supreme Court held that he could not rely on these authorities, not least of all, because factually, Mr Barton was not an estate agent and any fee that he was to receive was for a one-off introduction. It could not be compared to the efforts an estate agent may take and the costs they may incur to make an introduction.

Lady Rose offered a salient warning on the implication of terms in contracts, noting that “it is difficult to infer with confidence what the parties must have intended when they have entered into a lengthy and carefully drafted contract but have omitted to make provision for the matter in issue”. Whilst the contract between Foxpace and Mr Barton could not be said to be carefully drafted, caution needed to be exercised given the circumstances of the case. The fact that the parties did not refer to the possibility of a sale price being less than £6.5 million, did not automatically mean that they would have agreed what should happen in that event.

Unjust Enrichment

The issue for the Court was whether Foxpace’s enrichment arising from the introduction of Western, by Mr Barton, was unjust unless Mr Barton was paid a reasonable fee. Mr Barton contended that Foxpace would have unjustly enriched where there had been a ‘failure of basis’ as there was a common assumption that Western would purchase the property for £6.5 million. The parties did not consider a lower sale price and when the property sold for less than £6.5 million, the parties’ shared assumption and the basis of their agreement failed.

Lady Rose noted that it would be surprising to conclude that the parties did not at all envisage the possibility of the property selling for less than £6.5 million. The fact that neither of the parties raised the possibility suggests that they were assuming the sale would be for at least £6.5 million, not that they had simply not contemplated the eventuality. The most that could be said was that the parties did not discuss this issue and did not provide for it in the contract. 

Any claim in unjust enrichment would ultimately fail given that the parties had agreed the circumstances in which Foxpace was obliged to pay Mr Barton and in doing so, necessarily excluded any obligation in the absence of those circumstances.  The “silence” of the contract as to what obligations arise on the sale of the property for less than £6.5 million, excluded not only any implied contractual term (as set out above) but also a claim in unjust enrichment.

The Dissenting Judgments

The dissenting judgments of Lord Leggat and Lord Burrows are interesting as they fit much more closely with commercial reality.

The contract was silent on what would happen if the property was sold for less than £6.5 million. As an incidence of the type of contract, unless expressly agreed otherwise, a term should be implied at common law providing for Mr Barton to receive reasonable remuneration in circumstances where the property was sold for less than £6.5 million. As there was no contrary agreement, they found that Mr Barton would have been entitled to receive reasonable payment. Lord Burrows went further and considered that there was an unjust failure of basis, which would have enabled the same result to be achieved in the law of unjust enrichment. 

Comment

The majority decision in this case, may strike some as being somewhat unfair. Whilst the conclusion will no doubt be the subject of debate (and the 3-2 majority of the Supreme Court only serves to demonstrate that these are issues ripe for further deliberation), the decision does fundamentally underline the traditional approach of the Court and its reluctance to interfere with the terms of a party’s bargain.

If you require any further information or advice please get in touch with Nick Scott on nxs@blasermills.co.uk.

Examining financial disparities in divorce

Divorce is a complex and emotionally challenging process, often accompanied by financial implications. In the United Kingdom, gender disparities in wealth distribution have been a recent topic of discussion. Lucinda Holliday, Partner and Head of Family and Divorce at Blaser Mills Law, delves into the financial differences between men and women during divorce proceedings in the UK, shedding light on the factors contributing to these differences.

Earning capacity and career disruptions

One significant factor influencing financial differences in divorce between men and women in the UK is earning capacity. Historically, women have faced obstacles in their career advancement due to societal expectations and gender roles. The gap in earning potential often translates into imbalances during divorce settlements.

Women frequently experience career disruptions, such as taking breaks to care for children or elderly family members, which can limit their earning potential. This places them at a disadvantage when negotiating financial settlements. In contrast, men, who are more likely to maintain continuous employment, tend to have higher incomes and greater financial stability.

Division of assets

Another aspect contributing to financial disparities is the division of assets during divorce. In the UK, matrimonial assets are typically divided equally if that meets their respective needs, considering factors like property, savings, pensions, and investments. However, in practice, the division may not always result in an equal distribution.

Gender gaps in wealth accumulation can affect the division of assets. For instance, if one partner has contributed significantly more to the marital assets, they may be entitled to a larger share. In cases where the man is the primary breadwinner, this can result in a financial advantage for him, leaving the woman with fewer resources post-divorce.

Maintenance payments

Maintenance payments play a crucial role in determining the financial outcome of a divorce. Historically, women were more likely to receive spousal maintenance, as they were often financially dependent on their partners. However, societal shifts have seen an increase in women’s financial independence and an increase in the Courts opting for clean breaks if possible where there is no maintenance or maintenance for only a number of years.

Despite these changes, women are still more likely to be financially disadvantaged after divorce. They often face higher levels of financial need due to factors like childcare responsibilities and lower earning potential. As a result, they may require ongoing financial support from their ex-spouses. However, the awarding and enforcement of spousal maintenance can be contentious, and many women do not receive the full support they require.

A multi-faced approach
Financial differences between males and females in divorce proceedings in the UK can be attributed to various factors. Earning capacity disparities, career disruptions, unequal division of assets, and challenges in securing adequate spousal maintenance all contribute to the imbalance. As societal norms continue to evolve, efforts must be made to promote gender equality in both financial and professional realms.

Addressing these disparities requires a multi-faceted approach, including promoting equal career opportunities, encouraging shared parental responsibilities, and ensuring fair division of assets and support payments. By working towards a more equitable divorce process, we can strive for financial parity between males and females, fostering a more just and inclusive society.

Get in touch with Lucinda

Having experienced a divorce herself, Lucinda understands the emotional strain and stress that an individual may be going through allowing her to offer valuable advice and support to her clients.

To speak to Lucinda call 01494 478603 or email ljmh@blasermills.co.uk.